Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200 - Instruction Manual Ver - 02.05

PASOLINK NEO TE
CX2200
Multi-service Transport Gateway
Instruction Manual
Cautions
Read this manual carefully before use for proper operation.
Be sure to keep this manual at hand after reading it.
MADE IN JAPAN

Version Ver. 02.05

Revision History

Revision History
Rev. Published date Description
B January 2010 First edition published

(blank page)

Preface
i

Preface

Outline ................................................ iii
About This Product ........................... iv
Safety Precautions ........................... vii
Labels ............................................... xiii
Document Structure ......................... xv

Preface
ii
Thank you for purchasing the PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200 (hereinafter CX2200).
Read this manual in advance thoroughly to correctly use this product.
Keep this manual at hand for quick reference.
The manual gives descriptions required to install, set, and service this equipment.
The manual is intended for persons who know basic operations and settings of a personal
computer and network. For operations of a personal computer and general network settings, see
the manual of the equipment used or commercially available books.

Note
(1) This manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without consent of NEC.
(2) The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
(3) Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Any
discrepancies, errors, and missing information should be reported to the distributor of the
product or the NEC account sales person.
(4) NEC assumes no responsibility for the result of the operation, regardless of the description of
(3).
(5) We are ready to replace a manual book having a missing page or incorrect collating with a
perfect one.
(6) Contact information is available at http://www.nec.com.

Preface
iii
Outline
This section describes the points to be checked before using the CX2200.

Preface
iv
About This Product
Information about Voluntary Control Council for Interference by
Information Technology Equipment
This product is classified as information technology equipment complying with the standards of
Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment Class A. If the
product is used in ordinary home electric environments, it may cause interference.
The user may be required to take a proper action against interference.

EU Emission (EMI) Standards
Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

FCC Warning
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.

FCC Statement:
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices;
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful Interference to radio
communications, Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Preface
v
Safety Standard (FDA) for Laser Products
Complies with FDA performance standards for Laser products except for deviations to Laser
Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

Power Supply
This is Class III equipment. Supply SELV DC power. This equipment uses high energy DC
power; be sure to handle with great care.

Use in Medical Institutions
This product is not intended for use as (or use as a component in) equipment involving human
lives or equipment required high reliability, such as medical equipment, nuclear equipment,
aerospace equipment, or transportation equipment.
NEC assumes no responsibility for physical injury, fire, or social loss caused due to a failure with
this product used as such equipment or a control system.
In equipment or a control system, all possible measures must be taken for safety design such as
redundant design, fire spread prevention design, and malfunction prevention design.

Precautions
NEC assumes no responsibility for net economic damage, caused by lost communication
opportunity due to the equipment failure, malfunction, and other trouble, as well as external factors
such as blackout of commercial power.

Precautions on Export
Anyone who wishes to export this product is required to follow the necessary procedure including
an export license application according to the Export Trade Control Order. Any specific
documents that are necessary for obtaining the license should be requested to the distributor of the
product or the NEC sales office.

Preface
vi
Product Disposal
In the European Union

EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical
and electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from
normal household waste. This includes all of PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200 product or
electrical accessories, such as various function modules or cables.
When disposing of used products, you should comply with applicable legislation or
agreements you may have. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only
applies to the current European Union Member States.

Outside the European Union
If you wish to dispose of used electrical and electronic products outside the European Union,
please contact your local authority and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Regarding Software License Agreement
By using this product, you agree to be bound by the clauses of this license agreement. If you do
not agree this agreement, NEC will not grant you a license to use the software or make a copy of
the software. The software license agreement is provided at the end of the document.

Regarding Trademarks
The company names, product names, and service names in this document are registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.

Preface
vii
Safety Precautions
Safety has been taken into account in design and manufacture of this product. However,
mishandling or operation errors by the user may lead to a serious accident. To avoid such an
accident, please read this manual carefully to understand the contents before using the product.
There are many 'items that are not possible' or 'items that are prohibited' and it is not possible to
include all the items in this manual. Therefore, assume the items as 'not possible' unless
otherwise described as 'possible' in this manual.

Safety marks
The marks and legends used in this manual
and their meanings are listed below. Before
reading this manual, keep the following in
mind.
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this mark
may cause a fatal or serious injury to a human body.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this mark
may cause injury to a human body and damage to
physical equipment.
NOTE
Indicates the supplementary explanation that is not
related to personal safety or equipment damage.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause
fire.
electric shock.
injury.
The touching of a rotating object may cause
an injury.
Transceiver that radiates laser rays.
Indicates that the prohibition of the use of the
equipment near water for safety.
Indicates that the prohibition of the
disassembly of the equipment for safety.
The handling of the equipment with a wet
hand is prohibited for safety reasons.
The wetting of the equipment is prohibited for
safety reasons.
Indicates that the prohibition of general
actions that are not specified.
Be sure to disconnect the power cord from
the power terminal (main body) for safety
reasons.
(This mark is commonly applied to both the
AC power supply module and the DC power
supply module.)
Gives a direction for surely connecting the
ground cable to equipment having a ground
terminal.

Preface
viii
Precautions Regarding Power
Supply
WARNING
Make sure that this equipment is used within
the power supply voltage range from
DC-40.5V to -57V.
Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be
caused.

Securely insert the power cable into the
power connector (main body).
Only trained maintenance engineers should
handle the connection/disconnection of a
power cable.
If metal or the like makes contact with the
power connector, fire or electric shock may
be caused..
Do not put any object on the power cable.
Damage to the power cable may cause fire
or electric shock.

For the power cable supplying power cable,
securely connect the DC power cable to the
power terminal at the rear of this equipment,
by correctly identifying -48V side and RTN(G)
side and avoiding mutual contact.
A connection error of the power cable on the
-48V side and the RNG(G) side or mutual
contact may cause fire, electric shock, or
some equipment malfunction.
Connect or disconnect the power cable from
the power cable according to the procedure
and precautions that are described in this
manual.
Mishandling may cause fire or electric shock.
Always disconnect the external power source
before connecting/disconnecting the power
connector from the power cable.
caused.
Be sure to connect the ground wire to the
ground terminal.
Otherwise, electric shock may be caused
Connection of the ground wire reduces
damage during lighting or prevents noise.
Do not pull or insert the power cable from or
into the power connector (main body) with a
wet hand.
Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

When the power cable is connected to the
power connector (main body), do not touch
the main body with a wet hand.
Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

Before connecting or disconnecting the
ground wire, be sure to disconnect the power
cable from the power connector (main body).
If the ground wire is connected or
disconnected while the power cable is
connected to the power connector (main
body), electric shock may be caused.
Always hold the power supply plug when
removing it.
Otherwise the power supply cable may be
damaged, causing fire or electric shock.

NOTE
An aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for the power
supply module of this equipment. The storing of an
aluminum electrolytic capacitor for a long period of time
without charging causes performance deterioration.
Charge the capacitor by turning on the power supply for
around two hours once a year for safety reasons even if
it is not used for a long time.
When not using this equipment, always disconnect the
power cable from the power connector (main body) for
safety reasons.
Preface
ix
Precautions Regarding
Installation, Transportation,
Storage, and Operating
Environments
WARNING
Do not place a container with liquid such as a
flowerpot, glass, cosmetics, chemical near
the equipment.
If liquid is spilled over the equipment, fire or
electric shock may be caused.

Do not use this equipment in a humid
environment (humidity 90% or higher) or in
the environment that causes condensation
such as in a bathroom or in the vicinity of a
humidifier.
caused.

The contents of the CD-ROM of this manual
are not voice data. Use it only with a
CD-ROM player. Otherwise, the loud noise
may impair the hearing function or damage
the speaker..
Never overlay one unit on another during
installation. If the unit falls, you may suffer
serious injury such as fracture.
When one unit needs to be overlaid on
another, be sure to use a rack.
When installing the equipment units at the
top and bottom, always mount them on the
racks.
Keep the equipment and power cable away
from fire or flame such as a heater.
Damage to the cover or power cable may
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

Do not place the equipment in a location
where oil splashes, steam generates, or
much dust is present.
Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or malfunction
may be caused.

Do not place the equipment during operation
in a location exposed to direct sunlight or a
high temperature (55C or higher).
Otherwise, the temperature inside the
equipment rises excessively, probably
causing fire.
Always take a measure to handle
electrostatic discharge before handling the
equipment.
The touching of the equipment without taking
such a measure causes electrostatic
discharge failure, thereby causing fire,
electric shock, or some equipment
malfunction.
Do not touch the components when handling
each module.
Otherwise, the components may be
disengaged from the substrate, causing fire,
malfunction.
As this product is susceptible to impact, do
not drop or hit the product with a hard object.
Otherwise, the product may be damaged,
causing fire, electric shock, or some
equipment malfunction.
Store each module by wrapping it with an
insulated sheet.
An electrostatic discharge failure or
accumulation of dust on the product by
storing without protection may cause fire,
malfunction.

Preface
x

CAUTION
The temperature and humidity ranges that
are specified in this manual must be
observed at transportation and storage of this
equipment.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
Do not cover the ports of this equipment.
Otherwise, the internal temperature rises,
possibly causing a fire.
Do not place this equipment on an unstable
location (unstable or sloping stand).
Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip
over, causing an injury or some equipment
malfunction.
Do not place this equipment in the
environment of high vibration or impact.
Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip
over, causing an injury or some equipment
malfunction.
This product has many angles.
Handle the product with the utmost care to
avoid any injury
Mounting of the equipment on a rack must be
performed by more than one person.

NOTE
If the equipment is used near a radio or TV, the noise
from the equipment may affect the radio or TV. If a
device that generates a strong magnetic field is present
near the equipment, the equipment may be affected by
noise, resulting in malfunction. In this case, keep the
equipment away from other units.

Precautions Regarding Fault
and Trouble
WARNING
When the equipment is dropped or damaged,
turn off the power, disconnect the power
cable from the power connector (main body),
and report the incident to the distributor of
the equipment or the sales person.
Leaving the equipment in service may cause
fire, electric shock, or malfunction.

When liquid such as water enters inside of
the equipment, turn off the power, disconnect
the power cable from the power connector
(main body), and report the incident to the
distributor of the equipment or the NEC sales
person.

When a foreign object enters inside of the
equipment, turn off the power, disconnect the
power cable from the power connector (main
body), and report the incident to the
person.
When the power cable is damaged, replace it
with a normal cable according to the
procedure and the precautions that are
described in this manual.

When detecting smoke or abnormal odor
from this equipment, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cable from the power
terminal (main body), check that smoke is no
longer emitted, and report the incident to the
person

Preface
xi

CAUTION
Do not carry out electrical construction during
a thunder storm.
caused.

Precautions for Maintenance
CAUTION
Before starting any maintenance of this
equipment, always turn off the power and
disconnect the power cable from the power
connector (main body) for safety reasons.
After the purchase of this equipment, consult
with the distributor or sales person for regular
cleaning of the inside of the equipment.
Dust accumulated inside of the equipment for
a long period of time may cause fire or some
When replacing a FAN module after the
power is turned on, make sure that the fan
stops rotating before replacing it
The touching of a rotating fan may cause an
injury.

NOTE
Clean the external surfaces of the equipment by lightly
wiping with wet soft cloth immersed in water and neutral
detergent. During the cleaning, remove the power
cable from the DC power terminal (main body) for
safety.
Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzine or
thinner to prevent deformation or discoloration
Do not apply insecticides because they may cause
deformation or discoloration

Cautions on Handling the
Transceiver Accessories
CAUTION
As laser beams are used, do not look directly
through the optical transceiver section after
the transceiver is installed in the main body
and the power is turned on.

As the surfaces of some transceivers
become hot during use, handle them
carefully.
Mishandling may cause a burn injury.
Before connecting the optical fiber cable and
each transceiver, check for any connector
damage, bent connector pins, stains, or dust.
Any connector damage or dust or stain on
the connector may cause a short-circuit,
thereby causing a fire. A stain on the
transceiver section or end of the connector of
the optical fiber cable may prevent normal
communication.
Use the transceiver specified by NEC.
The use of any other transceivers may hinder
normal operation or cause a failure of the
main body.

Preface
xii
Other Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
Inspection, adjustments, cleaning, and repair
of the inside of this equipment by anyone
other than the NEC authorized parties must
be strictly prohibited as such activities are
dangerous.
Some internal sections of this equipment
bear a high voltage, which may cause fire or
electric shock.
The customer must consult with the
distributor of the equipment or NEC sales
person for inspection, adjustments, cleaning,
or repair of the inside of this equipment.
Disassembling and remodeling the inside of
the equipment by anyone other than the NEC
concerned parties are strictly prohibited.
Such handling may cause fire, electric shock,
or some equipment malfunction.

Handle this equipment with care to prevent
any liquid from entering this equipment or the
equipment from getting wet.
Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or some
equipment malfunction may be caused.

CAUTION
Do not insert metal objects or flammable
objects into the internal section from the
openings of this equipment such as ports.
The use of the equipment with such objects
may cause fire, electric shock, or some
Do not place any object on this equipment or
climb on the equipment.
Such behavior can cause some equipment
malfunction or an injury.

Preface
xiii
Labels
The following labels are attached to the product.

The touching of a rotating object may cause an injury.

Electrostatic warning label
Always take measures to handle electrostatic discharge before
handling the equipment.

Indicates that a transceiver that radiates laser beams may be
installed.

Warning label relating to Class 1 LASER.
Do not look directly through the optical transceiver port.

Indicates that this equipment complies with the FDA Standards.

Indicates that this product complies with the VCCI Class A
Standards.

Indicates that this product complies with the FCC Part15 Class A
Standards.

Indicates that electrical and electronic wastes must be separated
from household refuse in the EU member countries based on the
laws that are enforced in each EU member country.

Indicates that this equipment complies with the CE Marking
Standards.
Preface
xiv
These labels are affixed to the system as the following picture shows.

Preface
xv
Document Structure
This manual is organized as shown below.

Preface Describes the points to be checked before using the CX2200.
Abbreviations Lists the abbreviations used in this manual and their full
spelling.
1 Overview of the Device Describes the features, device configuration, and device
specifications of the CX2200.
2 Operations Describes how to operate CLI (Command Line Interface), and
explains the procedures for setting the basic functions such as
VLAN, QoS and link aggregation; ATM functions such as PVC
registration, ATM shaper, OAM and IMA; TDM functions such
as TDM path and TDMoP (CES); and EtherOAM functions.
3 Installation Describes the procedures for installing the CX2200,
connecting cables and power, and setting consoles.
4 Maintenance Describes how to operate the maintenance functions for
networks and devices and the management functions by a
monitor or log, and explains the upgrading procedure, as well
as troubleshooting (how to find a solution when the device
does not operate as desired and the procedure for restoring
the default settings).
Appendix Lists troubles, counter monitoring conditions, command
errors, restart factors, and restrictions.

*"CPUSW" in this manual indicates the CPUSW card or the CPUSWE card.

Preface
xvi
(Blank page)
Abbreviations
xvii

Abbreviations

1 Outline........................................... xviii
2 List of Abbreviations ..................... xix

Abbreviations
xviii
1 Outline
This section lists the abbreviations used in this manual.

Abbreviations
xix
2 List of Abbreviations
Abbreviations Full Spelling
A AIS
ALM
ANSI
APS
ARP
ATM
ATMoP
Alarm Indication Signal
Alarm
American National Standards Institute
Automatic Protection System
Address Resolution Protocol
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM over Packet
B BBE
BER
BITS
BPDU
Background Block Error
Bit Error Rate
Building Integrated Timing Supply
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
C CC
CCM
CES
CESoPSN
CL
CLI
CLP
CoS
CPU
CR
CRC
CTC
Continuity Check
Continuity Check Message
Circuit Emulation Service
CES over Packet Switched Network
Cleared
Command Line Interface
Cell Loss Priority
Class of Service
Central Processing Unit
Critical
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Common Transmit Clock
D DA
DCS
DLF
DM
DMM
DMR
DSCP
Destination Address
Digital Clock Supply
Destination Lookup Failure
Delay Measurement
Delay Measurement Message
Delay Measurement Reply
Differentiated Services Code Point
E ECID
EMC
Emulated Circuit Identifier
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Abbreviations
xx
EMI
ERR
ES
ESD
ESF
ETH
Electro-Magnetic Interference
Error
Errored Seconds
Electrostatic Discharge
Extended Super Frame
Ethernet
F FCS
FDB
FE
FEBE
FER
FG
FLT
FTP
FTTx
Frame Check Sequence
Forwarding Data Base
Fast Ether
Far End Block Error
Frame Error Rate
Frame Ground
Fault
File Transfer Protocol
Fiber To The x
G G
GbE
GND
Ground
Gigabit Ether
Ground
I ID
IEEE
IF
IFG
IMA
IP
ITC
ITU
Identification
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Information
Inter Frame Gap
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
Internet Protocol
Independent Transmit Clock
International Telecommunication Union
L L2SW
LACP
LAG
LAN
LB
LBM
LBR
LCD
LCV
Layer 2 Switch
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Link Aggregation Group
Local Area Network
Loop Back
Loop Back Message
Loop Back message Reply
Loss of Cell Delineation
Line Code Violation
Abbreviations
xxi
LED
LIF
LLB
LM
LMM
LMR
LOC
LODS
LOF
LOP
LOS
LT
LTM
LTR
Light Emitting Diode
Loss of IMA Frame
Link aggregation Load Balancing
Loss Measurement
Loss Measurement Message
Loss Measurement Reply
Loss Of Continuity
Link Out of Delay Synchronization
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Pointer
Loss Of Signal
Link Trace
Link Trace Message
Link Trace Reply
M MAC
MDI
MDIX
MEF
MEG
MEL
MEP
MIB
MIP
MJ
MMF
MN
MS-AIS
MTU
Media Access Control
Media Dependent Interface
Media Dependent Interface with Crossover
Metro Ethernet Forum
Maintenance Entity Group
MEG Level
MEG End Point
Management Information Base
MEG Intermediate Point
Major
Multi Mode Fiber
Minor
Multiplex Section AIS
Maximum Transmission Unit
N NRZ
NTP
None Return to Zero
Network Time Protocol
O OAM
OOF
OPT
Operation Administration and Maintenance
Out Of Frame
Optical
P P-AIS
PDH
Pass-AIS
Pre synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Abbreviations
xxii
PDU
PHY
PKG
PMON
PVC
PW
PWR
Protocol Data Unit
Physical layer
Package
Performance Monitor
Permanent Virtual Circuit
Pseudo Wire
Power
Q QoS Quality of Service
R RAI
RDI
RED
RFC
RL
RMON
RPL
RSTP
RTP
RX
Remote Alarm Indication
Remote Defect Indication
Random Early Detection
Request For Comments
Ring Link
Remote network Monitoring
Ring Protection Link
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Real time Transport Protocol
Receive
S SA
SAToP
SD
SDH
SELV
SF
SFP
SMF
SNMP
SNTP
SONET
SP
STM
STP
STP
SW
Source Address
Structure-Agnostic TDM over Packet
Signal Degrade
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Safety Extra Low Voltage
Signal Fail
Small Form-factor Pluggable
Single Mode Fiber
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Time Protocol
Synchronous Optical Network
Strict Priority
Synchronous Transport Mode
Spanning Tree Protocol
Shielded Twisted Pair
Switch
T TDM Time Division Multiplexing
Abbreviations
xxiii
TDMoP
TLV
TPID
TS
TTL
TX
TDM over Packet
Type Length Value
Tag Protocol Identifier
Time Slot
Time To Live
Transmit
U UAS
UDP
UPC-RED
UTP
Unavailable Second
User Datagram Protocol
Usage Parameter Control-RED
Unshielded Twist Pair
V VC
VCI
VID
VLAN
VP
VPI
Virtual Channel
Virtual Channel Identifier
VLAN Identifier
Virtual LAN
Virtual Path
Virtual Path Identifier
W WDTOVF
WR
WRED
WRR
WTR
Watch Dog Timer Over Flow
Warning
Weighted Random Early Detection
Weighted Round Robin
Wait To Restore
X XC Cross Connect

(blank page)

Contents
xxv
Contents
Preface ....................................................................... i
Outline.....................................................................................iii
About This Product ...............................................................iv
Safety Precautions ...............................................................vii
Labels....................................................................................xiii
Document Structure .............................................................xv
Abbreviations ....................................................... xvii
1 Outline...............................................................................xviii
2 List of Abbreviations..........................................................xix
1 Overview of Device ............................................1-1
1.1 Outline............................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Features and Configuration .......................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Features of the CX2200 ............................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Unit Configuration ...................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2.1 Unit outline ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2.2 Components .................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 Specifications............................................................... 1-18
1.3.1 Unit Specifications.....................................................................................1-18
1.3.2 Interface Specifications .............................................................................1-20
1.3.2.1 Line interface specifications .......................................................................... 1-20
1.3.2.2 Console port connectors ............................................................................... 1-27
1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification.......................................................................... 1-29
Contents
xxvi
2 Operations ..........................................................2-1
2.1 Outline............................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Commands...................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Entering a Command ................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.1.1 Rules for entering a command ........................................................................ 2-4
2.2.2 Command Line Interface............................................................................ 2-5
2.3 Setting of Basic Functions.......................................... 2-11
2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions.........................................................................2-11
2.3.1.1 Port ................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.1.2 VLAN............................................................................................................. 2-33
2.3.1.3 QoS control ................................................................................................... 2-49
2.3.1.4 Link aggregation............................................................................................ 2-86
2.3.1.5 Frame size..................................................................................................... 2-97
2.3.1.6 Spanning tree protocol .................................................................................. 2-98
2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions ................................................................2-114
2.3.2.1 Port isolate .................................................................................................. 2-114
2.3.2.2 Filtering........................................................................................................ 2-118
2.3.2.3 Reference clock control function ................................................................. 2-122
2.4 ATM Functions ........................................................... 2-128
2.4.1 ATM Path Setting....................................................................................2-128
2.4.1.1 PVC setting ................................................................................................. 2-130
2.4.1.2 ATMoP ........................................................................................................ 2-134
2.4.1.3 ATM cell relay.............................................................................................. 2-150
2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function .............................................................................2-153
2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting...................................................................................2-158
2.4.4 IMA Function...........................................................................................2-163
2.5 TDM Functions ........................................................... 2-171
2.5.1 TDM Setting ............................................................................................2-171
2.5.2 TDMoP Setting........................................................................................2-179
2.6 EtherOAM Functions ................................................. 2-210
2.6.1 EtherOAM Function.................................................................................2-210
2.6.2 EtherRing Function .................................................................................2-248
2.7 Configuration Data..................................................... 2-266
Contents
xxvii
2.7.1 About Configuration Data........................................................................2-266
2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data .................................................................... 2-267
2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data......................................................................... 2-268
2.7.2 Configuration Data Management ............................................................2-270
2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data............................... 2-271
2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data................................ 2-272
2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server................................................ 2-276
3 Installation ..........................................................3-1
3.1 Outline............................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Settings for Network Connection ................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Installation Procedure ................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.2 Unit Mounting............................................................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Cable Connection....................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.3.1 Network connection mode............................................................................... 3-7
3.2.3.2 Cable connection............................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.4 Power on and Login ..................................................................................3-21
3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection.............................................................. 3-22
3.2.4.2 Power on ....................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.4.3 Login.............................................................................................................. 3-27
3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance.............................................................3-34
3.2.5.1 Setting IP addresses ..................................................................................... 3-36
3.2.5.2 Remote maintenance through in-band network............................................. 3-36
3.2.5.3 Remote maintenance through out-band network .......................................... 3-45
3.2.5.4 Maintenance network construction................................................................ 3-52
3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase ...................................................................3-54
3.2.6.1 Setting date and time..................................................................................... 3-55
3.2.6.2 Setting system information ............................................................................ 3-59
3.2.6.3 Setting functions............................................................................................ 3-59
3.2.6.4 Saving set information................................................................................... 3-60
4 Maintenance........................................................4-1
4.1 Outline............................................................................. 4-2
4.2 Method of Operating Maintenance and Management
Functions .............................................................................. 4-3
Contents
xxviii
4.2.1 Loopback Test............................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.1.1 Ether network loopback test ............................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test.............................................................. 4-8
4.2.2 Connection Test ........................................................................................4-18
4.2.2.1 Connection test procedure ............................................................................ 4-18
4.2.3 SNMP-based Management .......................................................................4-20
4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP................................................................................................ 4-22
4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager........................................................................... 4-23
4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance........................................ 4-24
4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager ............................................................................... 4-24
4.2.3.5 Saving the set data........................................................................................ 4-25
4.2.4 Counter Monitoring....................................................................................4-26
4.2.4.1 Port counters ................................................................................................. 4-26
4.2.4.2 VLAN counters .............................................................................................. 4-31
4.2.4.3 ATM counters ................................................................................................ 4-37
4.2.4.4 Line quality counters ..................................................................................... 4-47
4.2.4.5 EtherOAM counter......................................................................................... 4-49
4.2.5 Fault Monitoring ........................................................................................4-53
4.2.6 Faults ........................................................................................................4-56
4.2.7 syslog Functions .......................................................................................4-57
4.2.8 MAC Learning ...........................................................................................4-62
4.2.8.1 CPUSW MAC learning function..................................................................... 4-62
4.2.9 Port Mirroring ............................................................................................4-65
4.2.10 System Reboot........................................................................................4-69
4.2.11 Initialization .............................................................................................4-71
4.2.12 Replacement ...........................................................................................4-73
4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card ................................................................................. 4-75
4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card ................................................................................. 4-77
4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card ........................................................................... 4-79
4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit .................................................................................. 4-83
4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card.................................................... 4-85
4.2.13 Resource Monitoring ...............................................................................4-86
4.2.14 NTP Function ..........................................................................................4-88
4.3 Useful Functions.......................................................... 4-91
4.3.1 Version Up ................................................................................................4-91
4.3.1.1 Version up procedure.................................................................................... 4-92
4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection Function ......................................................4-98
4.4 Troubleshooting......................................................... 4-103
Contents
xxix
Appendix................................................................... 1
1 Outline....................................................................................3
2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism..................................................3
3 Fault List ..............................................................................18
4 Trap List ...............................................................................24
5 Counter Monitoring Condition List....................................75
6 Command Error List............................................................87
7 Restart Cause List.............................................................113
8 IMA State List.....................................................................114
9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection
List .........................................................................................116
10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List...................119
11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell Reception .121

(blank page)

Overview of Device
1-1

1 Overview of Device
1.1 Outline..........................................1-2
1.2 Features and Configuration .......1-3
1.2.1 Features of the CX2200.................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Unit Configuration........................................... 1-5
1.3 Specifications............................1-18
1.3.1 Unit Specifications ........................................ 1-18
1.3.2 Interface Specifications................................. 1-20

Outline
1-2
1.1 Outline
This chapter describes the features, device configuration, and device specifications of the CX2200.

Features and Configuration
1-3
1.2 Features and Configuration
1.2.1 Features of the CX2200
The CX2200 series are a series of high-performance multi-service aggregation switches that can
apply to establishing broadband access network such as FTTx service to wide-area Ethernet
network and mobile access aggregation network called mobile backhaul.

Various access lines
CX2200 provides various line cards to flexibly support establishing various networks. The fast
Ethernet interface is provided as standard equipment.
Ethernet line cards supporting GbE (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-X)
TDM line cards supporting T1/E1 (Channelized T1/E1)
ATM line cards supporting T1/E1 and STM-1 (T1/E1 IMA, STM-1/OC-3)
Multiservice line cards supporting various TDM/ATMs
(TDM: Channelized T1/E1 ATM: T1/E1 IMA)

Line emulation function
CX2200 provides the line emulation function to packetize TDM/ATMs, which enables the traffic to
be integrated into the cost-efficient packet network.
TDM emulation: SAToP, CESoPSN
ATM emulation: ATMoP (cell mode)

OAM functions
CX2200 provides Ethernet and ATM OAM functions to improve the maintenance capability.
Ethernet: continuity monitoring, continuity confirmation, performance measurement
ATM: alarm transfer

1-4
Various VLAN functions
CX2200 provides various VLAN functions for effective use of networks.
Portbase VLAN
Tagbase VLAN
Extended-VLAN

MPLS function
This function corresponds to the MPLS function that supports EoMPLS, ATM/TDMoMPLS, and
various line interfaces. This function is made available by purchasing a separate MPLS function
license. Refer to the Instruction Manual (MPLS) and Command Reference (MPLS) for the setting
method and the details.

SNMP functions
CX2200 provides a network management protocols defined in the RFC1157 (SNMPv1: Simple
Network Management Protocol Version1 and SNMPv2c: Community String-Based SNMPv2) to
retain own operational statuses in a database called MIB (Management Information Base) as an
SNMP agent. These statuses can be monitored or managed by the SNMP manager.

NTP functions
CX2200 provides Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTPv3: Simple Network Time Protocol
Version3), with which an exact time information source can be structured hierarchically.

1-5
1.2.2 Unit Configuration
1.2.2.1 Unit outline
The appearance of the CX2200 is show below.
The outer dimensions of the CX2200 are 430 mm in width, 230 mm in depth, and 43.6 mm in
height (without the flange), so the unit can be mounted in the 19-inch rack.

1-6
1.2.2.2 Components
CX2200
Front (connectors and indication lamps)
The front of the CX2200 has various insertion slots in which various cards are to be mounted.

Item Indication Color Description
(1) LINE1 slot LINE1 - This slot mounts various line cards.
CPUSW card and LINE2 card cannot
be mounted.
(2) CPUSW slot CPUSW - This slot mounts CPUSW cards.
LINE1/LINE2 card cannot be mounted.
(3) LINE2 slot LINE2 - This slot mounts various line cards.
CPUSW and LINE1 card cannot be
mounted.
(4) FAN unit FAN - This unit mounts a FAN module for
cooling equipment.
When the CPUSWE card is mounted
and the unit temperature drops to 45
degrees or lower, the FAN rotates at
low speed and when the unit
temperature reaches 50 degrees or
higher, the FAN rotates at high speed.
* When the power is turned on, the
FAN rotates at high speed.
(5) FG terminal - A terminal for connection to frame
ground
(6) Power switch PWR - Switch to turn on/off the equipment
(7) Power LED PWR1/PWR2 Green This LED lights up in green when the
main power is supplied.
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2) (7) (6)
(8)
(9)
1-7
(8) FAN unit fixing
screw
- - Screw to fix the FAN unit to the
chassis
* Be sure to tighten the screw
completely when the FAN unit is
mounted on the chassis.
(9) FAN unit drawing
knob
- - Knob to remove the FAN unit.

1-8
CPUSW Card

(1) ALM lamp ALM Red Indicates the fault state of the card.
On: A failure has occurred in the card
or an error has been found during
self-diagnosis.
Blink: Failure occurs in FAN or low
temperature.
Off: The card is normal.
(2) INS lamp INS Green/
Yellow
Indicates the operating state of the
card.
On (Green): The card is in the normal
state.
On (Yellow): The card is initial state.
Blink (Yellow): The card is in the initial
setting state or self-diagnosis state.
Blink (green and yellow): The states
are given below.
- The module is downloading
software, FPGA, or configuration.
- The module is uploading
configuration, failure information,
or local log.
Off: The card stops services, has a
unit failure, or finds an error during
self-diagnosis.
(3) Power connector 1 PWR1 Green Power connector of the unit.
On: Power is supplied normally.
Off: Failure occurs in power supply.
* Power can be supplied via both or
only one side of PWR1/2.
PWR
SELV
GND -48V
PULL
ALM PWR1
ETH RS-232C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FE CONSOLE SELV
GND -48V
PWR2
INS
CPUSW
EXT-M
-48V
(11) (10) (1) (2) (9) (6) (7) (8) (3) (4) (5) (11)
1-9
(5) Power switch PWR - Power on/off switch of the unit. Tilt
the switch to right/left with pulling it
out. The left side is Off, and the right
side is On.
(6) Console port 2 CONSOLE
RS-232C
- This is a console port used to connect
to a local console terminal. An
RS-232C cable is used for the
connection. A cross cable is used for
the connection with a console (such as
a PC).
ETH
to a local console terminal for the
purpose of network download. An
RJ45 STP (category 5) cable is used
for the connection.
(8) Maintenance port EXT-M - This is a port to which external
memory is connected (for
maintenance).
(9) Fast ether port FE17-24 Green/
Yellow
Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 10/100BASE-TX. An
for the connection.
LED (Green):
On as a link is established.
Blink as a link is established or
frame is sent/received
Off as no link is established.
LED (Yellow):
On as a 100M link is established
(10) Frame ground
connection terminal
Terminal for connection to frame
ground
(11) Card fixing screw - - Screw to fix a card to the chassis.
* When a card is mounted to the
chassis, be sure to tighten the screw
before use.
1-10
CPUSWE Card

On: A failure has occurred in the card
or an error has been found during
self-diagnosis.
Blink: Failure occurs in FAN or low
temperature.
(2) INS lamp INS Green/
Yellow
Indicates the operating state of the
card.
On (Green): The card is in the normal
state.
On (Yellow): The card is initial state.
Blink (Yellow): The card is in the initial
setting state or self-diagnosis state.
Blink (green and yellow): The states
are given below.
- The module is downloading
software, FPGA, or configuration.
- The module is uploading
configuration, failure information,
or local log.
Off: The card stops services, has a
unit failure, or finds an error during
self-diagnosis.
* Power can be supplied via both or
only one side of PWR1/2.
(11) (10) (1) (2) (9) (6) (7) (8) (3) (4) (5) (11)
PWR
SELV
RTN
PULL
ALM PWR1
ETH RS-232C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FE CONSOLE SELV
RTN -48V
PWR2 INS
CPUSWE -48V
EXT-CLK
1-11
(5) Power switch PWR - Power on/off switch of the unit. Tilt
the switch to right/left with pulling it
out. The left side is Off, and the right
side is On.
RS-232C
to a local console terminal. An
RS-232C cable is used for the
connection. A cross cable is used for
the connection with a console (such as
a PC).
ETH
to a local console terminal for the
purpose of network download. An
for the connection.
(8) Clock port EXT-CLK - This is a port to output clocks.
(9) Fast ether port FE17-24 Green/
Yellow
Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 10/100BASE-TX. An
for the connection.
LED (Green):
On as a link is established.
Blink as a link is established or
frame is sent/received
Off as no link is established.
LED (Yellow):
On as a 100M link is established
(10) Frame ground
connection terminal
Terminal for connection to frame
ground
before use.

1-12
2GBE line card

On: A failure has occurred in the card.
SFP interface
(port25)
25 Green Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/
BX. A SFP (mini GBIC) module is
used to connect a fiber-optic cable.
LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates port state.
On: A link is established (Link-Up).
Off: No link is established (Link-Down).
(2)
ACT lamp ACT Green Indicates port state
Blink: Communication is in progress.
Off: Communication is not in progress.
1000BASE-T 25 - Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 1000BASE-T. An
RJ45 STP (category 5E or higher)
cable is used for the connection.
LINK lamp -
(Connector)
Green Indicates the LAN port state.
(3)
SPEED lamp -
(Connector)
Yellow Indicates the LAN port state.
This lamp lights only when
1000BASE-T is connected.
SFP interface
(port26)
26 - Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/
BX. A SFP (mini GBIC) module is
used to connect a fiber-optic cable.
(4)
LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates port state
LINK
ACT
LINK
ACT
25 26
ALM
2GBE
(6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1-13
ACT lamp ACT Green Indicates port state
Off: Communication is not in progress.
1000BASE-T 26 - Port to connect the CX2200 to
Ethernet using 1000BASE-T. An
RJ45 STP (category 5E or higher)
cable is used for the connection.
LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates the LAN port state.
(5)
SPEED lamp ACT Yellow Indicates the LAN port state.
This lamp lights only when
1000BASE-T is connected.
before use.

1-14
32T1E1H line card

(2) T1/E1 line 1-16 - This port is used to connect this
product to T1/E1 line.
An MDR68 pin connector is used for
the connection.
the connection.
(4) Card fixing screws - - Screws to fix a card to the chassis.
chassis, be sure to tighten the
screws before use.

(1) (4) (2) (3) (4)
1-15
32T1E1T line card

(4) (1) (2) (3) (4)

the connection.
the connection.
screws before use.

32T1E1T
ALM
1-16 33-48
1-16
1ATM155A line card

SFP interface 1 - Port to connect the CX2200 to an
STM-1/OC-3 line. A SFP (mini GBIC)
module is used to connect a fiber-optic
cable.
LINK lamp LINK Green Indicates the port state.
(2)
FAIL lamp FAIL Red Indicates the port state.
On: A line failure (F1) has occurred.
Blink: A line failure (F2-F3) has
occurred.
Off: No line failure occurs.
screws before use.

ALM
FAIL
1
1ATM155A
LINK
(1) (2) (3) (3)
1-17
Back surface (label)
The label on the back surface of the product body of CX2200 is shown below. As the product
number of the CX2200, "SPEC.No.NWA-035874-001" is indicated.

Specifications
1-18
1.3 Specifications
1.3.1 Unit Specifications
The following table lists the CX2200 specifications.
For the specification relating to MPLS, refer to the Instruction Manual (MPLS).
Function Specifications
T1/E1 (MDR 68 x 2) 32
STM-1/OC-3 (SFP) 1
Basic ports
10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) 8
Uplink ports 1000BASE-T (RJ-45) 2
1000BASE-X (SFP) 2
10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) 1 Maintenance ports
RS-232C (RJ-45) 1
Interface
Clock port BITS (DB9 female) 1
Packet switching
performance
5.7Gbps Switch
Packet transfer performance 4.2Mpps
MAC learning 16K entries
VLAN Up to 256 VLANs (VLANID range: 1-4094)
Portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN [802.1Q]
Extended VLAN [802.1ad]
QoS Priority control, Bandwidth control
OAM Ethernet OAM (Y.1731/802.1ag)
Ethernet
Ring Ether Ring (ITU-T G.8032/Y.1731)
Setting granularity 64kbps
Number of classes 4 classes / output port
Ether shaper
Algorithm SP, Deficit WRR
Number of TDM paths 16T1E1H/32T1E1H: Up to 112
32T1E1T: Up to 96
Circuit emulation SAToP (RFC4553), CESoPSN (RFC5086)
TDM
Clock synchronization Line clock, Adaptive clock
Specifications
1-19
Function Specifications
Number of VPs/VCs Up to 256
Link redundancy IMA (AF-PHY-0086.001/I.761) (T1/E1)
ATM
(T1/E1,
STM-1/OC-3)
Circuit emulation ATM over Packet, ATM over MPLS (RFC4717)
*1
Setting granularity T1/E1: 64kbps
(T1: 64k to 12.288M, E1: 64k to 16.384M)
STM-1: 500kbps (500k to 150.0M)
Number of classes 4 classes / output port
ATM shaper
Algorithm SP
Input range -40.5 to -57V Power
Input rating -48VDC/3.0A
Network management SNMPv1/v2c (RFC 157,1902),
MIB-II (RFC1213), syslog (RFC3164), RMON
(RFC1757)
Maintenance and operation CLI, TELNET (RFC854), FTP (RFC959),
SNTPv3 (RFC2030), Remote File Update
Guaranteed operating
temperature
Temperature: -5 to 50C
Humidity: 5 to 90% (no condensation)
Operable temperature Temperature: -10 to 55C
Environment
conditions
(* FAN removal
and FAN failure
at 45C or
higher are not
guaranteed)
Storage temperature Temperature: -20 to 65C
External dimensions (WDH) 43023043.6mm (without the flange)
*1 To use this function, a separate MPLS license must be purchased.
32T1E1H line card operation mode 32T1E1T line card operation mode
Port Operation mode
Port1 to Port16 TDM mode
TDMoP mode
ATMoP mode

Port Operation mode
TDMoP mode
TDMoP mode

Specifications
1-20
1.3.2 Interface Specifications
1.3.2.1 Line interface specifications

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T interface

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Appearance and Pin Assignment

10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Straight Connection
Port of this unit Straight cable Terminal port
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Internal
connection
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-

D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8

8 1
Specifications
1-21
10/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T Cross Connection
Port of this unit Cross cable Terminal port
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Internal
connection
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-

D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.

Specifications
1-22
1000BASE-X interface
The 1000BASE-X port is the SFP (mini GBIC) connector. Switching between 1000BASE-SX/LX
is possible by changing the SFP module.
For the SFP module, use the recommended CX2000 series product. Contact NEC for the
recommended product.
The following table lists the physical standard of the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/BX.
Note When removing an SPF module, pull out the module straight with the ejector being
horizontal.
Interface Standard
Item Standard value
Standard 1000BASE-
SX
(802.3z)
1000BASE-
LX
(802.3z)
1000BASE-
ZX
1000BASE-
BX10-D
(802.3ah)
1000BASE-
BX10-U
(802.3ah)
Interface speed (Mbits/sec) 1250
Conductor count 2 1
Transmission medium MMF SMF
Encoding system 8B10B
Wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1520 to 1580 1480 to 1500 1260 to 1360
Spectrum width (nm) 0.85 (RMS) 4 (RMS) 1 (
20
) 0.88 3.5
Max. output power
(dBm)
0 -3 +5 -3
Min. output power (dBm) -9.5 -11 0 -9
Sending
part
Extinction ratio (dB) 9 or more 9 or more 7 or more 6 or more
Wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1520 to 1580 1260 to 1360 1480 to 1500
Min. received light
power (dBm)
-17 -19 -24 -19.5
Receiving
part
Max. received light
power (dBm)
0 -3 -3 -3

1000BASE-X Eye Mask
1.3
0.8
1.0
0.5
0.2
0
-0.2
0 22 37.5 62.5 78 100
Specifications
1-23
T1/E1 interface

T1/E1 Interface (MDR 68 Pins, Female) Appearance

T1/E1 Line Pin Assignment
Port of this unit (Port 1-16)
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
GND
CH16_IN+
CH16_OUT+
CH15_IN+
CH15_OUT+
CH14_IN+
CH14_OUT+
CH13_IN+
CH13_OUT+
CH12_IN+
CH12_OUT+
CH11_IN+
CH11_OUT+
CH10_IN+
CH10_OUT+
CH9_IN+
CH9_OUT+
CH8_IN+
CH8_OUT+
CH7_IN+
CH7_OUT+
CH6_IN+
CH6_OUT+
CH5_IN+
CH5_OUT+
Ground
CH16 Receive+
CH16 Send+
CH15 Receive+
CH15 Send+
CH14 Receive+
CH14 Send+
CH13 Receive+
CH13 Send+
CH12 Receive+
CH12 Send+
CH11 Receive+
CH11 Send+
CH10 Receive+
CH10 Send+
CH9 Receive+
CH9 Send+
CH8 Receive+
CH8 Send+
CH7 Receive+
CH7 Send+
CH6 Receive+
CH6 Send+
CH5 Receive+
CH5 Send+
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
GND
CH16_IN-
CH16_OUT-
CH15_IN-
CH15_OUT-
CH14_IN-
CH14_OUT-
CH13_IN-
CH13_OUT-
CH12_IN-
CH12_OUT-
CH11_IN-
CH11_OUT-
CH10_IN-
CH10_OUT-
CH9_IN-
CH9_OUT-
CH8_IN-
CH8_OUT-
CH7_IN-
CH7_OUT-
CH6_IN-
CH6_OUT-
CH5_IN-
CH5_OUT-
Ground
CH16 Receive-
CH16 Send-
CH15 Receive-
CH15 Send-
CH14 Receive-
CH14 Send-
CH13 Receive-
CH13 Send-
CH12 Receive-
CH12 Send-
CH11 Receive-
CH11 Send-
CH10 Receive-
CH10 Send-
CH9 Receive-
CH9 Send-
CH8 Receive-
CH8 Send-
CH7 Receive-
CH7 Send-
CH6 Receive-
CH6 Send-
CH5 Receive-
CH5 Send-
Specifications
1-24
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CH4_IN+
CH4_OUT+
CH3_IN+
CH3_OUT+
CH2_IN+
CH2_OUT+
CH1_IN+
CH1_OUT+
GND
CH4 Receive+
CH4 Send+
CH3 Receive+
CH3 Send+
CH2 Receive+
CH2 Send+
CH1 Receive+
CH1 Send+
Ground
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
CH4_IN-
CH4_OUT-
CH3_IN-
CH3_OUT-
CH2_IN-
CH2_OUT-
CH1_IN-
CH1_OUT-
GND
CH4 Receive-
CH4 Send-
CH3 Receive-
CH3 Send-
CH2 Receive-
CH2 Send-
CH1 Receive-
CH1 Send-
Ground

Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND
CH48_IN+
CH48_OUT+
CH47_IN+
CH47_OUT+
CH46_IN+
CH46_OUT+
CH45_IN+
CH45_OUT+
CH44_IN+
CH44_OUT+
CH43_IN+
CH43_OUT+
CH42_IN+
CH42_OUT+
CH41_IN+
CH41_OUT+
CH40_IN+
CH40_OUT+
CH39_IN+
Ground
CH48 Receive+
CH48 Send+
CH47 Receive+
CH47 Send+
CH46 Receive+
CH46 Send+
CH45 Receive+
CH45 Send+
CH44 Receive+
CH44 Send+
CH43 Receive+
CH43 Send+
CH42 Receive+
CH42 Send+
CH41 Receive+
CH41 Send+
CH40 Receive+
CH40 Send+
CH39 Receive+
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
GND
CH48_IN-
CH48_OUT-
CH47_IN-
CH47_OUT-
CH46_IN-
CH46_OUT-
CH45_IN-
CH45_OUT-
CH44_IN-
CH44_OUT-
CH43_IN-
CH43_OUT-
CH42_IN-
CH42_OUT-
CH41_IN-
CH41_OUT-
CH40_IN-
CH40_OUT-
CH39_IN-
Ground
CH48 Receive-
CH48 Send-
CH47 Receive-
CH47 Send-
CH46 Receive-
CH46 Send-
CH45 Receive-
CH45 Send-
CH44 Receive-
CH44 Send-
CH43 Receive-
CH43 Send-
CH42 Receive-
CH42 Send-
CH41 Receive-
CH41 Send-
CH40 Receive-
CH40 Send-
CH39 Receive-
Specifications
1-25
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CH39_OUT+
CH38_IN+
CH38_OUT+
CH37_IN+
CH37_OUT+
CH36_IN+
CH36_OUT+
CH35_IN+
CH35_OUT+
CH34_IN+
CH34_OUT+
CH33_IN+
CH33_OUT+
GND
CH39 Send+
CH38 Receive+
CH38 Send+
CH37 Receive+
CH37 Send+
CH36 Receive+
CH36 Send+
CH35 Receive+
CH35 Send+
CH34 Receive+
CH34 Send+
CH33 Receive+
CH33 Send+
Ground
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
CH39_OUT-
CH38_IN-
CH38_OUT-
CH37_IN-
CH37_OUT-
CH36_IN-
CH36_OUT-
CH35_IN-
CH35_OUT-
CH34_IN-
CH34_OUT-
CH33_IN-
CH33_OUT-
GND
CH39 Send-
CH38 Receive-
CH38 Send-
CH37 Receive-
CH37 Send-
CH36 Receive-
CH36 Send-
CH35 Receive-
CH35 Send-
CH34 Receive-
CH34 Send-
CH33 Receive-
CH33 Send-
Ground

T1/E1 Interface Electrical Conditions
Item T1 E1
Interface speed (kbps) 1544 2048
Transmission code B8ZS, AMI HDB3, AMI
Impedance () 100 120/75
Support frame ESF
SF
CRC4 multiframe
CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS
non-CRC-4(G.704 basic)
unframed

Specifications
1-26
STM-1/OC-3 interface
The SFP of the following interface types can be installed.
For the SFP module, use the recommended CX2000 series product. Contact NEC for the
recommended product.
Note When removing an SPF module, pull out the module straight with the ejector being
horizontal.

SFP module type Standard value
SONET OC3 IR-1 LR-1 LR-2
ITU-T G.957 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Transmission medium SMF
Interface speed (Mbits/sec) 155.520
Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Max. output power (dBm) -8 0 0
Min. output power (dBm) -15 -5 -5
Sending part
Extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 or more 10 or more 10 or more
Wavelength (nm) 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Min. received light power (dBm) -28 -34 -34
Receiving part
Max. received light power (dBm) -8 -10 -10

STM-1 ATM Eye Mask
1.2
0.8
1.0
0.5
0.2
0
-0.2
0 0.15 0.35 0.65 0.85 1.00
Normalized Time (% of Unit Interval)
N
o
r
m
a
l
i
z
e
d

A
m
p
l
i
t
u
d
e

Specifications
1-27
1.3.2.2 Console port connectors

Console port (RJ-45)

Console Port (RJ-45) Appearance and Pin Assignment

Console Port (RJ-45) Cross Connection
Port of this unit
(RJ-45)
Crossing cable
Terminal port
(D-Sub 9 pins, male)
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Internal
connection
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CTS
DTR
TxD
GND
GND
RxD
DSR
RTS

CD
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8 1
Specifications
1-28
NMS port (10/100BASE-TX)

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Appearance and Pin Assignment

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Straight Connection
Port of this unit Straight cable Terminal port
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Internal
connection
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-

D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8

NMS Port (10/100BASE-TX) Cross Connection
Port of this unit Crossing cable Terminal port
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
Internal
connection
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-

D0+
D0-
D1+
D1-
D2+
D2-
D3+
D3-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
Send/receive+
Send/receive-
1
2
3
6
4
5
7
8
Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.
8 1
Specifications
1-29
1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification

Clock interface (DSUB 9-pin)

Clock interface external appearance and pin assignment

Clock interface pin assignment
BITS
Pin No.
Signal name Contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TIP
N.C
FG
N.C
N.C
RING
N.C
FG
N.C
External Clock Output T Lead
N.C
Frame Ground
N.C
N.C
External Clock Output R Lead
N.C
Frame Ground
N.C

Note When using BITS, connect pin 1, pin 3, pin 6, and pin 8.

2048 kHz synchronization interface (G.703.13) electrical conditions
Item Standard value
Transmission medium Twisted paired
Interface speed (kHz) 2048
Impedance () 120
Amplitude 1.0~1.9Vo-p

(blank page)

Operations
2-1

2 Operations
2.1 Outline..........................................2-3
2.2 Commands...................................2-4
2.2.1 Entering a Command...................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Command Line Interface ................................ 2-5
2.3 Setting of Basic Functions.......2-11
2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions ............................ 2-11
2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions.................... 2-114
2.4 ATM Functions ........................2-128
2.4.1 ATM Path Setting........................................ 2-128
2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function................................. 2-153
2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting....................................... 2-158
2.4.4 IMA Function .............................................. 2-163
2.5 TDM Functions ........................2-171
2.5.1 TDM Setting................................................ 2-171
2.5.2 TDMoP Setting ........................................... 2-179
2.6 EtherOAM Functions ..............2-210
2.6.1 EtherOAM Function .................................... 2-210
2.6.2 EtherRing Function..................................... 2-248
Operations
2-2
2.7 Configuration Data..................2-266
2.7.1 About Configuration Data ........................... 2-266
2.7.2 Configuration Data Management................ 2-270

Outline
2-3
2.1 Outline
This chapter describes how to operate the CLI (Command Line Interface). This chapter also
describes the setting procedures related to the basic functions such as VLAN, QoS or link
aggregation, as well as the ATM functions such as PVC registration, ATM shaper, OAM and IMA,
the TDM functions such as TDM path and TDMoP (CES), and the EtherOAM functions.

Commands
2-4
2.2 Commands
2.2.1 Entering a Command
2.2.1.1 Rules for entering a command
This unit uses the command line interface (CLI) to accept commands.
The displayed command prompt is followed by a command or space-delimited commands. A
parameter following a command is delimited by a space.
Single-byte numbers, letters, and symbols can be entered. The letters are case sensitive.

[1] Command prompt
[2] Command
[3] Cursor

Error message during command entry
If command execution ends abnormally because an incorrect command or unauthorized command
is entered, an error message appears.

Memo For details of individual error messages, see "6 Command Error List" in Appendix.

Switch> date 10/21/04 10:51:30
00034 : Command not found.
Switch>

Switch> show system date

[1] [2] [3]
Commands
2-5
2.2.2 Command Line Interface
During command entry, you can move the cursor, edit characters on the command line, call the
command history, complete a command, enter an abbreviated command, and use the help and
scroll control functions.

Cursor movement
The cursor can be moved on the command line.

Ctrl + b or
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Ctrl + f or
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Ctrl + a Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl + e Moves the cursor to the end of the line.


Ctrl + b or (One character to the left)
Ctrl + a (To the beginning of the line)
Ctrl + f or (One character to the right)
Ctrl + e (To the end of the line)
Commands
2-6
Editing characters on the command line
The following key combinations can be used with cursor movement to delete or edit characters on
the command line.

Back Space Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
Ctrl + k
Deletes the characters between the cursor position and
the end of the command line.
Ctrl + u Deletes the entered characters on the command line.
Ctrl + w
Deletes the characters between the cursor position and
the beginning of the command line.
Ctrl + y Pastes the cut or copied character string.
Ctrl + z Cancels the standby state and starts a new line.

Switch> show system dat
Switch> show system d
Switch>
Switch> show system d
Switch>
Switch>

Back Space (Delete the character to the left)
Ctrl + k (Deletes the characters up to the end)
Ctrl + u (Deletes the characters on the command line)
Ctrl + y (Pastes the cut or copied character string)
Ctrl + w (Deletes the characters between the cursor
position and the beginning)
Ctrl + z (Starts a new line)
Commands
2-7
Calling command history
The commands entered so far can be called through key operation.
The commands can be called from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
The command history capacity is 20 latest commands. When all commands are called, the first
prompt appears.
A called command can be edited.

Ctrl + n or
Calls the entered commands from the oldest one.
Ctrl + p or
Calls the entered commands from the newest one.

After startup, when the three commands "show all", "show session", and "show system date" has
been entered in this order, the commands are called as shown below.

In combined use, the order is determined relative to the current command.

Switch>
Switch> show session
Switch> show all
Switch>

Ctrl + p or
Ctrl + p or
Ctrl + p or
Ctrl + p or
Switch>
Switch> show session
Switch>
Switch>

Ctrl + p or
Ctrl + p or
Ctrl + n or
Ctrl + n or
Ctrl + n or
Commands
2-8
Completion of a command
The Tab key completes a command that is incompletely entered.
When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Tab
key completes the rest of the command.

When there is more than one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the
Tab key does not complete the rest of the command.

Switch> show system da Tab

Switch> show s Tab
Switch> show s

Commands
2-9
Entering an abbreviated command
When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Enter
key can enter the command. When there is more than one command that begins with the entered
character string, the command cannot be entered.
The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "disable" command.

For a command containing multiple words, if each of the words can be abbreviated, the command
can be entered with each word abbreviated. A space is used to separate between the words.
The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "write memory" command.

Help function
The ? key can be used to list command descriptions.
The ? key displays the descriptions of the commands or parameters that can be used in that
state.

Switch# dis Enter
Switch>

Switch# wr m Enter
Writing Flash Memory...
Switch#

Switch# set terminal scroll system ?
off Disables scroll control.
on Enables scroll control.
(d) Scroll Line <1 - 99>
<cr>
Switch# set terminal scroll system

Commands
2-10
Scroll control
If scroll control is set, "--More--" appears in midstream of display to stop scrolling many lines of
information. Press the Space key to display the multiple lines that follow or press the Enter key to
display the next line. If Ctrl + c are pressed, the subsequent display is cancelled and the
prompt appears.

Commands
set terminal scroll system Setting of scroll control defaults
set terminal scroll local Setting of local terminal scroll control
show terminal config Display of scroll setting

Note on entering a command
Only the ASCII characters (excluding control characters) can be used to enter a command.
When two or more commands are copied and pasted simultaneously, the commands may not be
properly executed.

Setting of Basic Functions
2-11
Sets the attributes for each port.
2.3 Setting of Basic Functions
2.3.1 Setting of Basic Functions
2.3.1.1 Port
Set the communication mode for the FastEther (100BASE-TX) port (hereinafter called FE port),
GigabitEther (1000BASE-X/T) port (hereinafter called GbE port), T1/E1 port, and ATM155 port in
accordance with the use environment.

Note When you change port settings during communication, communication may
instantaneously stop or a frame error may occur.

Setting port attributes 2-12

2-12
Sets the media for the GbE port.
Sets the line speed.
Enables or disables the flow control.
Sets the link protection time.
Sets whether to send link traps to SNMP.
Blocks or unblocks the line.
Sets the clock mode for the ATM155 port.
Sets the frame mode for the ATM155 port.
Sets the port mode for the T1/E1 port.
Sets the port frame for the T1/E1 port.
Sets the cable length for each T1/E1 port.
Setting port attributes
The CX2200 accommodates different types of lines depending on cards. A line card supporting
FastEther has eight ports; the GigabitEther line card has two ports; the T1/E1 line card has 32
ports; and the ATM155 line card has one port. When you set the attributes for each port, specify
port numbers as parameters.

Setting the GbE port media 2-15

Setting the line speed 2-15

Setting the flow control 2-16

Setting the link protection time 2-16

Setting the link-trap transmission 2-17

Setting port blocking/unblocking 2-17

Setting the clock mode 2-18

Setting the frame mode 2-18

Setting the port mode 2-19

Setting the port frame 2-22

Setting the cable length 2-24

2-13
Shows the cable length of each T1/E1 port.
Sets the impedance for each T1/E1 port.
Shows the impedance of each T1/E1 port.
Shows the port settings and status information.

Displaying the cable length settings 2-26

Setting the impedance 2-27

Displaying the impedance setting 2-27

Displaying the line status 2-28

2-14
The following shows the procedure for setting the port attributes.

Set the clock mode
(set port clock)
Yes
Set link trap transmission
(set port link-trap)
Set the line speed
(set port speed)
GbE port
Set the port blocking/unblocking
(set port admin)
No
Yes
End
Set the frame mode
(set port frame)
Yes
ATM155 port
No
T1/E1 port
No
Set the port frame
(set port frame)
Set the impedance
(set port impedance)
Set the port mode
(set port mode)
Set the flow control
(set port flowcontrol)
Set the link protection time
(set port protection-time)
Set the GbE port media
(set port type)
Set the cable length
(set port cable-length)
2-15
Setting the GbE port media
Sets the GbE port media to optical or electric setting.

Commands
set port type Setting of GbE port media
show port information Display of port setting and status information

Note The GbE port cannot be set for combined electric and optical usage. Be sure to connect
the GbE port specified by the GbE port media setting to the other device.

Setting the line speed
Sets autonegotiation or fixed as the line speed setting.
Autonegotiation is a procedure by which this device automatically negotiates with the other device
to implement optimum communication. In case of fixed setting of the line speed, appropriate
settings need to be set for port speed with the other device and MDI, etc. For the details of the
interface with the other device, refer to "9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection
List" in Appendix.

Note If 100m-full is set for the FE port, the SPEED-LED is always on regardless of the line
status.
Note If only a fixed speed is set for the FE port, the port becomes MDI-X. If you want to use it
as MDI, be sure to set MDI when you set the speed.
Note For the GigabitEther optical port, MDI/MDI-X setting is ignored. For the electric port,
MDI/MDI-X setting is always auto because autonegotiation is always used.
Note If an aggregation group is specified, the line speed cannot be changed.
Note For GigabitEther, autonegotiation is recommended for speed setting regardless of
whether the port is optical or electric. If the speed is fixed, connection may become
unstable when the other unit supports a different link connection method.

Commands
set port speed Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
2-16
Setting the flow control
Adjusts the data transmission and reception in accordance with the traffic status so that received
data is not missed.
Flow control is enabled/disabled according to decision by the autonegotiation function or, flow
control can be enabled forcibly regardless of the settings specified in negotiation of the other
device.

Note Flow control cannot be set to autonegotiation setting unless the line speed setting is set to
autonegotiation setting. (Also when the port speed is fixed, autonegotiation can be set
but flow control does not work.)
Note On a line where flow control setting is enabled or set to autonegotiation, functions
(IEEE802.3ad aggregation, spanning tree, and EtherOAM) that involve transmission and
reception of control frames will not operate.
Note This unit supports the Pause frame reception operation only and does not support the
Pause frame transmission operation.

Commands
set port flowcontrol Setting of flow control

Setting the link protection time
Sets the protection time that lasts from when a port link down occurs to when it is recovered.

Commands
set port protection-time Setting of port link protection time

Note It is recommended to use the default setting, unless link down and recovery repeat many
times.

2-17
Setting the link-trap transmission
Sets whether to notify port link down/recovery by SNMP traps.

Commands
set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission

Note SNMP traps will not be sent unless the trap transmit selection function is also enabled.
For details, see "4.3.2 TRAP Transmission Selection Function".

Setting port blocking/unblocking
Stops a ports operation in case of port blocking and result in link down and communication
unavailable. Unblocking a port enables its operation.

Commands
set port admin Setting of port blocking/unblocking

2-18
Setting the clock mode
Sets either the independent mode (master) or external supply mode (slave).
In the external supply mode, the clock is synchronized with the clock supplied by the other device.
If no external clock can be extracted in the external supply mode, a clock can be generated in the
independent mode by the hardware autonomous operation.

Note This command can be set for the ATM155 port only.

Commands
set port clock Setting of the clock mode

Setting the frame mode
Sets either SDH/idle cell, SDH/unassigned cell, or SONET/unassigned cell as the physical layer
frame format and idle cell method.

Note This command can be set for the ATM155 port only.

Commands
set port frame Setting of the frame mode

2-19
Setting the port mode
Sets the operation mode for each T1/E1 port.
The following shows the operation mode(s) supported for T1/E1 ports.

Port type Operation mode
TDM mode
TDMoP mode T1/E1 port
ATMoP mode
* For the alarm transfer operation for each port mode, refer to "2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism" in
Appendix.

The following shows the setting range of each operation mode of the cards.

32T1E1H 32T1E1T 1ATM155A
TDM mode
TDMoP mode
ATMoP mode

The following shows how to set the port mode.
Commands
set port mode Setting of the port mode

Memo When you set each mode of TDM, TDMoP, and ATMoP, you cannot specify a single port
number to more than one port.
Memo For 32T1E1H line card, you cannot specify the TDMoP or ATMoP mode for the port33 to
port48.
Note You cannot change the port mode setting if any of the following commands is already
entered:
- set tdm group
- set tdmop group
- set ima group
- set pvc static
- set atm-shaper rate
2-20
Note You cannot set the ATMoP mode if the frame type for port frame setting is T1 and the
frame format is unframed.

2-21
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the port mode when the TDM mode is specified to port1
to port5 and the TDMoP mode is specified to port6 to port15 and the ATMoP mode is specified to
port16.

The following example shows how to set the port mode when the TDM mode is specified to port1
to port6 and the ATMoP mode is specified to port9 to port16.

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1-6 atmop 9-16
*Switch#

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1-5 tdmop 6-15 atmop 16
*Switch#

2-22
Setting the port frame
Sets frame types, line codes, frame formats for each T1/E1 port.
The following shows the line codes and frame formats supported for each frame type.

Frame type Line code Frame format
CRC-4 Multiframe
CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS
Non-CRC-4
E1
HDB3
AMI
Unframed
Extended Super Frame (ESF)
Super Frame (SF)
Super Frame-Japanese (SF-JPN)
T1
B8ZS
AMI
Unframed

The following shows how to set the port frame.

Commands
set port frame Setting of port frame

Note You cannot specify unframed for frame format if the TDMoP mode is CESoPSN.
Note You cannot change the port frame setting if any of the following commands is already
entered:
- set tdm group
- set tdmop group
- set port cable-length
- set port impedance
- set ima group
Note You cannot change the frame type from E1 to T1, and the frame format from unframed to
other than unframed if the following command is already entered:
- set atm-shaper rate
Note When the cable length setting is already done, it is necessary to reset to the default
setting with the cable length setting command (set port cable-length). (For details, refer
to "Setting the cable length".)
2-23
Note When the impedance setting is already done, it is necessary to reset to the default setting
with the impedance setting command (set port impedance). (For details, refer to "Setting
the impedance".)
Note If the ATMoP mode is set for port mode setting, you cannot specify T1 for frame type and
unframed for frame format.

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the port frame when E1 is specified to the first parameter
(frame type).

The following example shows how to set the port frame when T1 is specified to the first parameter
(frame type).

*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4
*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 crc4nocas
*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 non-crc4
*Switch# set port frame e1 hdb3 unframed
*Switch# set port frame e1 ami crc4
*Switch# set port frame e1 ami crc4nocas
*Switch# set port frame e1 ami non-crc4
*Switch# set port frame e1 ami unframed
*Switch# set port frame e1
*Switch#

*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs esf
*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf
*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs sf-jpn
*Switch# set port frame t1 b8zs unframed
*Switch# set port frame t1 ami esf
*Switch# set port frame t1 ami sf
*Switch# set port frame t1 ami sf-jpn
*Switch# set port frame t1 ami unframed
*Switch# set port frame t1
*Switch#

2-24
Setting the cable length
Sets the cable length between CX2200 and remote devices, transmission power, and reception
sensitivity for each port when T1 is selected as the frame type.
When the cable length type is short, the cable length can be specified as follows:

Cable Length Supported Cable Length (ft)
133 ft 0 to 133 (default)
266 ft 134 to 266
399 ft 267 to 399
533 ft 400 to 533
655 ft 534 to 655

Command
set port cable-length Setting of cable length

Memo When initial is specified in the second parameter (length type), the default values can be
set:
- Length type: short
- Cable length: 133 ft

2-25
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the cable length when short is specified in the second
parameter (length type).

The following example shows how to set the cable length when initial is specified in the second
parameter (length type).

*Switch# set port cable-length 1 initial
*Switch#

*Switch# set port cable-length 1 short
*Switch# set port cable-length 1-2,4-8 short 399ft
*Switch#

2-26
Displaying the cable length settings
Shows the cable length settings for each port when T1 is selected as the frame type. The setting
can be shown per port basis or per device basis.

Command
show port cable-length Display of port cable length settings

Input example
The following example shows how to display the cable length settings per port basis.

*Switch# show port cable-length 1
Cable Length Information Table
==============================
Cable
Port Kind Length
-------------------
1 short 266ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 1-8
==============================
Cable
Port Kind Length
-------------------
1 short 266ft
2 short 266ft
3 short 133ft
4 short 133ft
5 short 133ft
6 short 133ft
7 short 133ft
8 short 133ft

*Switch# show port cable-length 9-10
==============================
No entry in the table.

*Switch#
No cable length setting is shown if
no 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T card is
installed or the frame type is set to
E1.
2-27
Setting the impedance
Sets impedance 120 or 75 for each port when E1 is selected as the frame type.

Command
set port impedance Setting of impedance

The following example shows how to set the impedance.

Input example

Displaying the impedance setting
Shows the impedance setting of each port whose frame type is set to E1. The setting can be
shown per port or per device.

Command
show port impedance Display of impedance setting

*Switch# set port impedance 1 e1-120
*Switch# set port impedance 2-5,10-12 e1-75
*Switch#

2-28
Input example
The following example shows how to display the impedance setting per port.

Displaying the line status
Shows port setup information and the line status.

Command

*Switch# show port impedance 1
Port E1 Impedance Information Table
===================================
Port Impedance(ohm)
--------------------
1 e1-120

*Switch# show port impedance 1-8
===================================
Port Impedance(ohm)
--------------------
1 e1-120
2 e1-120
3 e1-120
4 e1-120
5 e1-75
6 e1-75
7 e1-75
8 e1-75

*Switch# show port impedance 9-10
===================================

*Switch#

No impedance setting is shown if
no 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T card
is installed or the frame type is
set toT1.
2-29
Input example (1/4)

(Continued to the next page)

*Switch# show port information
Line1 Port Information Table
==============================
Frame
Type Code Framing
--------------------
e1 hdb3 crc4

Port Link Alarm
Port Mode Admin Status Status
--------------------------------------
1 atmop enabled 2.048m-e1 normal
: tdmop enabled link-down los
48 tdm enabled link-down los

Link Trap
Port Status
---------------
1 disabled
: enabled
48 enabled

Cpusw Port Information Table
============================
Port Link
Port Admin Speed Status MDI
---------------------------------------------------
17 enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x
: enabled auto link-down auto mdi/mdi-x
24 enabled auto 100m-full auto mdi/mdi-x

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol
Port Configuration Status
------------------------------
17 disabled disabled
: disabled disabled

Port number
Port mode
Line speed
Line status
Blocked or unblocked status
SNMP link trap transmission
configuration.
Port number
Port number
Blocked or unblocked information
Line speed configuration
MDI status
Line status
Port number
Flow control configuration
Status of flow control
Frame type
Line code
Frame format
2-30
Input example (2/4)


Link Trap Protection Time Protection Time
Port Status Link Up(msec) Link Down(msec)
-------------------------------------------------
17 enabled 3000 500
: enabled 3000 500
24 enabled 3000 500

===========================
Port Link
------------------------------------------------------

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol Type Type
Port Configuration Status Configuration Status
---------------------------------------------------------
25 disabled disabled electric ---
26 disabled disabled electric ---

-------------------------------------------------
25 enabled 3000 500
26 enabled 3000 500

Tx Rx SFP
Port SFP Type Error Error Fault
------------------------------------------------------
25 1000BASE-SX normal fail normal
26 1000BASE-LX normal fail normal

Line type currently used
Line type configuration

SFP information acquisition fault status
Detection status of optical reception fault

Detection status of optical
transmission fault
Port number

SNMP link trap transmission configuration

Configuration of port link down
recovery detection time
detection time
Port number

Blocked/unblocked information

Line speed configuration
Line status
MDI status

Port number
Optical module type used
Port number

Flow control configuration

Flow control status

Port number
SNMP link trap transmission configuration
recovery detection time

detection time
2-31
Input example (3/4)


SFP Vendor Information
======================
Port 25
-----------------------------------------
Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric
Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F
Vendor Part Number : SCP6F86-GL-CWH
Vendor Revision : N
Vendor Serial Number : 6XK056N13263
Port 26
-----------------------------------------
Vendor Name : SumitomoElectric
Vendor OUI : 00-00-5F
Vendor Part Number : SCP6F44-GL-CWH
Vendor Revision : H
Vendor Serial Number : 71S480H01940

*Switch#

Vendor name of the optical module
Optical module reversion information
OUI of the optical module
Product number of the optical module
Optical module serial number
2-32
Input example (4/4)

*Switch# show port information 1
===============================
Port Link Cell
Port Admin Speed Status Clock Framing Padding
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1 enabled auto 155m slave sdh idle

Port SFP Type Tx Error Rx Error SFP Fault
---------------------------------------------
1 OC3-SI15 normal fail normal

Port Status
---------------
1 enabled

SFP Vendor Information
===============================
Port 1
-----------------------------------------
Vendor Name : NEC CORPORATION
Vendor OUI : 00-00-4C
Vendor Part Number : OD-J9449-5A01
Vendor Revision : 0001
Vendor Serial Number : 1234

F1 Status Table
===============
Port LOS LOF
--------------------
1 detect ---

F2 Status Table
===============
Port MS-AIS MS-SD MS-RDI MS-ERR MS-REI
--------------------------------------------
1 --- --- --- --- ---

F3 Status Table
===============
Port LOP P-AIS LCD
----------------------------
1 --- --- ---
Optical module manufacturer
Optical module OUI
Optical module product number
Optical module version number
Optical module serial number
Port number
LOS detection status
LOF detection status
MS-AIS detection status
MS-SD detection status
MS-RDI detection status
MS-ERR detection status
MS-REI detection status
Port number
Port number
LOP detection status
P-AIS detection status
LCD detection status
Port number
Port number
SNMP link trap transmission setting
Port number
Optical module type used
Optical transmission fault detection status
Optical reception fault detection status
SFP information acquisition fault status
Blocked/unblocked information
Line speed setting
Line status
Clock mode setting
Physical layer framing format
Idle cell padding method
Port number
2-33
Describes how to set a portbase VLAN.
Describes how to set a tagbase VLAN.
Describes how to set an extended VLAN.
Describes the VLAN ID tag swap function.
2.3.1.2 VLAN
The CX2200 supports the VLAN function that allows the user to flexibly add, clear, or change the
network configuration without being restricted by the physical network configuration.
The CX2200 has four types of VLAN functions including portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN, Extended
VLAN, and VLAN ID tag swap function, which can be used for different purposes.

Note Each device can have up to 256 VLANs registered.

Portbase VLAN 2-34

Tagbase VLAN 2-37

Extended VLAN 2-40

VLAN ID tag swap function 2-45

2-34
Portbase VLAN
The CX2200 implements a portbase VLAN by grouping ports and assigning a unique VLAN ID to
each group, which serve as the identifier. The portbase VLAN is the most popular VLAN method
where groups are formed based on the physical ports of the switch.
Broadcast frames from the port belonging to a VLAN will be sent only to the ports that belong to
the same VLAN.
From a portbase VLAN port, data is output without VLAN tags.
The following shows the procedure for setting a portbase VLAN.

To clear a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (without a VLAN).

Memo To set a portbase VLAN, use the portbase VLAN setting command or collective setting
command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.
Note This portbase setting cannot be set for ports other than the GbE or FE port.

Set the VLAN IDs.
(set vlan portbase, set vlan member)
Set the VLAN name.
(set vlan name)
2-35
Commands
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan member Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
set vlan name Setting of VLAN name
clear vlan name Clearing of VLAN name
show vlan summary Display of number of VLAN entries

Setting example

Higher unit Higher unit
Port 18
Port 17
Port 24
Port 23
Port 19 Port 21 Port 22 Port 20
VLAN10
VLAN20
CX2600/220 CX2600/220 CX2600/220 CX2600/220
2-36
The following describes how to set portbase VLANs in a configuration shown on the previous page.
(1) Set portbase VLANs.
(2) Set VLAN names.

*Switch# set vlan portbase 17 10
*Switch# set vlan name 10 VLAN10
*Switch#

(2)
(1)
2-37
Tagbase VLAN
The CX2200 supports the tagbase VLAN function based on the IEEE802.1Q specification. The
tagbase VLAN is a VLAN method where a VLAN group is explicitly specified by assigning a "tag
header" to a MAC frame as an identifier for identification of a VLAN group. This frame is called
VLAN tag frame. By using a tagbase VLAN, you can configure a VLAN across multiple devices.
A switch, receiving a VLAN tag frame, internally interprets the tag data and relays the frame to the
proper port belonging to the VLAN.

The following shows the procedure for setting a tagbase VLAN.

The following shows the procedure for clearing a tagbase VLAN.

Memo To set a tagbase VLAN, use the tagbase VLAN setting command or collective setting
command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.
Note When VLAN tag swap is set in a port, a VLAN ID already used as the swap destination
VLAN ID cannot be set as a tagbase VLAN ID.
Note A port to which tagbase VLAN is set checks whether a received frame has a VLAN tag.
If it receives a frame having no tag, it will discard the frame.

Set a VLAN ID.
(set vlan tagbase, set vlan member)
Set a VLAN name.
(set vlan name)
Clear the VLAN ID.
(clear vlan tagbase)
Clear the VLAN name.
(clear vlan name)
2-38
Commands
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN

Setting example

Port 24
Port 22
Lower unit
Lower unit
10
10 20
20 20
Port 17
Port 20
Port 18
Port 23
20
Port 21
10
10
VLAN10
VLAN20
Port 19
CX2600/220 CX2600/220 CX2600/220 CX2600/220
2-39
The following describes how to set tagbase VLANs in a configuration shown above.
(1) Set tagbase VLANs.
(2) Set VLAN names.

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 17 10
*Switch#

(1)
(2)
2-40
Extended VLAN
The CX2200 allows the user to add multiple VLAN tags unique to the network using portbase
VLANs by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag stacking) function based on the VLAN function defined
by IEEE802.1Q. This makes it possible for the user to separate the traffic within the network by
the VLAN ID assigned to individual VLANs.
The following describes the network configuration and operation of an extended VLAN.

VLAN
Layer2 switch Layer2 switch
Ethernet type 0x9100 , VLAN ID 100
(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag

(2) Extended VLAN tag

[Ethernet type=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2) (1)
(1) (1)
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
Extended VLAN
tag is forwarded.
Extended VLAN
tag is cleared.
Frame forwarding status

Frame forwarding direction
CX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3
VLAN ID is decided by
the receive port.
VLAN ID is decided by the
extended VLAN tag of the
received frame
VLAN ID is decided by the
extended VLAN tag of the
received frame
Port
Tag
Tag Tag Tag
Port
CX2200#1 CX2200#2
CX2200#3
2-41
In an extended VLAN of the CX2200, an extended VLAN tag is added at each port. Transmission
cannot be performed with a VLAN ID of an extended VLAN added to an extended VLAN tag for
each VLAN tag frame on one port.
The example below shows each case when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=10 is received on port
17 and when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=20 is received on port 17. The VLAN ID of the
extended VLAN set on the port 17 is added to the extended VLAN tag of these frames.

Memo A VLAN tag is added when a frame is input from a portbase VLAN and output from a
tagbase VLAN port. When the Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition of the output port
is defaulted to 0x8100 (IEEE802.1Q tag), the IEEE802.1Q tag is added and sent out.
Note When a frame is input from a tagbase VLAN and output from a tagbase VLAN port, if the
Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition of the output port is not defaulted to 0x8100
(IEEE802.1Q tag), the Ethernet type of the outer tag is converted.

VLAN tag frame
Port17 Port18
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=20
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
Extended VLAN tag
VLAN ID=100
Extended VLAN tag
VLAN ID=100
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=20
CX2200
VLAN tag frame
Extended VLAN tag frame
Extended VLAN tag frame
2-42
Setting an extended VLAN
Uses the following commands that are previously explained in explanations of VLAN setting
procedures. The parameters and values to set are the same with the other types of VLANs.
The following shows the procedure for setting an extended VLAN. (For adding or clearing an
extended VLAN)

The following shows the procedure for clearing an extended VLAN.

Sets a port to a portbase VLAN port that add or
clear an extended VLAN.
Sets the Ethernet type for the extended VLAN.
Set a VLAN ID.
(set vlan portbase , set vlan member)
Set a VLAN ID.
(set vlan tagbase , set vlan member)
Set the Ethernet type for VLAN tag
recognition. (set vlan ethertype)
Set a VLAN name.
(set vlan name)
Sets the I/O port belonging to the extended VLAN
network to a tagbase VLAN.
Sets a VLAN name if necessary.
(This can be omitted.)
Clears the tagbase VLAN of the I/O port belonging
to the extended VLAN network.
Clears the VLAN name.
Restores the Ethernet type for VLAN tag
recognition to 0x8100.
Set the Ethernet type for VLAN tag
recognition. (set vlan ethertype)
Clear the VLAN ID.
(clear vlan tagbase)
Clear the VLAN name.
(clear vlan name)
2-43
Commands
set vlan portbase Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan tagbase Setting of tagbase VLAN
show vlan table port Display of VLAN table per port
clear vlan tagbase Clearing of tagbase VLAN
show vlan table vid Display of VLAN table per VLAN
set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition

2-44
Extended VLAN setting example
This part describes the basic setting procedure for implementing an extended VLAN taking the
following network configuration for an example.

Configuration example
The following describes the basic setting procedure to implement an extended VLAN as shown
below.

(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag

(2) Extended VLAN tag

[Ethernet type=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(2) (1)
(1) (1)
CX2200#1
CX2200#2 CX2200#3
Layer2 switch
Layer2 switch
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
Extended VLAN
tag is forwarded.
Extended VLAN
tag is cleared.
CX2200#1 CX2200#2 CX2200#3
VLAN
Extended VLAN
VLAN
Ethernet type 0x9100
VLAN ID 100
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
Extended VLAN
tag is cleared.
Extended VLAN
tag is cleared.
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
Port
17
Port
20
Port
24
Port
20
Port
20
Port
17
Transmission and reception of frames
2-45
Input examples
CX2200#1 and CX2200#3 in the above example are configured with Ethernet type of 0x9100.

CX2200#2 in the above example is configured with Ethernet type of 0x9100.

VLAN ID tag swap function
The CX2200 can also swap extended VLAN tags as well as adding and deleting extended VLAN
tags. Using this function, the user can establish a connection between the local network and
another network or between a new network and an existing network without changing the existing
extended VLAN IDs, which is very effective in maintenance and operation.

*Switch# set vlan ethertype 20,24 0x9100
*Switch#
*Switch# set vlan ethertype 20 0x9100
*Switch#

Port17
Port18
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=20
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
Extended-VLAN tag
VLAN ID=200
Extended-VLAN tag
VLAN ID=400
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=20
CX2200
Extended-VLAN tag frame (SWAP)
Extended-VLAN tag frame (SWAP)
Extended-VLAN tag frame
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
Extended-VLAN tag
VLAN ID=100
Extended-VLAN tag
VLAN ID=300
Port25
Port26
Extended-VLAN tag frame
2-46
Setting VLAN ID swapping
The CX2200 provides the VLAN ID tag swap function by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag stacking)
function based on the VLAN function defined in IEEE802.1Q.
When you set VLAN ID tag swapping, set a tagbase VLAN port that is to be the origin of swap
processing. The set port will be able to receive frames from outside, which have the same
Ethernet type as the set one. With this port used as the origin, VLAN IDs and Ethernet type are
swapped at input and output of frames.
To set VLAN tag swapping on the CX2200, follow the procedure given below.
(1) Set Ethernet type for the tagbase VLAN port. (set vlan ethertype)
(2) Set VLAN tag swapping for the tagbase VLAN port. (set vlan swap)
(3) Display the VLAN tag swap settings. (show vlan swap)
(4) Clear the VLAN tag swap settings. (clear vlan swap)

Setting Ethernet type
Use the "set vlan ethertype" command to set Ethernet type. The parameters of the "set vlan
ethertype" command include the port number (17-26) and Ethernet type value (0x600-0xffff).
Enter them with a space placed between them.

Memo If a portbase VLAN is set to a port, the port keeps the Ethernet type setting but the setting
does not function.

Displaying Ethernet type
Use the "show vlan ethertype" command to display the Ethernet type setting. The parameter of
the "show vlan ethertype" command is the port number (17-26).

2-47
Setting and clearing VLAN tag swapping
On the tagbase VLAN port where Ethernet type is set, VLAN tag swapping is enabled. Set the
swap destination VLAN ID.
Use the "set vlan swap" command to set VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of the "set vlan
swap" command include the port number (17-26), swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name,
and swap destination VLAN ID (0-4094). Enter these parameters in this order placing a space
between each of them.
Use the "clear vlan swap" command to clear VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of the "clear
vlan swap" command include the port number (17-26) and swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN
name. Enter them with a space placed between them.

Memo If a portbase VLAN is set to a port, the port cannot be set for tag swapping.
Memo You cannot set tag swapping specifying the VLAN ID that is the same as the swap
destination VLAN ID, because it will not swap tag frames.
Memo A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap origin VLAN ID can be overwritten and
changed. For example, when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, you can write 30 over VLAN
ID 10 and set it to 30.
Memo If you set a tagbase VLAN on a VLAN where VLAN tag swapping is set, the tag swapping
setting will be cleared and a tagbase VLAN is set.
Note VLAN tag swapping cannot be set or cleared for ports other than the GbE port and FE
port.
Note A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap destination VLAN ID in a port cannot be
assigned redundantly to another VLAN as the swap destination VLAN ID. For example,
when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, VLAN ID 30 cannot be swapped again to 20. This is
because a redundantly set swap destination VLAN ID will confuse the system about the
destination VLAN ID to which it should swap a frame input from the specified port.

2-48
Displaying the VLAN tag swapping information
Use the "show vlan swap" command to display the VLAN tag swapping information. The
parameters of the "show vlan swap" command include the port number (17-26) and swap origin
VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name. Enter these parameters in this order separating them by a
space.

Commands
set vlan ethertype Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
show vlan ethertype Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
set vlan swap Setting of VLAN tag swapping
clear vlan swap Clearing of VLAN tag swapping
show vlan swap Display of VLAN tag swapping information

Input example
Ethernet type of port 17 is set to 0x9100, and VLAN ID 10 to 20.

*Switch# set vlan ethertype 17 0x9100
*Switch# show vlan ethertype 17
VLAN Ether-Type Table
=====================
Port Ether-Type
----------------
17 0x9100

*Switch# set vlan swap 17 10 20
*Switch# show vlan swap 17

VLAN Swap Table
===============
Port : 17 Ether-Type : 0x9100
VID Name (Interior) VID (Exterior)
---------------------------------------------------
10 VLAN10 20

*Switch#

2-49
Explains maximum input bandwidth limitation.
Explains priority control.
Explains L2 switch buffer setting.
Explains output bandwidth setting.
2.3.1.3 QoS control
QoS control is a function for effective use of the limited bandwidth of a line. The CX2200 has
QoS control to perform maximum input bandwidth limitation, priority control, L2 switch buffer
setting, output bandwidth setting, and other functions.

Maximum input bandwidth limitation 2-50

Priority control 2-54

L2SW buffer setting 2-60

Output bandwidth setting 2-67

This figure shows how the QoS control functions are deployed.

Line card
CPUSW card
L2SW buffer maximum accumulation
frame count control
Line card
L2SW priority
transmission control
Class mapping
Maximum input bandwidth
limitation
Assignment/change of
input priority
Output
bandwidth
Output
WRED
2-50
Maximum input bandwidth limitation
This function limits the maximum bandwidth per input port and VLAN or per VLAN class.

Maximum bandwidth limitation per input port and VLAN or
per VLAN class
The maximum bandwidth limitation function can be set for each input port and VLAN (collective
addition mode) or for each VLAN class (individual addition mode or individual addition mode (with
RED used)). Eight priorities of input frames can be mapped to four classes in each VLAN. In the
collective addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the
maximum bandwidth for each VLAN and burst tolerance for each class. In the individual addition
mode, the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the maximum
bandwidth and burst tolerance for each VLAN class. In the individual addition mode (with RED
used), the maximum bandwidth limitation function is implemented by setting the maximum
bandwidth, upper burst tolerance, lower burst tolerance, and maximum discard rate for each VLAN
class. VLANs whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified can be regarded as one VLAN, for
which the maximum bandwidth limitation function can be set. A VLAN whose bandwidth is not
explicitly specified is called a remaining-VLAN, which exists for each input port. If you do not set
any other settings than this remaining-VLAN, the maximum bandwidth limitation function works per
input port instead of per VLAN.
Bandwidth control is performed based on the physical rate. (See the figure below. The numbers
in parentheses are byte counts.)

* Physical rate: A frame size is the sum of the valid frame (preamble to FCS) + 12 (minimum
IFG).

Burst tolerance is the tolerance value of the input burst traffic that exceeds the specified value of
maximum bandwidth limitation. This can be set for each input port and VLAN class, and for each
remaining-VLAN class. The value of burst tolerance can be calculated by multiplying the burst
traffic volume (kbps) exceeding the specified value of maximum bandwidth limitation by the
tolerance time (sec).
FCS
(4)
Preamble
(8)
DA
(6)
SA
(6)
TYPE
(2)
Data
(46 - 1500)
FCS
(4)
VLAN tag
(0, 4, 8)
Frame size for bandwidth control on the physical rate basis
Flow of frames
Preamble
(8)
IFG
(12)
IFG
(12)
2-51
The order of priorities corresponds to the descending order of the burst tolerance values.
Different burst tolerances are set for different classes. Therefore, when input traffic exceeds the
burst tolerance, frames having a class of lower priority are supposed to be discarded before frames
having a class of higher priority.
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), UPC-RED (Usage Parameter Control-Random
Early Detection) is used for maximum bandwidth limitation where discard judgment is performed
based on the discard rate line instead of Tail-Drop in response to the flow rate measurement.
This makes it possible to gradually increase the number of frames to be discard before the length
of the queue reaches the limit.

Memo The number of VLANs whose bandwidth can be explicitly specified by using this function
is 256 per GbE port, and 1 per FE port. One of them can be used for remaining-VLAN.
Memo In a specified input port, if the maximum bandwidth limitation is set with VLAN
specification at the initial setting, remaining-VLAN is also set.
Memo In the individual addition mode (with RED used), the setting of upper burst tolerance
cannot be a value equal to or smaller than the lower burst tolerance. Likewise, the lower
burst tolerance cannot be equal to or greater than the upper burst tolerance.
Memo In the individual addition mode (with RED used), for a class for which the lower burst
tolerance is made invalid, discard judgment is performed by Tail-Drop instead of the
discard rate line.
Note The FE port cannot accept settings for maximum bandwidth limitation specifying VLAN,
and settings for individual addition mode and individual addition mode (with RED used).
Note The remaining-VLAN cannot be cleared if maximum bandwidth limitation for a VLAN is set
on the specified input port.
Note Ports other than GbE and FE ports do not accept this setting.

Commands
set qos in-rate maximum Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

2-52

Input example
Maximum bandwidth limitation and burst tolerances are set in the individual addition mode (with
RED used).
The input example on the next page shows how the following is set in the above configuration.
Class-A: Maximum bandwidth = 50 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 1000 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Maximum discard rate 32 (100%)
Class-B: Maximum bandwidth = 30 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance = 250 Kbytes, Maximum discard rate 16 (50%)
Class-C: Maximum bandwidth = 15 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 100 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)
Class-D: Maximum bandwidth = 5 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 50 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)

- The bandwidth and burst tolerance can be set for each class of a VLAN.
- There are four classes from A to D.
- Each priority can be assigned to a desired class.
SV SV SV SV
PC
Web
http://
Web
Movie
stream
GW
Movie
Voice
Voice
Picture
Pri=1
Picture
VID 10
Pri=7
Pri=5
Pri=3
Input bandwidth limitation
ClassA
ClassB
ClassC
W=15Mbps/Th=100KB
W=30Mbps/Th=500KB
W=50Mbps/Th=1000KB
CX2200
Switch
Fabric
VID 10 VID 10
UpStream
Network
ISP
Home
GateWay
(Router
W=5Mbps/Th=50KB
ClassD
PC
PC
2-53

*Switch# set qos in-rate maximum 25 vid 10 separate-red class-a 50000 class-b 30
000 class-c 15000 class-d 5000
*Switch# set qos in-priority maximum 25 vid 10 separate-red class-a 1000 500 32
class-b 500 250 16 class-c 100 disable class-d 50 disable
*Switch# show qos in-rate maximum 25
QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
Port Registered-VID Available-VID
-----------------------------------
25 2 254

QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 25
VID : 10
Mode : separate-RED
===================
Rate Maximum- Minimum-
Priority (Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All : --- --- --- --- ---
Class-A : 6,7 50000 1000 500 32(100%)
Class-B : 4,5 30000 500 250 16(50%)
Class-C : 0,3 15000 100 disabled disabled
Class-D : 1,2 5000 50 disabled disabled

Port : 25
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- ---
Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---
Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---
Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---
Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

*Switch#

2-54
Explains mapping of priorities to classes.
Explains assignment and change of priorities.
Priority control
This part explains mapping of priorities to classes, and assignment and change of priorities.

1 Class mapping function 2-55

2 Priority assignment/change function 2-58

2-55
1 Class mapping function
Decide the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping used for various QoS control.
Bandwidth control and priority transmission control described later are performed at the applicable
points in accordance with the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping specified here.

Maximum input bandwidth control class mapping
Class mapping for maximum input bandwidth control enables class mapping setting for each input
port and VLAN. Class mapping for each input port and VLAN allows the user to specify classes,
as well as priorities in the VLAN tag, for broadcast frames and multicast frames. This is useful
when you want to manage bandwidths separately for unicast frames, broadcast frames, and
multicast frames without relation to the priority values. Broadcast frames and multicast frames
have their own priority values, but when a class for broadcast or multicast is set, they will be under
bandwidth control of the class for broadcast or multicast.
The following shows the default assignment of priorities and class mapping.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Class mapping C D D C B B A A

Note Multiple classes cannot be mapped as classes for broadcast or multicast. (If the classes
do not overlap, mapping is possible in each class.)
Note In an FE port and in a VLAN where maximum bandwidth control is performed in the
collective addition mode, mapping of broadcast or multicast is not supported.
Note Priorities cannot be redundantly specified.
Note Each priority must be mapped to any one of the classes.

Commands
set qos in-class-map maximum Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN

2-56
Input example
Priority mapping is changed as shown in the following table.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Class mapping C C C B B B A A
Priority Broadcast Multicast
Class mapping D D

*Switch# set qos in-class-map maximum 25 vid 1 separate class-a 6,7 class-b 3-5
class-c 0-2 class-d bc+mc
*Switch# show qos in-rate maximum 25
QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
Port Registered-VID Available-VID
-----------------------------------
25 2 254

QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 25
VID : 1
Mode : separate
===================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All : --- --- --- --- ---
Class-A : 6,7 50000 127 --- ---
Class-B : 3,4,5 30000 64 --- ---
Class-C : 0,1,2 15000 32 --- ---
Class-D : bc+mc 5000 16 --- ---

Port : 25
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class-All : --- 1000000 --- --- ---
Class-A : 6,7 --- 127 --- ---
Class-B : 4,5 --- 64 --- ---
Class-C : 0,3 --- 32 --- ---
Class-D : 1,2 --- 16 --- ---

*Switch#

2-57
Class mapping setting function of switch fabric
The class mapping setting function of switch fabric can set class mapping on the switch fabric
output side. Send frames are sorted into four send queues according to the priorities assigned to
the VLAN tags based on the set mapping information, and sent from the output port in the
descending order of the send queue classes (class-a is the first, followed by class-b, class-c and
class-d). The continuity is temporarily stopped from the command input until the completion of the
setting.
The following shows the default assignment of priorities and class mapping.

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Class mapping C D D C B B A A

Memo Ping and other frames intended for devices, BDPU, and LACP PDU are excluded from
QoS control.
Note Since the continuity is stopped from the command input until the setting completion, the
adaptive clock causes a loss of synchronization.

Commands
set qos switch-class-map Setting of class mapping for switch fabric
show qos switch-class-map Display of class mapping setting of switch fabric

Input example

*Switch# set qos switch-class-map class-a 1 class-b 0 class-c 2-7 class-d none
*Switch# show qos switch-class-map
QoS Switch Class Map Table
==========================
Class Priority
------------------------
class-a 1
class-b 0
class-c 2,3,4,5,6,7
class-d none

*Switch#

2-58
2 Priority assignment/change function
This part explains the input CoS priority mapping function.

Input CoS priority mapping function
This function, on an input port, assigns or changes a priority value in a VLAN tag based on the
DSCP value in the IP header in an IPv4 packet. On a port where a portbase VLAN is set, a
priority value of a VLAN tag to be assigned to a received frame can be specified. On a port where
a tagbase VLAN is set, the priority value of a VLAN tag can be changed for each input port. For
each input port, it is possible to specify whether to enable or disable CoS priority mapping and set
the priority value (0 to 7) to be mapped based on the DSCP value.
The priority assignment/change function is disabled by default. The following shows the default
mapping assignment of DSCP values and priorities used when the priority assignment/change
function is enabled.

DSCP value 0 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 24 to 31 32 to 39 40 to 47 48 to 55 56 to 63
Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Memo The point in a frame to be referred for Ethernet type in order to recognize an IPv4 packet
varies depending on the tag assignment status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the
outer tag is different from the TPID set on the port, the field is referred. When the TPID
of the inner tag is not 0x8100, the field is referred. When the TPID of the inner tag is
0x8100, the next field is referred.
Note Priority assignment/change is not performed for frames other than IPv4 packets.
Note Ports other than GbE and FE ports do not accept this setting.

Commands
set qos in-port cos-map mode Setting of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
set qos in-port cos-map Setting of input CoS priority mapping
show qos in-port cos-map mode Display of input CoS priority mapping enable/disable
show qos in-port cos-map Display of input CoS priority mapping

2-59
Input example
The input example below changes the mapping of DSCP values and priorities as shown in the
table, and enables the priority assignment/change function.

DSCP value 0 to 4 5 to 7 8 to 15 16 to 23 24 to 31 32 to 39 40 to 51 52 to 63
Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map 17 0-4 0
*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map 17
QoS Input CoS Priority Mapping Table
====================================
Port : 17
=========
CoS DSCP
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 0-4
1 5-7
2 8-15
3 16-23
4 24-31
5 32-39
6 40-51
7 52-63

*Switch# set qos in-port cos-map mode 17 enable
*Switch# show qos in-port cos-map mode 17
QoS CoS Mapping Mode Table
==========================
Port Mode
--------------
17 enabled

*Switch#

2-60
Describes the setting of the maximum number of
frames that are accumulated by L2SW output
buffer class.
Describes the setting of the output WRED
function.
L2SW buffer setting
This section describes the setting of the maximum number of frames that are accumulated by
L2SW output buffer class in the L2SW output port and the setting of the output WRED function.

Setting the maximum number of L2SW output buffer accumulation frames for each class 2-60

Setting the output WRED function 2-65

Setting the maximum number of L2SW output buffer
accumulation frames for each class
Set the maximum number of accumulation frames for each class, in output buffers prepared for
each port in a L2SW. An output port is specified per line group/port. The default value is 256
frames for class-a, 256 frames for class-b, 256 frames for class-c, and 240 frames for class-d.
Line group types differ depending on mounting line cards. The following tables shows mapping
between mounting line cards and line type groups.

Line group
Mounting line card
1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2
32T1E1H
(32E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
ATMoP
(1-16)
TDMoP
(1-16)

32T1E1T
(32E1/T1 TDM)
-
TDMoP
(1-16, 33-48)
- - LINE1
1ATM155A
(1STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
ATMoP (1) - - -
LINE2
2GBE
(2GbE)
- - GbE (25) GbE (26)

2-61
Commands
set [reserve] qos initial-buffer Setting of L2 switch buffer
show qos initial-buffer Display of L2 switch buffer

Memo Regarding the setting for 1ATM155A line card 1/1, the adaptive clock control which has
been set for the 1ATM155A line card is not performed.
Note To enable the setting of the maximum number of accumulation frames, restart the device
after write memory. Because only setting the maximum number does not enable the
setting, set reserve qos initial-buffer is output in output with show running-config.
Note As this setting, the total of the maximum number of accumulation frames for each class
cannot exceed the maximum number of accumulation frames of output buffers and cannot
be below the maximum number of accumulation frames of output buffers.
Note The maximum number of frames actually accumulated per class may be smaller than the
maximum number of frames set for each class by 4 to 14 frames.

2-62
Input example (1/3)
The maximum number of accumulation frames for each class is configured.


*Switch# set qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d
272
*Switch# show running-config
!System : NEC CX2200
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Current Software Ver.02.04.01
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 04:01:33

!
!
set reserve qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d 2
72
!
set ip address out-band 192.168.2.237 255.255.255.0
set ip route default 192.168.2.1
!
*Switch# show qos initial-buffer
QoS Initial Buffer Table
========================
Port Type Condition Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
----------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
1/2 tdmop Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve 288 272 176 272
2/1 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
2/2 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
17 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
18 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
2-63
Input example (2/3)

19 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
20 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
21 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
22 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
23 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
24 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---

*Switch#
*Switch# write memory
Writing Flash Memory....
Switch#
Switch# reset system
Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y
System is under closing......
Switch Reset Process is running. Please wait....

Welcome to CX2200 System

Switch>
Switch> enable
Input enable password:
Switch#
Switch# show running-config
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 04:04:40

!
!
2-64
Input example (3/3)

set qos initial-buffer 1/2 class-a 288 class-b 272 class-c 176 class-d 272
!
set ip address out-band 192.168.2.237 255.255.255.0
set ip route default 192.168.2.1
!
Switch# show qos initial-buffer
QoS Initial Buffer Table
========================
Port Type Condition Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
----------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
1/2 tdmop Present 288 272 176 272
Reserve --- --- --- ---
2/1 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
2/2 gbe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
17 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
18 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
19 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
20 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
21 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
22 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
23 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---
24 fe Present 256 256 256 240
Reserve --- --- --- ---

Switch#

2-65
Setting the output WRED function
The output WRED (Weighted Random Early Detection) function enables discarding of frames
before the total number of frames that are accumulated in the L2 switch buffer reaches the
maximum number.
By setting the a discarding starting position for each port class, the discarding rate is checked
through the discarding rate line using the minimum discarding threshold value and the maximum
discarding threshold value, and the frames are discarded.
For the discarding starting position, by specifying the ratio (%) to the maximum discarding
threshold value, the minimum discarding threshold value is calculated.
The maximum discarding threshold value is the maximum number of frames that are accumulated
by class that is set in the L2 switch buffer setting.
The minimum discarding threshold value is re-calculated based on the ratio to the maximum
discarding threshold value when the unit is restarted.
The default value specified for the discarding starting position is 100% for all the classes.
When the value exceeds the minimum discarding threshold value, frames are discarded from the
transmission frames according to the discarding rate.
The transmission frames, which are exceeding the maximum discarding threshold value are
discarded by Tail Drop.
The line group type varies according to the mounted line card. The following table shows the
correspondence between mounted line cards and line groups.

Line group
Mounted line card
1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2
32T1E1H
(32E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
ATMoP
(1-16)
TDMoP
(1-16)
- -
32T1E1T
(32E1/T1 TDM)
-
TDMoP
(1-16,33-48)
- - LINE1
1ATM155A
(1STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
ATMoP(1) - - -
LINE2
2GBE
(2GbE)
- - GbE(25) GbE(26)

2-66
Commands
set qos out-wred Setting of the output WRED function
show qos out-wred Display of the WRED function

Note The system operates as follows during execution of the setting command of the output
WRED function.
When a line group is specified, transmission stops temporarily in the specified line
group units.
When a port number is specified, transmission stops temporarily in all the FE ports (17
to 24).

Input example
This example shows the setting of the output WRED function.

*Switch# set qos out-wred 1/1 class-a 90 class-b 80 class-c 70 class-d 60
*Switch# show qos out-wred 1/1
QoS Out WRED Table
==================
Drop-Start
Port Type Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
---------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop 90 80 70 60
(230/256) (204/256) (179/256) (144/240)

*Switch# set qos out-wred 17 default
*Switch# show qos out-wred 17
QoS Out WRED Table
==================
Drop-Start
Port Type Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
---------------------------------------------------------------
17 fe 100 100 100 100
(256/256) (256/256) (256/256) (240/240)

*Switch#

2-67
Output bandwidth setting
This part explains the setting of the output bandwidth in a L2SW output port (the output scheduling
operation mode function, Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function, and output port
shaper function).
At the output bandwidth setting (Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function and output
port shaper function), the bandwidth control is performed for the frame size from DA to FCS. (See
the figure below. The numbers in parentheses are byte counts.)

When 40 Mbps is specified for the output bandwidth and the frame size for output bandwidth is 64
bytes, the physical rate for conversion of frame size with the frame size for output bandwidth (DA
to FCS) + preambles + minimum IFG will be as shown in the following example.
40 Mbps x ((Preamble8 + 64 + Minimum IFG12) / 64) = Physical rate 52.5 Mbps
If the physical rate exceeds the physical bandwidth for the output port because of the output
bandwidth setting and output frame size, the output bandwidth may be less than the setting value.

Output scheduling operation mode function
The output scheduling operation mode function switches between the SP (Strict Priority) mode and
the Deficit WRR (Weight Round Robin) mode per device.
There are two types for the output scheduling operation mode: SP mode and Deficit WRR mode.
The default value of the output scheduling operation mode function is the SP mode.
(1) In the SP mode, class-a to class-d operate in the SP mode.
The frame output is controlled based on the priority of each class (class-a to class-d) in the
L2SW output queue. The priority is in the order of class-a > class-b > class-c > class-d.
(2) In the Deficit WRR mode, class-a operates in the SP mode and class-b to class-d operate in
the Deficit WRR mode.
The class-a frames in the SP mode will be output with the top priority, and the surplus
bandwidth is distributed based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set
to each class (class-b to class d).
FCS
(4)
Preamble
(8)
DA
(6)
SA
(6)
TYPE
(2)
Data
(46 to 1500)
FCS
(4)
VLAN tag
(0,4,8)
Target frame size of the bandwidth control
Flow of frames
Preamble
(8)
IFG
(12)
IFG
(12)
2-68
Note The output scheduling operation mode can be modified only when all the following
conditions are satisfied.
The surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
distribution function is the default value.
The maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper function is the default
value.
Note During the output scheduling operation mode switching, the continuity is temporarily
stopped at all ports.

Commands
set qos out-bandwidth Setting of output bandwidth
show qos out-bandwidth Display of output bandwidth

Input example (1/3)
The following setting example shows the case that the SP mode is set for the output scheduling
mode function and the case that the Deficit WRR mode is set.

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp
*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth
QoS Out Bandwidth Table
=======================
Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)
Port Type Mode Condition Class-All Class-A Class-B Class-C Class-D
--------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1/2 tdmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
2/1 gbe normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
17 fe normal maximum 100000 --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
2-69
Input example (2/3)

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#
*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr
*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth
=======================
Scheduler Mode : SP+WRR

Rate(Kbps)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1 atmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
separate wrr-rate --- 1000000 64 64 64
1/2 tdmop normal maximum 1000000 --- --- --- ---
2-70
Input example (3/3)


*Switch#

2-71
Output port shaper function
The output port shaper function sets the maximum bandwidth limit value on the L2SW output side
per line group/line number (collective addition mode) or per line group/line number class (individual
addition mode). Traffic volume output from L2SW is controlled by this function.

Memo Line group types differ depending on the mounting line card. The correspondence
between mounting line card and line group type is shown below.

Line group
Mounting line card
1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2
32T1E1H
(32E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
ATMoP
(1-16)
TDMoP
(1-16)
- -
32T1E1T
(32E1/T1 TDM)
-
TDMoP
(1-16, 33-48)
- - LINE1
1ATM155A
(1STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
ATMoP (1) - - -
LINE2
2GBE
(2GbE)
- - GbE (25) GbE (26)

Memo The default value per line group or line number is as follows.
(1) In the case of a line group
Group 1/1: 1000000 Kbps
Group 1/2: 1000000 Kbps
Group 2/1: 1000000 Kbps
Group 2/2: 1000000 Kbps
(2) In the case of a line number
Port 17-24: 1000000 Kbps
Note Set a multiple of 64 Kbps for the maximum bandwidth limit value. However, for line
numbers 17 to 24, 100 Mbps is not rounded down to a multiple of 64 Kbps.
Note Regarding the maximum bandwidth limit value per class, the total value of all classes
cannot exceed the physical bandwidth value.
Note When setting the maximum bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper function per
line group/line number (collective addition mode), the value cannot be less than the total
value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio for each class (class-b to class-d). Set
the maximum bandwidth limit value that satisfies the following conditions.
* These conditions are applied only when the output scheduling operation mode is Deficit
WRR.
Output port shaper function Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
2-72
Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b + class-c + class-d Surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio
Note When setting the maximum bandwidth limit value of each class for the output port shaper
function per line group/line number class (individual addition mode), the value cannot be
less than the value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio for each class (class-b to
class-d). Set the maximum bandwidth limit value that satisfies the following conditions.
* These conditions are applied only when the output scheduling operation mode is Deficit
WRR.
Output port shaper function Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-b
Maximum bandwidth limit value class-c Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-c
Maximum bandwidth limit value class-d Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-d

Note During executing of the output port shaper function setting command, the following
operations are performed.
If a line group is specified, the continuity of the specified line group is temporarily
stopped.
If a line number is specified, the continuity of all the FE ports (17 to 24) is temporarily
stopped.

Commands


2-73
(1) Operation example of the output port shaper function (when setting per line group/line
number (collective addition mode))
The following is an example of setting the output port shaper function for an FE port (per line
number).

- Operation of the output port shaper function
The total value 70 Mbps of class-a to class-d will be shrunk to 60 Mbps by the output
shaper function when it is output.
The total value 70 Mbps of output frames class-a to class-d will be shrunk by the output
port shaper function to 60 Mbps (class-a 25 Mbps; class-b 20 Mbps; class-c 10 Mbps;
class-d 5 Mbps) in the order of the priority from the lowest class to be output.
class-a
25 Mbps
class-c
10 Mbps
class-d
15 Mbps
L2SW
class-b
class-c
Output port
shaper function
Rate 60 Mbps
class-b
20 Mbps
CX2200
Rate 25 Mbps
class-a
Rate 20 Mbps
Rate 10 Mbps
Rate 15 Mbps
class-d
[Breakdown]

class-a 25 Mbps
class-b 20 Mbps
class-c 10 Mbps
class-d 5 Mbps
2-74
Input example
The following setting example shows the case that the output port shaper function is set for an FE
port (per line number).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 60000
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:19:52

!
!
set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 59968
!
!
*Switch# show qos out-bandwidth 17
=======================
Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

2-75
(2) Operation example of the output port shaper function (when setting per line group/line
number class (individual addition mode))
The following is an example of setting the output port shaper function per FE port (line
number) class.

class-a
40 Mbps
class-b
30 Mbps
class-c
15 Mbps
class-d
15 Mbps class-d
L2SW
class-a
Rate 40 Mbps
class-b
class-c
class-a 40 Mbps
class-b 20 Mbps
class-c 15 Mbps
class-d 10 Mbps
Output port
shaper function
CX2200
Rate 30 Mbps
Rate 15 Mbps
Rate 15 Mbps
- Operation of the output port shaper function
Class-a 40 Mbps, class-b 30 Mbps, class-c 15 Mbps, and class-d 15 Mpbs are shrunk by the
output port shaper function to class-a 40 Mbps, class-b 20 Mbps, class-c 15 Mbps, and
class-d 10 Mbps when it is output.
2-76
Input example
The following setting example shows the case that the output port shaper function is set for an FE
port (line number) per class.

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 40000 class-b 20000 c
lass-c 15000 class-d 10000
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:22:37

!
!
set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 40000 class-b 19968 class-c 14
976 class-d 9984
!
!
=======================
Scheduler Mode : SP

Rate(Kbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 fe separate maximum --- 40000 19968 14976 9984
--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

2-77
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function sets the surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio which operates on the Deficit WRR per class (class-b to class-d). Traffic volume is
controlled by a ratio based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set by the
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function.
The class-a value which operates in the SP mode cannot be set by the Deficit WRR surplus
bandwidth distribution function. The class-a value is determined as follows.
(1) If the maximum bandwidth limit value is set with [line group/line number per class (individual
addition mode)] by the output port shaper function
The value is determined based on the class-a maximum bandwidth limit value of the output
port shaper function. The class-a maximum bandwidth limit value which is set by the output
port shaper function equals the class-a value of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
distribution function.
(2) If the maximum bandwidth limit value is set with [line group/line number (collective addition
mode)] by the output port shaper function
The value is determined based on the maximum bandwidth limit value per line group/line
number (collective addition mode) which has been set by the output port shaper function.
The maximum bandwidth limit value which is set by the output port shaper function equals the
class-a value of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function.
The surplus bandwidth is the remaining bandwidth after using for class-a in the SP mode.

Memo Line group types differ depending on the mounting line card. The correspondence list
between mounting line card and line group type is shown below.

Line group
Mounting line card
1/1 1/2 2/1 2/2
32T1E1H
(32E1/T1 TDM/ATM)
ATMoP
(1-16)
TDMoP
(1-16)
- -
32T1E1T
(32E1/T1 TDM)
-
TDMoP
(1-16, 33-48)
- - LINE1
1ATM155A
(1STM-1/OC-3 ATM)
ATMoP (1) - - -
LINE2
2GBE
(2GbE)
- - GbE (25) GbE (26)

Memo This function operates only at output ports.
Memo It can be set only when the output scheduling operation mode function is set to the Deficit
2-78
WRR mode.
2-79
Memo The default value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio (class-b to class-d) is set to 64
Kbps.
Memo Set a multiple of 64 Kbps for the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value. However, for
line numbers 17 to 24, 100 Mbps is not rounded down to a multiple of 64 Kbps.
Note If the output frames of class-b to class-d underrun the value of each class which has been
set for the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio, the surplus bandwidth is distributed based
on the set surplus bandwidth distribution ratio. If the output frames of class-b to class-d
exceed the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio, it may not be distributed with the ratio.
Note Regarding the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value per class, the total value of all
classes cannot exceed the physical bandwidth.
Note The total value of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio values for each class (class-b to
class-d) cannot exceed the maximum bandwidth limit value of the output port shaper
function which has been set per line group/line number (collective addition mode). Set
the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value that satisfies the following conditions.
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function Output port shaper function
class-b + class-c + class-d Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio Maximum bandwidth
limit value

Note The surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value for each class (class-b to class-d) cannot
exceed the maximum bandwidth limit value for each class which has been set per line
group/line number class (individual addition mode) for the output port shaper function.
Set the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value that satisfies the following conditions.
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function Output port shaper function
Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-b Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b
Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-c Maximum bandwidth limit value class-c
Surplus bandwidth distribution ratio class-d Maximum bandwidth limit value class-d

Note During executing of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function setting
command, the following operations are performed.
If a line group is specified, the continuity of the specified line group is temporarily
stopped.
If a line number is specified, the continuity of all FE ports (17 to 24) is temporarily
stopped.

2-80
Commands


(1) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
The following is an example of setting the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
for an FE port (per line number).

class-a
70 Mbps
class-b
50 Mbps
class-c
50 Mbps
L2SW
class-a
SP (Strict Priority)
Rate 70 Mbps
class-b Deficit WRR
30000 Kbps: 3 (Ratio)
Deficit WRR
Surplus bandwidth
distribution function
Rate 15 Mbps
CX2200
class-d
50 Mbps
class-d Deficit WRR
class-c Deficit WRR
Rate 10 Mbps
Rate 5 Mbps
- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
Frames of class-a 70 Mbps in the SP (Strict Priority) mode will be output with the top priority.
Since the input rate of class-a is 70 Mbps, the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR surplus
bandwidth distribution function would be 100 Mbps 70 Mbps = 30 Mbps, giving the surplus bandwidth of 30 Mbps.
The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of class-b: class-c: class-d = 3 (30000 Kbps): 2 (20000 Kbps): 1 (10000
Kbps) based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for each class (class-b to class-d).
Calculation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
Output rate of class-b: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps Ratio 3 / (3+2+1) = 15 Mbps
Output rate of class-c: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps Ratio 2 / (3+2+1) = 10 Mbps
Output rate of class-d: Surplus bandwidth 30 Mbps Ratio 1 / (3+2+1) = 5 Mbps
2-81
Input example
The following setting example shows how to enable the output scheduling operation mode and set
the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution ratio per class of the FE port. The following is a
setting example of the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio at the rate of "class-b: class-c: class-d =
3 (30000 Kbps) : 2 (20000 Kbps) : 1 (10000 Kbps)" as shown above.

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 30000 class-c 20000
class-d 10000
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:16:49

!
!
set qos out-bandwidth mode sp+wrr
set qos out-bandwidth wrr-rate 17 separate class-b 29952 class-c 19968 class-d 9
984
!
!
=======================

Rate(Kbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*Switch#

2-82
(2) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output
port shaper function (set per line group/line number)
and the output port shaper function for an FE port (per line number).

class-a
42 Mbps
class-c
50 Mbps
class-d
50 Mbps
L2SW
class-b Deficit WRR
class-c Deficit WRR
20000 Kbps : 2 (Ratio)
Output port
shaper function
Rate 60 Mbps
class-b
50 Mbps
CX2200
Rate 42 Mbps
class-a
Deficit WRR
Surplus bandwidth
Rate 9 Mbps
Rate 6 Mbps
Rate 3 Mbps
class-d Deficit WRR
10000 Kbps : 1 (Ratio)
[Breakdown]

class-a 42 Mbps
class-b 9 Mbps
class-c 6 Mbps
class-d 3 Mbps
- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output port shaper function
Since the rate set for the output port shaper function is 60 Mbps and the input rate of class-a is 42 Mbps,
the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function would be
60 Mbps 42 Mbps = 18 Mbps, giving the surplus bandwidth of 18 Mbps.
The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of class-b: class-c: class-d = 3 (30000 Kbps): 2 (20000 Kbps):
1 (10000 Kbps) based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for each class
(class-b to class-d).
2-83
Input example
The following setting example shows how to set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
function and the output port shaper function to an FE port (per line number).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 60000
class-d 10000
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 17:19:52

!
!
set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 59968
984
!
!
=======================

Rate(Kbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*Switch#

2-84
(3) Operation example of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function + output
port shaper function (set per class)
and the output port shaper function for an FE port (per class).

class-a
20 Mbps
class-b
50 Mbps
class-c
50 Mbps
class-d
50 Mbps class-d Deficit WRR
L2SW
class-a
Rate 20 Mbps
class-b Deficit WRR
class-c Deficit WRR
class-a 20 Mbps
class-b 40 Mbps
class-c 20 Mbps
class-d 20 Mbps
Output port
shaper function
CX2200
Rate 40 Mbps
Rate 20 Mbps
Rate 20 Mbps
- Operation of the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution function
Since the input rate of class-a is 20 Mbps, the calculation of surplus bandwidth for the Deficit WRR
surplus bandwidth distribution function would be 100 Mbps 20 Mbps = 80 Mbps, giving the surplus
bandwidth of 80 Mbps.
The surplus bandwidth is output at the rate of class-b: class-c: class-d = 2 (40000 Kbps): 1 (20000
Kbps): 1 (20000 Kbps) based on the surplus bandwidth distribution ratio which has been set for
each class (class-b to class-d).
Deficit WRR
Surplus bandwidth
2-85
Input example
The following setting example shows how to set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
function and the output port shaper function to an FE port (per class).

*Switch# set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 20000 class-b 40000 c
lass-c 20000 class-d 20000
class-d 20000
!Cpusw : cpusw
!Line1 : 32t1e1h
!Line2 : 2gbe
!Present Time : 01/01/2009 22:07:29

!
!
set qos out-bandwidth maximum 17 separate class-a 19968 class-b 40000 class-c 19
968 class-d 19968
9968
!
!
=======================

Rate(Kbps)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 fe separate maximum --- 19968 40000 19968 19968

*Switch#

2-86
Specifies the aggregation mode.
Specifies the priority port.
Specifies the aggregation mode.
2.3.1.4 Link aggregation
The CX2200 supports the link aggregation function that collects up multiple Fast Ether ports or
Gigabit Ether ports to make a single logical transmission path between other devices. This
function can make a group port assume a role of redundancy. This unit supports two functions
including the simple aggregation function and IEEE802.3ad aggregation function.

Simple aggregation
Simple aggregation is NECs unique link aggregation function, which implements link aggregation
without recourse to protocol communication between devices.
Up to eight ports per one group and up to five groups can be set. All ports for link aggregation
need to be assigned with the same VLAN ID and same speed. Set this function as follows:

Specifying aggregation groups 2-88

Specifying port priorities 2-94

Or,



Note The function cannot be set for ports other than GbE and FE ports.
Note The function cannot be set for ports where EtherRing function is enabled.

2-87
Specifies the priority level of the switch.
Sets aggregation.
Specifies the priority level of the switch.
Sets aggregation.
IEEE802.3ad aggregation
This unit allows the user to set dynamic link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad by communicating
with the other device using control frames of LACP. This function sets link aggregation according
to the settings on the other device. For this purpose, it is necessary that the other device
complies with IEEE802.3ad.
The mode of link aggregation with LACP used can be either dot3ad or passive. Up to eight ports
and 5 groups can be set.
Set IEEE802.3ad aggregation as follows:

Specifying system priorities 2-93


Or,

Specifying system priorities 2-93



Note On a line where flow control is enabled or set to autonegotiation, IEEE802.3ad
aggregation does not work.
Note In a frame size which is shorter than the LACP frame size (128 bytes), IEEE802.3ad
aggregation does not work.
Note IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work for ports other than GbE and FE ports.
Note For LACP without a VLAN tag, MAC learning is performed with VLAN ID 1.
Note On a line where EtherRing function is enabled, . IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work.
2-88
Setting the configuration
The following explains how to set link aggregation and how the functions work according to the
settings. For details on commands, see "Command Reference".

Specifying aggregation groups
Specifies the ports required for setting link aggregation. At the same time, specify the number of
operation ports, and thus you can set the same number of ports from the highest-priority port to
operation ports and the remaining ports to standby ports that do not perform communication. If
the ports have the same priority, the operation ports are selected starting from the smallest-number
port. If a failure occurs on an operation port, the standby port having the highest priority is
automatically selected and switched to an operation port to replace the failed port.
If you do not set the number of operation ports, all group port numbers are used as operation ports.
In this case, if a failure occurs on a port, it is not replaced by another port.
Up to five groups and up to eight ports can be set for this aggregation function. However, ports
whose speed is different cannot be mixed in a same group.
For line connection with the other device that performs aggregation, connect the device port to port
in the order of the port priority of the other device, if the priorities are set, or in the ascending order
of the port numbers, if no port priority is set. The numbers of operation ports must be the same
on the both devices.
When there are six group ports and four of them are operation ports, if a failure occurs on an
operation port, port switching is performed as shown below. Upon recovery, the operation ports
before failure will operate again.

If the number of the group ports is the same as the number of the operation ports, all group ports
function as operation ports, and this disables switching if a failure occurs.
When you specify aggregation groups, specify the distribution function of the aggregation function
at the same time.

Standby ports
Failed port
Operation ports
Standby ports
Operation ports
Group ports
Failure
2-89
Distribution methods
This unit supports the following three distribution methods.
(1) Source MAC address distribution method (src-mac)
(2) Destination MAC address distribution method (dst-mac)
(3) Source MAC address XOR destination MAC address distribution method (both-mac)

Distribution algorithm
Determines which port in the group is used for output when a frame is output from the device, if link
aggregation is set on the output destination.
First, the individual ports selected as operation ports in a group are given a number from 1 to 8
cyclically, which is called LLB (Link Aggregation Load Balancing), starting from the port having the
smallest number. Then distribution algorithm is used to decide the LLB number of the port to
which the frame should be sent.
(The LLB to which a frame is transferred is called destination LLB.)
Lower 3-bit values of each address in the distribution methods of (1) and (2) and the values for
which 1 is added to the lower 3-bit values after taking the XOR value of each address in the
distribution method of (3) are selected as destination LLB.
The destination LLB is automatically changed when the operation port is changed due to reasons
such as layer 1 failure is detected, output destination is changed by setting, or LACP timeout is
detected.

Memo When using distribution methods, the target is only the lower 3 bits of a MAC address.
The upper 45 bits are not targeted.
Note Distribution methods are not applied to the destination of multicast, unknown (DLF), or
broadcast frames. One port is always selected as the destination of such frames by
software control.
Note Distribution methods are not applied to the frames sent in a flooding state.

2-90
Suppose that 17, 18, and 19 are grouped into LAG#1, and 22, 23 into LAG#2 as shown below.

LLB is assigned to each port in each group in a cyclic manner.

LAG table
LAG#1 LAG#2
LLB Output port# LLB Output port#
1 17 1 22
2 18 2 23
3 19 3 22
4 17 4 23
5 18 5 22
6 19 6 23
7 17 7 22
8 18 8 23

In the above case, the destination of a frame is decided as follows:

CX2200
LAG#1 LAG#2
25 26
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
2-91
When the following frame is output from a link aggregation group:
Source MAC = 0x000000000003 (0x3 = 0011)
Destination MAC = 0x000000000001 (0x1= 0001)

(1) Source MAC address distribution method (src-mac)
Destination LLB: Source MAC (0011) + 1 = 4
Result) According to the LAG table, the frame is distributed to 17 in LAG#1, and 23 in LAG#2.
(2) Destination MAC address distribution (dst-mac)
Destination LLB: Destination (0001) + 1 = 2
(3) Source MAC address XOR destination MAC address distribution method (both-mac)
Destination LLB: Source MAC XOR Destination MAC ((0011) XOR (0001)) + 1 = 3

local mode
Is used when NECs unique simple aggregation is used. This is the default setting of this unit.
Operation is based on the settings of the local unit without recourse to those of the other device,
because LACP communication is not performed. To make operation in this mode effective, select
the ports to be used on the local unit and the other unit in advance before setting the function.

Standby filtering local
Sets operation when frames are received in standby ports.
(1) standby-block: Discards received frames except LACP.
(2) standby-admit: Accepts received frames.

Memo Link aggregation protection time is applied for groups to which standby-admit is set.

2-92
dot3ad mode
Is the standard mode based on IEEE802.3ad. LACP communication with the other device is
periodically performed for setting of link aggregation. After link aggregation is set, LACP is sent to
the other device on a 1-second cycle.
If LACP from the other device is not received for 6 seconds, LACP reception times out, and the
port where timeout occurs is separated from the group and changed into a standby port. LACP
communication is performed even in this case, but the intervals of LACP transmission will be
changed to 30 seconds. When reception of LACP from the other device becomes possible, the
port will become a candidate for an operation port again.
The following explains how to decide operation ports and standby ports on the local unit and the
other device.
(1) Comparison of system priorities
First, the system priority of the other device and the system priority of the local unit are
compared.
(2) Comparison of port priorities
Then the port priority of the switch having the highest system priority is referred to. The ports
having higher port priorities are selected. Port priorities of a unit having lower system priority
are not referred to.
(3) Selection of operation ports
On a switch having the higher switch priority, ports are selected until the number reaches the
specified number of operation ports. If the number of operation ports on the other device is
smaller than that on the switch with the higher switch priority, in this process, the number of
operation ports on the other device will be effective. If the number of operation ports fails to
reach the specified number due to failure in reception of LACP or a physical cause like port
failure, the ports that fail to be selected will behave as standby ports.

2-93
passive mode
Sets link aggregation when the other device is in the dot3ad mode and LACP is received from the
other device.
If LACP is not received from the other device, link aggregation is not set because no LACP
transmission is made.

Commands
set aggregation group Setting of link aggregation group
show aggregation group Display of link aggregation setting status
clear aggregation group Clearing of link aggregation group

Note One same port cannot accept this setting together with port isolate setting.

Specifying system priorities
Specifies whether you use the port priority of the local unit or that of the other device when you
select operation and standby ports. The switch having smaller value (higher system priority)
takes precedence. If both has the same the priority, their MAC addresses are compared, and the
switch having the MAC address of the smaller value will be selected as the priority switch.

Commands
set aggregation system priority Setting of system priority
show aggregation system priority Display of system priority

Note This setting is used for protocol communication by LACP between the devices. Because
simple aggregation does not support LACP protocol communication between the devices,
this setting makes no difference in operation.
Note Set the system priority before setting link aggregation. System priority cannot be set
after link aggregation is set.

2-94
Specifying port priorities
Specifies the priorities of the ports specified in specification of aggregation groups. The smaller
the value is, the higher the priority is. If the priorities are same, priority is given to
smallest-number port and the port is selected as an operation port.

Commands
set aggregation port priority Setting of port priority
show aggregation port priority Display of port priority

Specifying link aggregation protection time
Is available for link aggregation groups with standby-admit set that operate in the simple
aggregation mode.
A port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state becomes a standby port after linkup is
notified and then changes to an operation port. The link aggregation protection time function
controls the standby time from linkup notification received by a port that is in the unblocked and
physical link down state to its change into an operation port.
The port remains the standby state during the link aggregation protection time, which allows frame
reception but not frame transmission. After the link aggregation protection time elapses, the port
becomes operational and allows frame transmission.
By setting the link aggregation protection time, you can reduce the communication down time that
arises when a port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state changes into an operation
port.

Commands
set aggregation protection-time Setting of link aggregation protection time
show aggregation protection-time Display of link aggregation protection time

Memo The link aggregation protection time can be set for each link aggregation group whether
any aggregation group exists or not.
Note If the linkup port is in the link aggregation protection time, it has an influence on the
following functions:
- For the fast and standard spanning tree function, the port status remains the discarding
state and will not change.
2-95
Setting example
The explanation is based on the following network.

The aggregation distribution method is based on the XOR value of the source MAC address and
destination MAC address. Four ports (ports 17-20) are set in Group 1 as simple aggregation.
Two ports (ports 25 and 26) are set in Group 5 in dot3ad mode. The port priorities of ports 19-20
are set to 10. The counterparts of ports 25 and 26 are operating in dot3ad mode.
In this sample configuration, the communication speed is set to 100 Mbps on ports 17-20, and 1
Gbps on ports 25 and 26, in advance.

CX2200
Port17-20 Port25-26
2-96
Input example

Learning of aggregation groups
Is performed by the port of the smallest number in an aggregation group for a frame received from
the aggregation port.

Memo The leaned MAC address is not cleared until all ports of link aggregation become standby
ports or aging timeout occurs. Learning of link aggregation is always performed on the
port of the smallest number in the group regardless of its implementation.
*Switch# set aggregation group 1 17-20 4 standby-admit local both-mac
*Switch# set aggregation group 5 25-26 2 dot3ad src-mac
*Switch# set aggregation port priority 19-20 10
*Switch# set aggregation protection-time 1 10000
*Switch# show aggregation group
Switch Aggregate Table
======================
Aggregated Ports/ Active-Numbers/ Mode/ Distribute
Index Name Standby-Filter Time(msec) Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 17-20 4 local both-mac
standby-admit 10000
5 25,26 2 dot3ad src-mac
standby-block 0

*Switch# show aggregation port priority 17-20,25-26
LAG Port Information
====================
Port Index Priority
-------------------
17 1 128
18 1 128
19 1 10
20 1 10
25 5 128
26 5 128

*Switch#
2-97
2.3.1.5 Frame size
The CX2200 provides the frame size setting function.
The minimum frame size is 64 bytes, and the maximum value is 1536 bytes for FE and 9000 bytes
for GbE. The default value is 1536 bytes for all.
Use the "set frame-size" command to set the frame size. The parameters of the "set frame-size"
command include the port type (FE or GbE) and frame size (64-1536 for FE or 64-9000 for GbE).
Enter these parameters separating them by a space.

Note The tolerable frame size on a tagbase VLAN port is the command specification value + 4
bytes.
Note When you set the frame size during data transmission and the frame size becomes
smaller than the size before the setting, the data transmission may be momentarily
interrupted, which may cause an error like a CRC error.
Note In a GbE port for which line card operation mode is set to FE, the frame size is treated as
1536 bytes even when the frame size setting value exceeds 1536 bytes.

Commands
set frame-size Setting of frame size
show frame-size Display of frame size

Input example
The frame size is set to 1536 bytes for the FE port and 9000 bytes for the GbE port.

*Switch# set frame-size fe 1536
*Switch# set frame-size gbe 9000
*Switch# show frame-size

Frame Size Value(Byte)
=================
FE-Port : 1536
GbE-Port : 9000

*Switch#
2-98
2.3.1.6 Spanning tree protocol
This unit supports the high-speed spanning tree function. In a large-scale network, redundant
network operation is implemented to make the network always available. However, if a layer 2
switch in a network is set up in redundant configuration, it may cause a broadcast storm where a
broadcast message loops, which can bring the network down. Then, spanning tree protocol is
useful as a layer 2 protocol because it can avoid loops even if the switch is in redundant
configuration.
On this unit, you can use the following two types of spanning tree protocols according to the
operation system.
(1) High-speed spanning tree (IEEE802.1w): RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Protocol based on IEEE802.1w. This spanning tree reconfigures a tree around a root bridge
quickly. This is the default function.
(2) Standard spanning tree (IEEE802.1D): STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)
When another device on the network supports STP instead of RSTP, this can be used as an
alternate function of RSTP.

Note The standard spanning tree function of this unit is provided as an alternate function of the
high-speed spanning tree function (IEEE802.1w). Therefore, the function is different
from that of IEEE802.1D STP.
Note The spanning tree function does not work for ports other than GbE and Fe ports.
Note The spanning tree function does not work for ports where the EtherRing function is
enabled.

2-99
Basic operation of spanning tree

Root switch determination
Each switch sends BPDU to other switches to notify them that it is a root switch so that a network
can be configured on the tree having the root switch placed in the center.
In the RSTP mode, protocol communication of Proposal and Agreement is performed and the root
switch and the designated port are determined at once.

Finally, the switch whose priority is the lowest (if the switch priorities are the same, the switch
whose MAC address is the smallest) will be selected as the root switch.
In the STP mode, a tree configuration is not constructed by Proposal and Agreement method.

(1) Sends Proposal BPDU.
(3) Agreement BPDU
Returns it if the other switch is more prioritized.
(2) Blocks the other ports.
(6) Blocks the other ports.
(5) Sends Proposal BPDU.
(4) Immediately enters into the forwarding state.
1 2 3
1
2
1
2
2-100
Determination of the root port and designated port
In the RSTP mode, the root port and designated port are selected through the protocol
communication of Proposal and Agreement.

In the course of determination of the root port and designated port, ports are compared in the
following sequence both in the RSTP and STP mode.
1. Route ID
A route ID consists of a 2-octet switch priority and 6-octet MAC address. The port that
receives the BPDU that has the route ID of the smallest value will be selected as the root port.
2. Route cost
The accumulated path cost value from the root switch. The port that has the smallest route
cost will be selected as the root port.
In the above figure, the accumulated path cost value of the route from designated port B is 2.
3. Designated switch ID
The port of the switch whose switch ID (switch priority + MAC address) is the smallest will be
selected as the designated port.
4. Designated port ID
A port ID consists of 2-octet port priority and 2-octet port number. The port that has the
smallest port ID will be selected as the designated port.

Designated port A
Path cost value 1
Root port B
Path cost value 2
Designated port B
Path cost value 3
Root port C
Path cost value 4
Root switch A Designated switch B
Designated switch C
2-101
Port status change in spanning tree
The root switch sends a BPDU to the designated switch in every 2 seconds by default. If this
frame is not detected by any other switch before receiving timeout (6 seconds: three times the
hello-time), or if only a BPDU of lower priority is received, the other switches will have receiving
timeout and change the role of the port to designated port.
The behavior of the port statues upon reception of a BPDU is different between the RSTP mode
and STP mode.

When operation is in RSTP mode
1) When an Agreement message is received, the status changes immediately.
Port status change: Discarding Forwarding
2) When no BPDU is received, the status changes to forwarding in about 30 seconds.
Port status change: Discarding Learning Forwarding

Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default) Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default)

Note If, however, the designated port is not set point-to-point, the operation will be the same as
the operation in STP mode.

2-102
When operation is in STP mode
If the transfer delay time is defaulted to 15 seconds, the status changes from discarding to
forwarding in about 30 seconds whether a BPDU is received or not.
Port status change: Discarding Learning Forwarding

Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default) Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default)

Memo If a switch receives a higher-priority BPDU or nothing while the receiving timeout is
enabled, it outputs a trap indicating detection of a new root switch. If a switch does not
receive anything, it detects itself as the root switch.
Memo Port migration is included in port status change. Changing the status among the four
statuses including send-stp, sending-stp, send-rstp, and sending-rstp is called migration.
At the time when individual port sends a BPDU in RSTP or STP mode, a trap indicating
occurrence of migration is output.
Memo In the event of a topology change, each port operates the timer for 4 seconds (twice the
hello-time) by default in RSTP mode, or for 35 seconds (maximum aging time + transfer
delay time) by default in STP mode. If a port receives a BPDU whose priority is higher
than the priority it holds while the timer is working, it checks that the timer of each port has
stopped and outputs a trap for topology change.
Note The length of receiving timeout is calculated from the smaller value between the maximum
aging time minus the message age time of the BPDU and three times hello-time.
Note MAC learning of a BPDU without a VLAN tag is performed by VLAN ID 1.

2-103
Sets the spanning tree mode, switch priority,
and timer to be used in the system.
Sets the items required for configuration of a
spanning tree on each port.
Applies the settings to the entire system and
the status is checked by showing it.
Configuring spanning tree
Configure a spanning tree following the steps described below.

Setting data on the switch 2-104

Setting data on the spanning tree port 2-107

Enabling spanning tree 2-111

2-104
Setting data on the switch
Sets information on the switch, which is necessary for spanning tree protocol to function.

Setting the mode
Sets either RSTP mode or STP mode for the CX2200 spanning tree protocol. Use the "set
spantree mode" command to set the RSTP/STP mode.

Memo Mode change applies to the entire switch. The default is RSTP mode.
Note When you change the mode, RSTP/STP must be disabled.
Changing the mode initializes all configuration information related to RSTP/STP to the
default values of the newly set mode.

Enabling or disabling RSTP/STP
Is performed using the "set spantree" command.
Set enable or disable as the parameter of the "set spantree" command.

Input example
The mode is set to RSTP.

Switch# set spantree mode rstp
*Switch# show spantree mode
Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : rstp
Status : disabled

*Switch#

2-105
Setting the switch priority
Sets the preferential switch. The switch whose priority is the smallest in the same network will be
selected as the root switch.
Use the "set spantree priority" command to set the switch priority.

Memo If more than one switch exists, which has the smallest switch priority, in the same network,
the switch whose MAC address is the smallest will be selected as the root switch.
Note In the RSTP mode, set the switch priority to a multiple of 4096.

Input example
The switch priority is set to 32768.

Setting the timer
Sets the timer information on the switch, which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to
operate as you desire.

Setting the hello-time
Sets the intervals at which the switch sends a BPDU to other switches. When the root switch is
determined, the switches will operate on the hello-time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the hello-time.

Setting the transfer delay time
Sets the time taken for changing the port status from learning to forwarding. When the root switch
is determined, the switches will operate on the transfer delay time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the transfer delay time.

*Switch# set spantree priority 32768
*Switch#

2-106
Setting the maximum aging time
Sets the maximum survival time of the received route information. When the root switch is
determined, the switches will operate on the maximum aging time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the maximum aging time.

Note For stability and correct modification of spanning tree, this setting must meet the following
conditions.
2 (Transfer delay time -1) Maximum aging time
Maximum aging time 2 (Hello-time + 1)

Input example
The timer is set. This is an example in the RSTP mode.

Setting the maximum BPDU transmission times
Sets the maximum times that a line on the switch can send a BPDU in a second and limits the
BPDU transmission times in order to keep the bandwidth from spreading when a topology change
occurs frequently.
Use the "set spantree txholdcount" command to set the maximum BPDU transmission times.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode.

Input example
The maximum BPDU transmission times is set to 3.

*Switch# set spantree txholdcount 3
*Switch#

*Switch# set spantree time hello 2
*Switch# set spantree time forward 15
*Switch# set spantree time maxage 20
*Switch#

2-107
Setting data on the spanning tree port
On the ports, sets the information which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to
operate as you desire. This information determines that which line is preferentially used for the
root port and designated port.

Memo When spanning tree is set together with link aggregation, BPDUs are sent from the
smallest-number port of link aggregation in one same group. In this case, the settings of
the smallest-number port of link aggregation are always used as the settings for spanning
tree.
Note When flow control is enabled or set to autonegotiation on a line, the spanning tree function
does not work on this line.

Enabling or disabling spanning tree operation for each port
Is performed using the "set spantree port" command. Enter the port number and enable or
disable in this order as the parameters of the "set spantree port" command.

Memo If disable is set on a port, spanning tree does not apply to this port. It forwards frames in
the same way as the ports where spanning tree is not set do.

2-108
Setting the port path cost
Activates your desired path. The default setting is autonegotiation, which depends on the line
speed.

Association between the line speed and path cost by default
Path cost
Line speed
STP Mode (IEEE802.1D) RSTP Mode (IEEE802.1w)
10 Mbps 100 2000000
100 Mbps 19 200000
1 Gbps 4 20000

In RSTP/STP configuration, the root switch and all the other switches shall be connected by the
paths having the lowest port path cost possible. To set a port path cost independently from the
line speed, use the "set spantree port cost" command.

Memo The range of port path cost that can be set is different depending on the mode.
RSTP mode: 1-200000000
STP mode: 1-65535

2-109
Setting the port priority
Activates your desired path on a priority basis. If two or more ports have a path to the other port
of which path cost is the same, the port whose priority is the lowest is selected as the root port.
Use the "set spantree port priority" command to set the priority.
If the port priorities are also same, the port whose port number is the smallest will be selected as
the root port.

Memo In the RSTP mode, a port priority can be a multiple of 16.

Input example
Spanning tree is set for each port. This is an example in the RSTP mode.

Setting point-to-point
Makes the other device to operate as connected point-to-point and to be a target of instant
switching. When autonegotiation is set, the state changes to enable or disable depending on the
full duplex setting with the other device. Set point-to-point by using the "set spantree port
point-to-point" command.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode.
Note When link aggregation is used together, set this item to auto or enable.

*Switch# set spantree port 17-19 enable
*Switch# set spantree port cost 18 20000
*Switch# set spantree port priority 19 128
*Switch#

2-110
Setting the edge port
Changes a port connected to a device (terminal) other than a switch, at the time of linkup, into a
port that can transfer frames. Use the "set spantree port edge" command to set an edge port.

Memo This command is effective only in the RSTP mode. BPDU transmission is performed
periodically also on the line having this setting.

Input example
Point-to-point is set to 19, and edge port is set to 17.

*Switch# set spantree port point-to-point 19 enable
*Switch# set spantree port edge 17 enable
*Switch#

2-111
Enabling spanning tree

Enabling spanning tree
Applies spanning tree to the entire system. Perform this setting after completing all the above
settings. To enable spanning tree, use the "set spantree" command.

Memo If you disable this function, a network loop may occur. Therefore, if you do not use
spanning tree, change the network configuration such that no loops may occur before you
disable this function.

Input example

*Switch# set spantree enable
*Switch# show spantree mode
Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : rstp
Status : enabled

*Switch#

2-112
Displaying spanning tree information
Shows information of individual port with the "show spantree port" or "show spantree info"
command. You can confirm the information in the same way either in RSTP or STP mode. For
details on the commands, see "Command Reference".

Input examples
Spanning tree port information is shown. You can see that 17 is the root port.

*Switch# show spantree port 17-25
RSTP Port Configuration Table
=============================
Port Priority Status Edge Cost
-------------------------------------------
17 128 enabled enabled auto
18 128 enabled disabled 20000
19 128 enabled disabled auto
20 128 disabled disabled auto

RSTP Port Status Table
======================
DES DES DES
Port Status Role Cost Bridge Cost Port TC
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
17 forwarding root 200000 03fb00004cb42511 19 8029 1
18 discarding disabled 20000 800000004cb4fc70 0 8002 0
19 discarding disabled 800000004cb4fc70 0 8003 0

*Switch#

2-113
Spanning tree information is shown. You can see that 17 is the root port. The settings given on
the local switch are shown under Local Switch Information and information from the root switch is
shown mainly under STP Global Information.

*Switch# show spantree info
STP Global Information
======================
Spanning Tree Version : IEEE802.1w(RSTP)
STP Priority : 32768
Time Since Topology Change (sec): 18015
STP Topology Changes : 0
STP Designated Root : 000000004cc4e3c1
STP Root Cost : 200019
STP Root Port Number : 17
STP MAX Age (sec): 20
STP Hello Time (sec): 2
STP Hold Time (sec): 1
STP Forward Delay (sec): 15

Local Switch Information
========================
STP Bridge MAX Age (sec): 20
STP Bridge Hello Time (sec): 2
STP Bridge Forward Delay (sec): 15
STP TX Hold Count : 3

*Switch#

2-114
Sets the port isolate.
Clears the port isolate.
Displays the port isolate setting status.
2.3.2 Setting of Extended Functions
2.3.2.1 Port isolate
CX2200 has the port isolate function that blocks the destination port of frames received from
arbitrary port. Transfer blocking is performed for all frames (broadcast, multicast, unicast frames
and flooding frames).
If the port isolate function has not been set (default status), frames coming from all ports can be
transferred to all other ports regardless of its line card type, as shown below for instance.

If the port isolate is set, you can enable a communication between FE and GbE and between GbE
and GbE while only the communication between FEs is disabled, as shown below for instance.

Setting port isolate 2-115

Clearing port isolate 2-116

Displaying port isolate 2-117
FE

GbE
2/1 2/2
CX2200
Send
Transfer
Transfer
17 20 24
FE

GbE
2/1 2/2
CX2200
Send
Transfer
17 20 24
2-115
Setting port isolate
Sets the port isolate. By setting the port isolate function, you can prevent from transferring frames
coming from the specified port to another specified port.

Command
set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Memo The port isolate setting does not impact the configuration data which has already been set
because it is an additional specification of specified transfer destination port for the
specified reception port.
Note The setting can not be performed in complex with the link aggregation for the same port.
Note To set for GbE port, and ATMoP or TDMoP group, specify the line group number.

Input example
Frames coming from port 17 are not transferred to none of port 20 to 24.

Switch# set isolate port 17 20-24 enable
*Switch#

2-116
Clearing port isolate
Clears the port isolate. By clearing the port isolate function, you can transfer frames coming from
the specified port to another specified port.

Command
set isolate port Setting/clearing of port isolate

Memo Clearing port isolate setting does not impact the configuration data which has already
been set because it clears only the setting regarding specified transfer destination port for
the specified reception port.
Note To set for GbE port, and ATMoP or TDMoP group, specify the line group number.

Input example
Frames coming from port 17 are transferred to any of port 20 to 24.

Switch# set isolate port 17 20-24 disable
*Switch#

2-117
Displaying port isolate
Shows the port isolate setting state of the specified reception port.

Command
show isolate port Display of port isolate setting state

Input example
Port isolate state of the reception port 17 is displayed.

*Switch# show isolate port 17
FE Isolate Configuration
========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 17
Transfer-Blocking Port : 20-24

*Switch#

2-118
2.3.2.2 Filtering
The filtering function expressly directs the system to discard frames by specifying a traffic type.
CX2200 has the input port filtering function.

1 Input port filtering function
At the input port, this function expressly directs the system to discard frames using information in
frames. Up to 32 indexes can be set per port. To set the filtering, set a port number, index, and
discarding condition.
The followings can be selected for the discarding condition.
Destination MAC address (48-bit)
Source MAC address (48-bit)
VLAN ID (Outer-Vlan) (16-bit)
Ethernet type (16-bit)

Memo Two or more conditions can be selected for discarding.
Memo This function checks frames in the ascending order of the index numbers, and when it
finds an input frame having the same information as the specified information, it performs
filtering.
Memo The point in a frame to be referred for Ethernet type varies depending on the tag
assignment status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the outer tag is different from the
TPID set on the port, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is not
0x8100, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is 0x8100, the next field
is referred to.

2-119
Referring example
* EhterType Setting of the port: 0x9100

Note For multiple tags, up to two stages are supported.
Note If the tag swap function has been set, VLAN-ID to which the tag swap function is enabled
is to be filtered.
Note This function cannot be set for ports other than the GbE port.

MAC address VLAN ID
1000
EtherType
0x0800
Data TPID
0x9100
MAC address Data EtherType
0x0800
MAC address VLAN ID
1000
TPID
0x8100
Data VLAN ID
1000
EtherType
0x0800
TPID
0x9100
- Frame without tag
- Tag frame with one stage
- Tag frame with two stages
EtherType to be referred
2-120
Operation example
The following example shows the operation of the filtering function in the reception port.

Filter index list
Destination Source
Index MAC Address MAC Address VID Ether-Type
------------------------------------------------------------
1 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:11:22:33:44:55 1000 ---
2 --- --- 3000 ---
3 --- --- --- 0x0800
Frame A
Frame B
Frame C
Frame D
Frame E
Frame F
CX2200

Frame list
- Frame A

- Frame B

- Frame C

- Frame D

- Frame E

- Frame F
Source MAC
00:11:22:33:44:55
Destination MAC
00:00:00:06:06:06
Data EtherType
0x0800
VLAN ID TPID
1000 0x9100
VLAN ID TPID
1000 0x8100
Source MAC
00:11:22:33:44:55
Destination MAC
00:00:00:05:05:05
Data EtherType
0x0800
VLAN ID TPID
1000 0x9100
Source MAC
00:11:22:33:44:55
Destination MAC
00:00:00:00:00:01
Data EtherType
0x0900
VLAN ID TPID
1000 0x9100
Source MAC
00:55:44:33:22:11
Destination MAC
00:00:00:00:00:01
Data EtherType
0x0900
VLAN ID TPID
1000 0x9100
Source MAC
00:11:22:33:44:55
Destination MAC
00:00:00:03:03:03
Data VLAN ID TPID
2000 0x9100
EtherType
0x0900
Source MAC
00:11:22:33:44:55
Destination MAC
00:00:00:04:04:04
Data EtherType
0x0800
Transmit
Frame B
Frame A
Frame C
Frame D
Frame E
Frame F
Discarded as the frame satisfies the filter index 1 condition.
Discarded as the frame satisfies the filter index 2 condition
by VLAN SWAP.
Not discarded as it does
not satisfy any of the
filtering conditions.
Submit

VLAN:1000
SWAP VLAN: 2000 3000
Ether type: 0x9100
Filter index: 1, 2, 3
Discarded as each Ether Type satisfies the filter index 3
condition.
D
i
s
c
a
r
d

2-121
Commands
set filter in-port Setting of input filtering
clear filter in-port Clearing of input filtering
show filter in-port Display of input filtering

Input example

*Switch# set filter in-port 25 1 dest-mac 00:00:00:00:00:01 src-mac
00:11:22:33:44:55 vlan-id 1000
*Switch# set filter in-port 25 2 vlan-id 3000
*Switch# set filter in-port 25 3 ether-type 0x0800
*Switch#
*Switch# show filter in-port 25
Filter Profile Table
====================
Port : 25
=========
Destination Source
Index MAC Address MAC Address VID Ether-Type
--------------------------------------------------------------
1 00:00:00:00:00:01 00:11:22:33:44:55 1000 ---
2 --- --- 3000 ---
3 --- --- --- 0x0800

*Switch#

2-122
2.3.2.3 Reference clock control function
Performs the setting regarding reference clock applied to the network synchronization required for
the data frame transmission.
This unit supports two types of reference clock control: one is to set multiple clock sources
(hereinafter called "source clock") to be a reference clock with priorities (unit collective clock
mode), and the other is to set a source clock for each clock supply destination group
(line-independent clock mode).
This unit also supports the function that outputs a clock from the interface port.

Clock output function
This function outputs a clock from the clock interface port.

Memo The clock output function runs under the CPUSWE card only.
Memo The clock that is output is fixed to the 2048kHz synchronization mode (120).
Note As clock output cannot be stopped, disconnect the cable from the port when not using the
function.
CX260 CX260 CX260
CX2200-
CX2600-
Clock output
TDM/ATM Network
TDM/ATM Network
Network
synchronization
Within the
station
Network
synchronization
2-123
Setting the line-independent clock mode
Sets the operation mode of the reference clock control function.
If the line-independent clock mode is disabled, this unit operates in the unit collective clock mode.

Memo You can change the operation mode only when any 32T1E1H line card /32T1E1T line
card is being mounted and the reference clock control function is set to the default.

1 Unit collective clock mode
The unit selects a source clock which is to be a reference clock automatically based on the source
clock state and priority settings. When the source clock applied as a reference clock is disabled
to be supplied, the unit selects another reference clock based on the state of other source clock
and priority settings automatically.
While in the unit collective clock mode, source clocks for this unit are as follows.
Line extraction clock............. Clock supplied by ATM/TDM line
Adaptive clock ...................... Clock regenerated from RTP packet

Settable source clock varies depending on the line card type. See the following table.

Line card type
Line extraction
clock
Adaptive clock Clock priority setting
32T1E1H line card Up to two sets * Up to two sets Up to two sets can be set in total
32T1E1T line card Up to two sets * Up to two sets Up to two sets can be set in total
1ATM155A line card One set One set Up to two sets can be set in total
* Four sets in total, one for port 1 to 8, another one for port 9 to 16, another one for port 33 to 40, and the
other one for port 41 to 48.

Note When all the source clocks are disabled to be supplied, the unit retains the last clock
which has been applied as a reference clock, which will be the reference clock.
2-124
Setting the reference clock switchover mode
Sets the reference clock switchover mode.
Reference clock switchover modes for this unit are as follows.

Switchover mode Mode description
With auto switch/
With auto switch-back
When the source clock which has been applied as a reference
clock gets disabled to be supplied, or when a source clock with
a priority higher than currently selected reference clock gets
enabled, the reference clock selection is performed and the
highest-priority source clock is selected among the ones which
are being supplied.
With auto switch/
Without auto switch-back
The reference clock selection is performed only when the
source clock which has been applied as a reference clock is
disabled to be supplied, and the highest-priority source clock is
selected among the source clocks with the priority lower than
the one which is disabled to be supplied.

Memo Reference clock selection may be performed shortly after executing the command.
Memo When the source clock gets enabled to be supplied after setting a priority in a condition
that reference clock priority setting does not exist, the reference clock selection is
performed regardless of the switchover mode.

Setting reference clock priority
Sets the source clock priorities which are selectable for the reference clock. The priorities can be
set on a scale of 1 to 3.
Specify either Line extraction clock or Adaptive clock for the arbitrary priority.

Memo When specifying Adaptive clock, the adaptive clock setting is required separately.
Note Priority which has been already set cannot be modified. Set it again after clearing the
priority.
Note Two or more priorities cannot be set for the same port.

2-125
Resetting reference clock
Restart the operation of a reference clock selection. A source clock to be the reference clock is
automatically selected based on the source clock state and priority setting.

Commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of line-independent clock mode
set reference-clock mode Setting of reference clock switchover mode
set reference-clock priority Setting of reference clock priority
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock setting and state
reset reference-clock Resetting of reference clock

Input example

*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source disable
*Switch# set reference-clock mode revertive
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 1 port 33
*Switch# set reference-clock priority 3 adaptive 5
*Switch# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Multiple-Source : disabled
Reference Clock Mode : revertive

Clock Supply Status Table
=========================
Priority Source Status
-------------------------------------
* 1 port:33 normal
3 adaptive:5 fail

*Switch#

2-126
2 Line-independent clock mode
Sets a source clock (reference clock) and clock supply destination ports for each clock group (up to
three groups), making each group synchronize with the independent reference clock.
While in the line-independent clock mode, source clock for this unit is as follows.
Adaptive clock ...................... Clock regenerated from RTP packet

Settable source clock varies depending on the line card type. See the following table.

Line card type Adaptive clock Clock group setting
32T1E1H line card Up to three sets Up to three sets can be set in total
32T1E1T line card Up to three sets Up to three sets can be set in total
1ATM155A line card Not settable Not settable

Note You cannot set the line-independent clock mode when the TDMoP mode is set to
CESoPSN.
Note You cannot set the line-independent clock mode when the TDMoP mode is not set to
SAToP. For 32T1E1H card, however, you cannot set the port 33 to 48 as the clock
extraction source, because the adaptive-clock (a TDMoP control function) can be set only
to the port from 1 to 16. (For 32T1E1T, you can set the port 33 to 48 as the clock
extraction source.)
Setting reference clock group
For each clock group, sets a source clock and clock supply destination ports.
Up to three groups can be set.
Multiple ports can be set as port supply destination ports.

Memo The adaptive clock setting is required separately.
Note If group 1 is specified, you cannot specify clock supply destination ports. (If the setting of
group 2 or 3 is done, the clock supply destination ports for group 1 are reconfigured
automatically.
Note You cannot change the source clock that is already set. Change it after clearing the
setting of the corresponding group. (You can change clock supply destination ports that
are already set.)
Note You cannot set a port in multiple groups as a clock source port or as a clock supply
destination port.
2-127
Commands
set reference-clock multiple-source Setting of line-independent clock mode
set reference-clock group Setting of reference clock group
show reference-clock information Display of reference clock setting and state

Input example

*Switch# set reference-clock multiple-source enable
*Switch# set reference-clock group 1 adaptive 2
*Switch# set reference-clock group 2 adaptive 3 5,6,10-12
*Switch# set reference-clock group 3 adaptive 4 7,9,13,44-48
*Switch# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Multiple-Source : enabled

Reference Clock Supply Status Table
===================================
Group Source Status Member Ports
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 adaptive:2 fail 1,8,14-16,33-43
2 adaptive:3 acquiring 5-6,10-12
3 adaptive:4 acquiring 7,9,13,44-48

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-128
Register a PVC.
Clear a PVC.
Register a PVC name.
Clear a PVC name.
Block or unblock a PVC.
Set the ATMoP mode.
Set the ATMoP format.
Clear the setting of the ATMoP format.
Set the ATM cell concatenation.
Clear the setting of ATM cell concatenation
2.4 ATM Functions
2.4.1 ATM Path Setting
Configure ATM path settings.

Registrering PVC 2-130

Clearing PVC 2-130

Registering PVC name 2-131

Clearing PVC name 2-131

Blocking/unblocking PVC 2-132

Setting ATMoP mode 2-134

Setting ATMoP format 2-135

Clearing ATMoP format setting 2-136

Setting ATM cell concatenation 2-140

Clearing ATM cell concatenation setting 2-142

ATM Functions
2-129
Set the CLP-PW Priority mapping.
Set a path between ATMs.
Clear the setting of the pass between
ATMs.

Setting CLP-PW Priority mapping 2-146

Setting path between ATMs 2-150

Clearing path setting between ATMs 2-151

ATM Functions
2-130
2.4.1.1 PVC setting

Registrering PVC
Registers a PVC to make that specified PVC available and ready for communication with the
connected destination. PVC types are the VP connection and the VC connection. The VP
connection allows communication using all VCI values in a registered VPI value.

Commands
set pvc static Registration of a PVC
show pvc information Display of PVC setting status

Memo Up to 256 PVCs can be registered.
Note 0 to 255 can be used for VPI, and 32 to 16383 can be used for VCI. However, total width
in bits of VPI and VCI needs to be within 16 bits.

Clearing PVC
Clears a registered PVC.

Commands
clear pvc static Clearing of a PVC

Memo If a PVC is cleared, other setting information associated with that PVC is cleared.

ATM Functions
2-131
Registering PVC name
Assigns a PVC name to a registered PVC.
You can specify a PVC name instead of PVC (VPI, VCI) using ATM related commands.

Commands
set pvc name Registration of a PVC name

Memo If a PVC is cleared, the PVC name corresponding to the cleared PVC is also cleared.
Memo A PVC name must be 1 to 32 characters long.
Memo A PVC name may consist of alphabetic letters (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers
(0 to 9), hyphen (-), and underbar (_). A PVC name must begin with an alphabetic letter.
Note This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.

Clearing PVC name
Clears an assigned PVC name.

Commands
clear pvc name Clearing of a PVC name

ATM Functions
2-132
Blocking/unblocking PVC
Sets blocking/unblocking of a PVC. Blocking a PVC stops the connection. Unblocking a PVC
resumes the connection.

Commands
set pvc admin Blocking or unblocking of a single PVC
set pvc port admin Simultaneous blocking or unblocking of PVCs

Memo If a PVC is cleared, this setting is automatically cleared.
Memo The default value is enable (unblock).
Memo If the command mode is execution limitation mode, an execution confirmation is issued
after command input when enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking is set.
Note The PVC blocking/unblocking cannot be set if the PVC is not registered.

ATM Functions
2-133
Input example
Registration of PVCs (0/32, 0/33, 0/34, and 100)
Assignment of a PVC name to a PVC (0/32 and 100)
Blocking of a PVC (0/34 and 100)

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32-34
*Switch# set pvc static 1 100
*Switch# set pvc name 1 0/32 test
*Switch# set pvc name 1 100 vptest
*Switch# set pvc admin 1 0/34 disable
*Switch# set pvc admin 1 100 disable
*Switch# show pvc information
PVC System Connection Count
===========================
Configured Configurable
------------------------
3 253

PVC Port Connection Count
====================
Port Enabled Disabled Configured
-----------------------------------
1 2 2 4
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0

PVC Table
=========
Port VPI/VCI Name Admin
---------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 test enabled
1 0/33 enabled
1 0/34 disabled
1 100/--- vptest disabled

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-134
2.4.1.2 ATMoP

Setting ATMoP mode
Sets the mode of an PW frame that encapsulates an ATM cell. Also, sets the mode of an PW
frame accepted in decapsulation. 2-hop VLAN tag (c-tag) mode and UDP/IP (udp-ip) mode are
available as mode types. There are UDP port mode source and destination for the UDP/IP mode.
Control word existence also can be set for each mode.

Commands
set atmop mode Setting of ATMoP mode
show atmop format Display of ATMoP format information

Memo By default, the 2-hop VLAN tag mode is set and the control word setting is disabled.

Ether frame
header
Payload
(ATM cell)
Ether frame
header
Payload
(ATM cell)
UDP
header
IP
header
2-hop tag UDP/IP
ATM cell
ATM cell
PW frame
Packet
Network
BTS
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
CX2600
RNC
PW frame
* Encapsulate an ATM cell as an PW frame.
CX2200-
ATM Functions
2-135
Setting ATMoP format
ATMoP format setting function maps registered PVCs. In the 2-hop VLAN tag mode, they are
mapped to the VLAN. They are mapped to the IP address and UDP port number in the UDP/IP
mode. This setting enables transmission of an PW frame that encapsulates an ATM cell (ATM -->
PW conversion) and transmission of an ATM cell decapsulated from an PW frame (PW --> ATM
conversion).
An identical VLAN ID or IP address and UDP port number can be mapped for multiple PVCs.
(PVC=n : VLAN/IP address, UDP port number=1)
Also, an Inner VLAN ID or UDP/IP header can be attached to the generated PW frame.

Commands
set atmop format Setting of ATMoP format

Memo This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.
Note This function cannot be set when the PVC has not been registered.
Note To attach an Inner VLAN ID, "c-tag" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode
setting.
Note To attach a UDP/IP header, "udp-ip" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode
setting.
Note The PVC used for path connection between ATMs and for the ATM cell concatenation
function cannot be specified in this function.
Note If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, the communication is not
established unless the control word is added also to the frames from the other device.

ATM Functions
2-136
Clearing ATMoP format setting
Clears ATMoP format setting.

Commands
clear atmop format Clearing of ATMoP format setting

Setting example (2-hop VLAN tag mode)

* If the control word addition is selected in the
ATMoP mode, it is added in Payload.
VLANVLAN
10
PVC
0/32
Port 1
10
/
VLA
N
VLAN
200
Port 25
CX2200
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
MAC address
00:30:13:a1:2a:a
a

VLAN(Tag2)
300
MAC address
00:00:00:00:00:01

VLAN(Tag2)
300
Packet Network
BTS
VLAN
200
PW frame
DA SA Tag1
200
Payload
(ATM cell)
Type Tag2
300
ATM Functions
2-137
Setting procedure to implement an ATMoP like as the above figure is shown below.
- Set GbE port to tagbase (VID=200).
- Set PVC (0/32) to ATMP port (1).
- Set ATMP mode to 2-hop VLAN tag.
- Map PVC (0/32) to VLAN (VID=300).

*Switch# set pvc static 1 0/32
*Switch# set atmop mode c-tag
*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 inner 300
*Switch# show atmop format
ATMoP Table
===========
Source Packet Source Control
MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word
------------------------------------------------------------------
00:30:13:a1:2a:aa c-tag --- --- disabled

ATMoP L2-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner
Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID
-------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 200 300

=====================
VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination
Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL
----------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 --- --- --- ---

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-138
Setting example (UDP/IP mode)

* When the UDP mode is source, 5000 is set for the source UDP port number and 2142 is set for
the destination UDP port number.
* When the UDP mode is destination, 2142 is set for the source UDP port number and 5000 is
set for the destination UDP port number.
* If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, it is added in Payload.
PVC
0/32
Port 1
VLAN
200
Port 25
CX2200
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
MAC address

00:30:13:01:01:01

IP address

192.168.20.1

UDP port number

5000
Packet
Network
BTS
VLAN
200
MAC address

00:30:13:a1:2a:aa

IP address

192.168.10.1

UDP port number

5000
DA SA Tag1
200
Payload
(ATM cell)
Type
IP header
Destination IP 192.168.10.1
Source IP 192.168.20.1
PW frame (reception)
UDP header
UDP port number 5000
DA SA Tag1
200
Payload
(ATM cell)
Type
IP header
Source IP 192.168.10.1
Ether frame (transmission)
UDP header
PW frame
DA SA Tag1
200
Payload
(ATM cell)
Type
IP header
Source IP 192.168.10.1
PW frame (transmission)
UDP header
ATM Functions
2-139
Setting procedure to implement an ATMoP like as the above figure is shown below.
- Set ATMP mode to UDP/IP.
- Map PVC (0/32) to the IP address (192.168.20.1) and UDP port number (5000).

*Switch# set atmop mode udp-ip 192.168.10.1
*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 192.168.20.1 5000
*Switch# show atmop format
ATMoP Table
===========
Source Packet Source Control
MAC Address Format IP Address Port Mode Word
------------------------------------------------------------------
00:30:13:a1:2a:aa udp-ip 192.168.10.1 source disabled

=====================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination Outer Inner
Port (ATM) (ATMoP) MAC Address VID VID
-------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 --- 00:30:13:01:01:01 200 ---

=====================
VPI/VCI Source Destination Destination
Port (ATM) UDP Port IP address UDP Port TTL
----------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 5000 192.168.20.1 2142 128

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-140
Setting ATM cell concatenation

This function concatenates ATM cells when an ATM cell is encapsulated in a PW frame.
You can remove unnecessary overheads by concatenating ATM cells of multiple PVCs and
encapsulating them with an 1PW header added.
Also, you can decapsulate PW encapsulated frames including concatenated ATM cells.

Commands
set atmop format concatenation Setting of ATM cell concatenation group
set atmop format concatenation member Setting of ATM cell concatenation member
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation information

The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation member" command.
Note To attach an Inner VLAN ID, "c-tag" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode
setting.
The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation" command.
[ATM port] CX2200 [GbE port]
PVC=0/32 port1
PVC=0/33 port2
PVC=0/34 port3 port25
VID=100
Cell concatenation
Group1
ATM Functions
2-141
Note To attach a UDP/IP header, "udp-ip" must have been specified for the ATMoP mode
setting.
The above is applicable to the "set atmop format concatenation" command.
Note The PVC used for the ATMoP format and path connection between ATM (within the same
port only) cannot be specified in this function.
Note If the control word addition is selected in the ATMoP mode, the communication is not
established unless the control word is added also to the frames from the other device.

* Note on the setting of the ATM cell concatenation timeout value
An appropriate timeout value is required to be set according to the use environment (such as
card type, the number of concatenated cells, or acceptable delay time) of this function.
The time that the number of concatenated cells remains varies depending on the line speed.
For your reference to decide the timeout value, the time can be roughly estimated as shown
below at the full rate speed.
155M: 53byte 8bit / 155.520Mbps n (the number of concatenated cells) 2.7 n (the
number of concatenated cells) sec
E1: 53byte 8bit / 2.048Mbps n (the number of concatenated cells) 207 n (the
T1: 53byte 8bit / 1.544Mbps n (the number of concatenated cells) 274.6 n (the
The time twice as much as the one that the 16 cells remain at 155 M is referred to for the setting
granularity and the minimum setting value 100 sec.

ATM Functions
2-142
Clearing ATM cell concatenation setting
Clears ATM cell concatenation setting.

Commands
clear atmop format concatenation Clearing of ATM cell concatenation group
clear atmop format concatenation member Clearing of ATM cell concatenation member
show atmop format concatenation Display of ATM cell concatenation information

Setting example
The following example shows how to set the ATM cell concatenation function.

When the ATMoP mode is "c-tag"
- Set PVC to ATMP port.
- Set ATMP mode to 2-hop VLAN tag.
- Set ATM cell concatenation group (Group number=1).
- Set ATM cell concatenation member.

ATM Functions
2-143

*Switch#set port mode atmop 1-3
*Switch#set vlan tagbase 25 100
*Switch#set pvc static 1 0/32
*Switch#set atmop mode c-tag
*Switch#set atmop format concatenation 1 16 2000 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 100
inner 3000
*Switch#set atmop format concatenation member 1 1 0/32
*Switch#
*Switch# show atmop format concatenation
ATMoP Concatenation table
=========================
Number
Group of Cells TimeOut
------------------------
1 16 2000

Concatenation L2-Header Table
=============================
Destination Outer Outer Inner Inner
Group MAC Address VID VID COS VID VID COS
--------------------------------------------------------
1 00:30:13:01:01:01 100 5 3000 5

=============================

Concatenation Member Table
==========================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI
Group Port (ATM) (ATMoP)
-----------------------------
1 1 0/32 ---
2 0/33 ---
3 0/34 ---

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-144
When the ATMoP mode is "udp-ip"
- Set PVC to ATMP port.
- Set ATMoP mode to UDP/IP.
- Set ATM cell concatenation group (Group number=1).
- Set ATM cell concatenation member.

ATM Functions
2-145

*Switch#set port mode atmop 1-3
*Switch#set vlan tagbase 25 100
*Switch# set atmop mode udp-ip 192.168.2.1
*Switch# set atmop format concatenation 1 16 2000 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 100
192.168.2.10 5001
*Switch#
*Switch# show atmop format concatenation
ATMoP Concatenation table
=========================
Number
Group of Cells TimeOut
------------------------
1 16 2000

=============================
Destination Outer Outer Inner Inner
Group MAC Address VID VID COS VID VID COS
--------------------------------------------------------
1 00:30:13:01:01:01 100 5 --- ---

=============================
Source Destination Destination
Group UDP Port IP Address UDP Port TTL DSCP
--------------------------------------------------------
1 5001 192.168.2.10 1024 128 46

Concatenation Member Table
==========================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI
Group Port (ATM) (ATMoP)
-----------------------------
1 1 0/32 ---
2 0/33 ---
3 0/34 ---

*Switch#
ATM Functions
2-146
Setting CLP-PW Priority mapping
In the case of CX2200, a CoS value is set to the VLAN tag and a DSCP value is set to the IP
header basing on the CLP value of ATM cell when converting an ATM cell into an Ether frame.
When the hop count of VLAN tag is 2, CoS must be set for each tag. When a UDP/IP header is
added, a DSCP value is set.
Examples of CoS value setting for VLAN tag and DSCP value setting for IP header based on CLP
when converting an ATM cell flowed from PVC 0/32 into an Ether frame are shown in the next
figure.

ATM cell
CLP = 0
ATM cell
CLP = 1
CX2200
CX2200
PVC
0/32
PVC
0/32
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 7
Inner tag CoS = 5
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 2
Inner tag CoS = 0
When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 0
CLP
value
Inner tag
CoS value
Outer tag
CoS value
0 5 7
1 0 2
CLP-CoS conversion map
IP header
DSCP value
46
60
ATM cell
CLP = 0
ATM cell
CLP = 1
CX2200
CX2200
PVC
0/32
PVC
0/32
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 7
IP header
DSCP = 46
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 2
IP header
DSCP = 60
ATM Functions
2-147
Memo The Outer tag CoS value and Inner tag CoS value when CLP=0/CLP=1 is defaulted to 5.
The IP header DSCP value when CLP=0/CLP=1 is defaulted to 46.
Note When the portbase VLAN has been set for the Ether port, the Outer tag will not be
transmitted to the network.

Commands
set atmop in-port priority Setting of CLP-PW Priority mapping
show atmop in-port priority Display of CLP-PW Priority mapping setting status

Input example
Set CLP-PW Priority mapping.

*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/32 clp0 outer 4 inner 5 dscp 40 clp1 outer
2 inner 0 dscp 50
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/33 clp0 inner 1 clp1 outer 3 dscp 20
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/34 clp0 outer 6 inner 4 clp1 dscp 40
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/35 clp1 inner 3
*Switch# set atmop in-port priority 1 0/36 initial
*Switch# show atmop in-port priority 1
ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table
======================================
CLP=0 CLP=1
Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 4 5 40 2 0 50
1 0/33 5 1 46 3 5 20
1 0/34 6 4 46 5 5 40
1 0/35 5 5 46 5 3 46
1 0/36 5 5 46 5 5 46

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-148
Setting CLP
In the case of CX2200, the following conversion methods can be specified for each PVC to convert
an Ether frame into an ATM cell.

1. Non-update mode (transparent-mode)
This mode converts frames without updating CLP value.
2. Mode which updates fixed setting value (fix-mode)
This mode rewrites a CLP value to a fixed value which is 0 or 1.
3. Mode which updates setting value per CoS/DSCP (priority-mode)
This mode decides a CLP value based on the CoS or DSCP in the Ether frame.

Memo When the ATMoP mode is 2-hop VLAN tag mode, it is decided based on CoS.
Memo When the ATMoP mode is UDP-IP mode, it is decided based on DSCP.

The following example shows the CLP setting in an ATM cell transferred to PVC 0/32 and 0/33 in
the priority-mode.

Commands
set atmop out-port clp mode Setting of CLP conversion mode
set atmop out-port clp priority Setting of CLP conversion priority
show atmop out-port clp Display of CLP conversion setting status

CX2200
Ether frame
CoS = 0
ATM cell
CLP = 1
PVC
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
CLP Setting (CLP=1)
0/32
1, 2, 0/33
0/32
Ether frame
CoS = 3
ATM cell
CLP = 0
0/33
ATM Functions
2-149
Memo Setting of the CLP conversion mode will be automatically cleared when the PVC is
cleared.

Input example
Set CLP.

*Switch# set atmop out-port clp priority c-tag 7 1
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp priority udp-ip 0-62 1
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 1 1/33 transparent
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 2 0/32 fix 1
*Switch# set atmop out-port clp mode 11 100/255 priority

*Switch# show atmop out-port clp
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)
=================================================
CLP CoS
----------------
0 0-6
1 7

Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
==================================================
CLP DSCP
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 63
1 0-62

Output CLP Conversion Table
===========================
Port VPI/VCI Mode CLP
-------------------------------
1 1/33 transparent ---
2 0/32 fix 1
11 100/255 priority ---

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-150
2.4.1.3 ATM cell relay

Setting path between ATMs
Path setting between ATMs is a function to relay ATM cells. This function sets a connection to a
PVC between 2 ATMP ports.
Since this function is used with the ATMoP function, VLAN IDs or IP address and UDP port
number must be set. (The values are arbitrary.)

Commands
set pvc connection Setting of path between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

Note An Inner VLAN ID must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "c-tag".
An UDP port number must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "udp-ip".
Note The PVC used for the ATMoP format and for the ATM cell concatenation function cannot
be specified in this function.

ATM cell
ATM cell
ATM Network
ATM Network
Registers PVCs.
ATM Functions
2-151
Clearing path setting between ATMs
Clears path setting between ATMs.

Commands
clear pvc connection Clearing path setting between ATMs
show pvc connection Display of path information between ATMs

Setting example

VLANVLAN 10
10
PVC
0/32
Port 1
10/
VLAN
PVC
1/40
Port 8
CX2200
ATM Network
ATM cell
ATM Network
ATM Functions
2-152
Setting procedure to implement a path between ATMs like as the above figure is shown below.
- Set a connection between PVC (0/32) and PVC (1/40).

*Switch# set pvc connection 1 0/32 outer 2 inner 200 8 1/40 outer 3 inner 300
*Switch# show pvc connection
ATMoP Connection Table
======================
Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID Port VPI/VCI Outer-VID Inner-VID
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 2 200 8 1/40 3 300

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-153
Set the Strict Priority mapping.
Set the ATM shaper.
Clear the ATM shaper.
2.4.2 ATM Shaper Function
The ATM shaper function controls the ATM cell rate according to the set bandwidth value. ATM
cells that exceed the bandwidth are discarded according to the class priority of the Strict Priority
mapping function.

Setting Strict Priority mapping 2-154

Setting ATM shaper 2-156

Clearing ATM shaper 2-157

Strict Priority mapping function
The Strict Priority mapping function sorts ATM cells according to the priority value in the PW
header of Ether frames. Sorted ATM cells are transmitted in the order of priority from the highest.
There are four class priorities, which are the class A (highest) to class D (lowest).
The setting is specified all at once per unit.

Ether frame
Class-D
Class-C
Class-B
Class-A
<Ether to ATM line>
Strict
Priority
Shaper
ATM cell
Sort according to the Priority value per PW header
(1) ATMoEther: CoS (3bit) value in C-Tag (inner r tag)
(2) ATMoUDP/IP: DSCP (6bit) value in IP header
* Behavior image per port
FCS PW
header
ATM
cell
FCS PW
header
ATM
cell
(High)
(Low)
ATM Functions
2-154
Setting Strict Priority mapping
This function maps the priority value in the PW header to four classes. A priority value is set for
each class (A to D).
In the case of ATM over Ethernet, the CoS (3bit) value is set, and in the case of ATM over UDP/IP,
the DSCP (6bit) value is set for the priority value.

Commands
set atmop out-port strict-priority Setting of Strict Priority mapping
show atmop out-port strict-priority Display of Strict Priority mapping

Memo A CoS value (c-tag) and DSCP value (udp-ip) can be set separately, however they are
sorted according to the priority value corresponding to the packet format of the ATMoP
mode (c-tag/ udp-ip).

Mapping initial value list
Priority value
Class
CoS value (c-tag) DSCP value (udp-ip)
A 6, 7 48 - 63
B 4, 5 32 - 47
C 0, 3 16 - 31
D 1, 2 0 - 15

ATM Functions
2-155
Input example
Map the CoS value to each class when the packet format is c-tag.
Map the DSCP value to each class when the packet format is udp-ip.

*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority c-tag class-a 0-3 class-b 4-7
*Switch# set atmop out-port strict-priority udp-ip class-a 0,1 class-d 2-63
*Switch# show atmop out-port strict-priority
Output Strict Priority Mapping Table(c-tag)
===========================================
Class CoS
--------------------
class-a 0-3
class-b 4-7
class-c none
class-d none

Output Strict Priority Mapping Table(udp-ip)
============================================
Class DSCP
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
class-a 0-1
class-b none
class-c none
class-d 2-63

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-156
Setting ATM shaper
This function sets a bandwidth value of ATM cell rate for an ATM port. The value can be set per
port.

Commands
set atm-shaper rate Setting of ATM shaper
show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

Note When the line card type is 16T1E1H, the value can be set only when the port mode is
atmop.
Note The value can be set per root port for an IMA group.
Note IMA group cannot be set or cleared for a port to which the ATM shaper is set.
To set or clear an IMA group, clear the ATM shaper setting.
Note The range of the settable bandwidth value differs depending on the following conditions.
- Line card type (1ATM155A/16T1E1H)
- Frame type (e1/t1)
- Frame format (crc4/crc4nocas/non-crc4/unframed)
- Number of ports which belong to IMA group
- IMA frame size (32/64/128/256)
* For the range of settable bandwidth value, refer to "10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth
Value List" in Appendix.
Note Actual rate has a margin of error of 2% at the maximum compared to the setting value.

ATM Functions
2-157
Clearing ATM shaper
This function clears a bandwidth value setting of ATM shaper.

Commands
clear atm-shaper rate Clearing of ATM shaper
show atm-shaper rate Display of ATM shaper

Input example
Set the shaper bandwidth value (128) to an ATMP port (1).

*Switch# set atm-shaper rate 1 128
*Switch# show atm-shaper rate
ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)
======================
Port Rate
------------
1 128
2 ---
3 ---
4 ---
5 ---
6 64
7 ---
8 ---
9 ---
10 2048
11 ---
12 ---
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---
16 ---

*Switch#
ATM Functions
2-158
Set the OAM alarm monitoring.
Set the ATM OAM alarm transfer.
Set the ATM OAM flow point.
Display the ATM OAM setting.
Display the ATM OAM status.
2.4.3 ATM-OAM Setting

Setting OAM 2-158

Setting ATM OAM alarm transfer 2-159

Setting ATM OAM flow point 2-160

Displaying ATM OAM setting 2-161

Displaying ATM OAM status 2-162

Setting OAM
Enables or disables OAM alarm monitoring individually for the VP (F4) and VC (F5) levels with
respect to registered path connections.
At the time of path connection registration, the OAM function is enabled by default.
If an IMA group has been set, the port number which is used for setting/display/notification will be
the root port number.
For information about alarm transfer, see "2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism".

ATM Functions
2-159
Setting ATM OAM alarm transfer
To enable or disable ATM OAM alarm monitoring for the VP (f4) or VC (f5) level, use the "set
atm-oam" command. When enabled, alarms are monitored and transferred as shown in the alarm
transfer diagram. When disabled, alarm monitoring is not performed. For the VP level, an
advance setting is available that allows you to specify whether to transfer the VC-AIS or VC-RDI to
all the PVCs belonging to the corresponding VP when VP-AIS is received. In the "set atm-oam"
command parameters, specify the level [VP (f4)/VC (f5)], PVC identifier (port number VPI or
VPI/VCI PVC name), ATM OAM alarm transfer setting (enable/disable), and advanced setting
(f5-generate).

Memo The advanced setting can be entered only when VP (f4) is specified for the level.

Command
set atm-oam Setting of ATM-OAM operation

Memo The default value is enable.

ATM Functions
2-160
Setting ATM OAM flow point
To set whether an ATM OAM cell in VP (f4)/VC (f5) level is to be terminated by the device or
transparent, use the "set atm-oam flow" command. End-to-End flow and Segment flow can be set
individually. When End point is specified, ATM OAM cells are terminated by the device. When
Connecting point is specified, ATM OAM cells are made transparent. When nothing is specified,
no operation is executed when receiving ATM OAM cells. In the parameters of the "set atm-oam
flow" command, specify the level [VP (f4)/VC (f5)], PVC identifier (port number VPI or "VPI/VCI"/
PVC name), flow type [End-to-End flow (end-end)/Segment flow (segment)] and flow point type
[End point (end-point) /Connecting point (connecting-point) /nothing (none)].
Whether the flow point setting is enabled or disabled in ATM OAM is shown below.

F4 F5
End-End flow Segment flow End-End flow Segment flow Connection
EP CP Non EP CP Non EP CP Non EP CP Non
VC connection D N N S N D N D N S S D
VP connection N D N S S D N N D N N D

D: Default setting at VP/VC connection registration
S: Selective setting enabled
N: Selective setting is disabled

Command
set atm-oam flow Setting of ATM-OAM flow point

Note This function can be set only for the following line cards.
- 32T1E1H line card (port mode: ATMoP)
- 1ATM155A line card

ATM Functions
2-161
Displaying ATM OAM setting
To display the ATM OAM setting, use the "show atm-oam config" command. In the "show
atm-oam config" command parameter, specify a PVC identifier (if omitted, all information is
displayed).

Input example
Set the VP (f4) or VC (f5) alarm transfer operation.

Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 0 enable f5-generate
*Switch# set atm-oam f4 1 20 disable
*Switch# set atm-oam f5 1 0/10000 disable
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 1 0 segment end-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f4 1 1 segment connecting-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 1 0/100 segment end-point
*Switch# set atm-oam flow f5 1 0/1000 segment connecting-point
*Switch# show atm-oam config
ATM OAM Configuration Table
===========================
OAM Configuration (F4)
======================
Port VPI Configuration Option Segment End-End
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 enabled f5-generation end-point end-point
1 1 enabled none connecting-point connecting-point
1 20 disabled --- --- ---

OAM Configuration (F5)
======================
Port VPI/VCI Configuration Segment End-End
----------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 enabled none connecting-point
1 0/100 enabled end-point connecting-point
1 0/1000 enabled connecting-point connecting-point
1 0/10000 disabled --- ---

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-162
Displaying ATM OAM status
To display the ATM OAM status, use the "show atm-oam status" command. In the "show
atm-oam status" command parameter, specify a PVC identifier (if omitted, all information is
displayed).

Memo Alarm status for F1/F2/F3 can be displayed by using the "show port information"
command.

Input example
Display the ATM-OAM status.

*Switch# show atm-oam status 1
ATM OAM Status Table
====================
OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect Generate(gen)
------------------------ -----------------------------
Segment End-End Segment End-End
------------ ------------ -------------- --------------
Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI
------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 detect --- --- --- --- gen --- ---
1 1 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---
1 20 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect Generate(gen)
---------------------- --------------------------
Segment End-End Segment End-End
----------- ----------- ------------ --------------
Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI
------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/32 --- --- --- --- --- --- gen ---
1 0/100 --- detect --- --- gen gen gen ---
1 0/1000 --- --- --- --- gen --- gen ---
1 0/10000 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

*Switch#
ATM Functions
2-163
Set the IMA clock mode.
Set the IMA group.
Clear the IMA group.
2.4.4 IMA Function

Setting IMA clock mode 2-165

Setting IMA group 2-166

Clearing IMA group 2-170

IMA function
CX2200 requires the IMA function that conforms to Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)
Specification Version1.1 (af-phy-0086.001).
The IMA function of CX2200 is listed below.

Item Description
Line type T1/E1
IMA version Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version1.1
(af-phy-0086.001)
Number of IMA groups Up to 8 groups
Number of IMA links Per IMA group: Up to 8 links
Minimum number of available links: 1 to 8 link(s)
IMA frame size 32/64/128/256
Clock mode ITC (Independent Transmit Clock) / CTC (Common Transmit Clock)
Symmetry mode Symmetrical Configuration and Operation
Differential delay T1: 25ms to 282ms
E1: 25ms to 226ms
Scramble setting T1: Scramble is disabled
E1: Scramble is enabled

ATM Functions
2-164
The IMA function is a protocol to implement transmission of ATM cell streams in existing links
(such as T1/E1). It positions between the ATM layer and the physical layer as the IMA sub-layer
and controls multiple physical lines by grouping them as one line. Thus the function enables
formation of a logical link in the higher bandwidth. This grouped logical link is called an IMA
group.
A Cell stream received from the ATM layer is output to the physical lines which have been selected
among those within the IMA group, by using the round-robin sequence. Cells received from the
lines are synchronized with those from other lines within the group and restored as a cell stream.
Thus the stream is transmitted to the ATM layer again.

An ATM cell stream
from the ATM Layer
IMA Group
Physical Link #0
Physical Link #1
Physical Link #2
IMA Group
The restored cell stream
to the ATM Layer
Tx direction: Cells are distributed to the lines by using round-robin sequence.
Rx direction: Cells are restored as a cell stream.
IMA virtual link
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
PHY
ATM Functions
2-165
Setting IMA clock mode
Sets the IMA clock mode. CX2200 supports the Common Transmit Clock mode (CTC) and the
Independent Transmit Clock mode (ITC).

CTC
Use the clock distributed from the Tx Clock Unit as the transmission clock for all the lines.

ITC
Use the clock extracted from each of the lines as the transmission clock.

Commands
set ima clock Setting of IMA clock mode
show ima clock Display of IMA clock mode setting information

Memo The default setting is the CTC mode.
Note When the IMA clock mode is changed, the communication is to be interrupted due to the
IMA group restart processing.

Input example
Set ITC mode as the IMA clock mode.

*Switch# set ima clock itc
*Switch# show ima clock
Transmit Clock Mode Information
===============================
Mode : itc

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-166
Setting IMA group
Makes multiple physical lines one logical line. IMA group index (1 to 8), port number (1 to 16),
and IMA ID (0 to 7) are required at registration. Minimum number of required links, IMA frame
size, link differential delay and root port number also can be specified optionally.

IMA group index
This is the number to identify the IMA group in the device. A unique number within the range can
be specified. If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is
modified (overwritten) with the specified information.

IMA ID
This is the number to identify the IMA group/status for the connected links. A unique number
within the range can be specified.

Minimum number of required links
This parameter specifies the Minimum number of links required for communication of the IMA
group. Numbers more than the number of the ports that form the IMA group cannot be specified.
Also, if the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of
required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the IMA group
is stopped. If no number is specified, 1 will be specified as the default.

IMA frame size
This parameter specifies the length of the IMA frame used for IMA protocol control. It can be
specified by selecting either of 32, 64, 128 or 256. If nothing is specified, 128 will be specified as
the default.

Link differential delay
This parameter specifies the maximum delay time to receive the cell transmitted with the
round-robin sequence. The range varies depending on line types: 25 to 282 (msec) for T1 lines
and 25 to 226 for E1 lines. If nothing is specified, 25 (msec) will be specified as the default in
both cases of T1 and E1 lines.

ATM Functions
2-167
Root port number
This is the port number specified as the main line among the lines in the IMA group. If this
number is modified when modifying the IMA groups information, restart processing of the IMA
group (synchronizes and re-connects the device with the associated device) is executed and its
communication is interrupted (communication is not interrupted even if the link of the root port is
down). If no number is specified, the youngest line number among the lines in the group will be
specified.
No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the root port.

Commands
set ima group Setting of IMA group
show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

Memo An identical line cannot be registered to multiple IMA groups redundantly.
Memo Up to 4 IMA groups can be registered within ports 1-8 or ports 9-16.
Memo Port numbers which belong to ports 1-8 and ports 9-16 cannot be registered to an
identical IMA group together.
Memo If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is modified
(overwritten).
Note If the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of
required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the
IMA group is stopped.
Note When specifying the IMA group index which has been registered for modification, if the
rout port number is modified, communication of the IMA group is interrupted due to the
restart processing.
Note No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the root port.
Note The corresponding port is required to be set as atmop in the port mode setting.
Note IMA group cannot be set for the port to which ATM shaper has been set.
Note IMA group cannot be set if the frame type is set to "T1" and the frame format is set to
"Unframed" in the port frame settings.

ATM Functions
2-168
Setting example

PVC
0/32
VLAN
200
Port 25 (GbE)
CX2200
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
MAC address
00:30:13:a1:2a:82

IP address
192.168.2.144
MAC address
00:30:13:01:01:01

IIP address
192.168.2.10

UDP port number
5001
Packet network
VLAN
200
Outer tag CoS = 2
PVC
0/32
IMA group: 10/2, 10/4, 10/6

Root port: 10/2
Port mode: atmop

IMA group: 1-3

Root port: 1
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
ATM Functions
2-169
Setting procedure to implement an IMA configuration like as the above figure is shown below.
Make the port numbers from 1 to 3 an IMA group. Register it as root port number 1.
(In the associated device (CX2600/200), port numbers 2, 4 and 6 of ATMP line card number 10
are assumed to be registered as an IMA group.)

* For the details of IMA group states and IMA link states, refer to "8 IMA State List" in Appendix.

*Switch# set port mode atmop 1-8
*Switch# set ima group 1 1-3 id 1 links 3 delay 123 root 1
*Switch# set atmop format 1 0/32 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 inner 100
*Switch# show ima group config
IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================
Min-Req- Frame- Link-Diff- Root-
Index Ports ID Links Length Delay(ms) Port
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1-3 1 3 128 123 1

*Switch# show ima group status 1
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE) GSM-State(FE) Failure-State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 operational operational no-failure

IMA Link Status Table
=====================
Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 active active active active no-failure

*Switch#

ATM Functions
2-170
Clearing IMA group
Clears an IMA group that has been set.

Commands
clear ima group Clearing of IMA group
show ima group config Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status Display of IMA group status information

Memo Specify the IMA group index which has been registered.
Note IMA group cannot be cleared when ATM shaper has been set for the root port.

Input example
Clear the IMA group whose IMA group index is 1

*Switch# clear ima group 1
*Switch# show ima group config
IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================

*Switch# show ima group status
IMA Group Status Table
======================

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-171
Groups time slots.
Connects between TDM groups via path.
2.5 TDM Functions
2.5.1 TDM Setting
The CX2200 groups time slots on each line for which the TDM mode is set with
32T1E1H/32T1E1T to provide the TDM switching function for intergroup connections. To enable
the TDM switching, configure the TDM group settings to group given time slots, and configure the
TDM path settings for intergroup connections via path.
This section describes setting procedures for the TDM switching.

Setting TDM group 2-172

Setting TDM path 2-176

TDM Functions
2-172
Setting TDM group
Sets a TDM group for the line for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T.
Time slots of each line for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T can be grouped
with a given number. The TDMP group can be set by per time slot basis. Up to 31 time slots
can be set when the frame type is set to E1. Up to 24 time slots can be set when the frame type
is set to T1.
Setting range of time slots for frame type and frame format is as follows:

Frame Type Frame Format Time Slot Setting Range
CRC-4 Multiframe 1 - 15, 17 - 31
CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS 1 - 31
Non-CRC-4 1 - 15, 17 - 31
E1
Unframed 0 - 31
Super Frame (SF)
T1
Extended Super Frame (ESF)
1 - 24

Setting group for time slots
Groups time slots on lines for which the TDM mode is set with 32T1E1H/32T1E1T with a given
number.

Command
set tdm group Setting of TDM group

Memo The group can be set only to time slots within the same line.
Memo A unique number can be set for each line as the group number.
Note TDM mode needs to be specified by the port mode setting.
Note Time slot groups cannot be redundantly specified.
Note Time slots needs to be grouped by a single value or consecutive values.
Note To reconfigure the group setting, delete the setting and reconfigure the setting.

TDM Functions
2-173
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the
port frame setting.

The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the
port frame setting.

*Switch# set port frame t1
*Switch# set port mode tdm 12
*Switch# set tdm group 12 t1 24 1-24
*Switch#

*Switch# set port frame e1 crc4
*Switch# set port mode tdm 1
*Switch# set tdm group 1 e1 2 1-19
*Switch#

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Time slot configuration of 1 line at E1 specification
Group number 2 Group number 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Time slot configuration of 1 line at T1 speci fication
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Group number 24
TDM Functions
2-174
Clearing group setting for time slots
Clears a group setting of time slots of lines for which the TDM mode is set with
32T1E1H/32T1E1T. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or
line basis.

Command
clear tdm group Clearing of TDM group

Memo When the command is entered for each line, the execution is confirmed and then the
setting is cleared.
Note The group setting that the TDM path is set cannot be cleared.

TDM Functions
2-175
Displaying group setting for time slots
Shows the group setting of time slots of lines for which the TDM mode is set with
32T1E1H/32T1E1T. The setting can be displayed by the single or multiple group specification
within a line, per line basis, or per device basis.

Command
show tdm group Display of TDM group setting information

Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDM group settings per device basis.

*Switch# set tdm group 12 e1 32 1
*Switch# show tdm group
TDM Group Registration Table
============================
Port Group Time Slot Type
----------------------------
1 1 20-31 e1
1 2 1-19 e1
12 32 1 e1

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-176
Setting TDM path
Sets a path for grouped time slots to enable connections.
Setting procedures to realize the path setting are explained below.
(1) Set two groups for a path to be connected.
(2) Perform the path setting for the group setting.

Input example
The following example shows how to set the path between the group1 of the port number1 and the
group2 of the line number 3 when E1 is specified as the frame type and CRC-4 Multiframe is
specified as the frame format in the port frame setting.

Memo A path can be set to the group settings with the same number of time slots.
Memo The path is always set bidirectionally.

*Switch# set port mode tdm 1,3
*Switch# set tdm path 1 1 3 2
*Switch#

Path connection
TS0 - - - TS29 TS30 TS31
From TS29 to TS30 is set
as Group 2
Port number 3
CX2200
TS0
(*)
- - - TS29 TS30 TS31
From TS30 to TS31 is
set as Group 1
Port number 1
* TS = Time slot
TDM Functions
2-177
Setting path
Sets a path by using group.

Command
set tdm path Setting of TDM path

Memo A path can be set to groups if the time slot number of the groups to be set is not the same.
Note A path cannot be set between groups within the same line.

Clearing path setting
Clears a path setting. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number
or per line basis.

Command
clear tdm path Clearing of TDM path

Memo To clear a path, specify either the port number or the group number that was used to set
the path. (The path setting will be deleted by specifying either side of the port number or
group number.)
Memo When the command is entered per line basis, the execution is confirmed and then the
setting is cleared.

TDM Functions
2-178
Displaying path setting
Shows a path setting. The setting can be displayed by the single group specification, multiple
group specification, per line basis, or per device basis.

Command
show tdm path Display of TDM path setting information

Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDM path settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdm path
TDM Path Connection Table
=========================
Port Group Time Slot Port Group Time Slot Type
----------------------------------------------------
1 1 1-31 2 1 1-31 e1
3 1 1-31 4 23 1-31 e1
5 2 2-6 6 6 12-16 e1

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-179
Sets the TDMP mode.
Sets the port mode to TDMoP.
Sets the port frame.
Groups time slots.
Sets a variation tolerance.
Extracts an adaptive clock from the TDMoP path.
Connects between TDM and Ether via path.
Resets a CESoP device.
2.5.2 TDMoP Setting
The CX2200 groups time slots on each port for which the TDM mode is set with a 32T1E1H line
card/32T1E1T line card to provide the TDMoP function for encapsulating or decapsulating TDM in
Ether.
To use the TDMoP function, configure the TDMoP operation mode, the TDMoP mode setting to
select a packet format, and the port mode setting of a port in which the TDMoP function is used.
Then, configure the TDMoP group settings to group time slots and the TDMoP path settings to
connect TDM and Ether via path (format or connection settings).
(Set a TDMoP variation tolerance and an adaptive clock as needed before setting the TDMoP
path.)
If a CESoP device failure has occurred, reset the CESoP device.
This section describes setting procedures for the TDMoP function.

Setting TDMoP mode 2-180

Setting the port mode 2-19

Setting the port frame 2-22

Setting TDMoP group 2-182

Setting TDMoP variation tolerance 2-187

Setting adaptive clock 2-189

Setting TDMoP path 2-195

Resetting CESoP device 2-207

TDM Functions
2-180
Setting TDMoP mode
The TDMoP mode setting selects an operation mode when TDM is encapsulated in Ether and a
packet format after the encapsulation.
SAToP or CESoPSN can be selected as the operation mode. TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) or TDM
over UDP/IP can be selected as the packet format.

Setting TDMoP mode
Sets TDMoP mode for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card.

Command
set tdmop mode Setting of TDMoP mode

Memo This setting cannot be performed when any TDMoP group is already set.
Memo For 32T1E1T line card, you cannot set TDMover UDP/IP for the packet format.

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and
the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop mef
*Switch# set port mode tdmop 1
*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 1 all
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-181
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN
and the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and
the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.

The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN
and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.

*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-dst 7 rtp_off static
*Switch# set tdmop group 1 t1 1 1-10
*Switch#
*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.1 udp-src rtp_on
*Switch#
*Switch# set tdmop mode cesopsn mef
*Switch# set tdmop group 1 t1 1 1-10
*Switch#
TDM Functions
2-182
Setting TDMoP group
Sets TDMoP group for the ports for which the TDMoP mode is set with the 32T1E1H line
card/32T1E1T line card.

Setting group
Groups time slots of the ports for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card.

Command
set tdmop group Setting of TDMoP group

Memo Only when the TDMoP mode is CESoPSN mode, any time slot number can be set.
Memo A TDMoP group can be set only to the port for the 32T1E1H line card/32T1E1T line card
to which the TDMoP mode is set.
Memo A unique number can be set for each port as the TDMoP group number.
Memo A TDMoP group cannot be set over ports.
Note When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the
frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP
format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault may occur.
When performing the TDMoP group setting for the TDMoP format setting, be sure to
confirm in advance that the frame type setting and number of time slots of the TDMoP
group to be specified agree with the number of time slots and the frame type setting of the
associated device by using the "set tdmop information" command.
Note If the above device fault occurs, delete the TDMoP path setting and TDMoP group setting.
Then, reset the CESoP device (refer to the "reset cesop-device" command) and
reconfigure the TDMoP group appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.

TDM Functions
2-183
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the
port frame setting.
(Time slots 1 to 15 are set as group number 1 in the CESoPSN mode and TDM over Ethernet
(MEF8) format.)

The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the
port frame setting.
(All time slots are set as group number 1 in the SAToP mode and TDM over UDP/IP format.)

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.2
*Switch# set port frame t1 ami esf
*Switch# set tdmop group 3 t1 1 all
*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop group 1 e1 32 1-15
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-184
Clearing group setting
Clears a group setting of ports for which the TDM mode is set with the 32T1E1H line
card/32T1E1T line card. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group
number or per port basis.

Command
clear tdmop group Clearing of TDMoP group

Memo A group to which a TDMoP path setting (format or connection setting) is performed cannot
be cleared.
Memo When executing the command with a single group number specification, a group number
to which a TDMoP group is not set cannot be specified.
Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been disabled and an adaptive
clock with reference clock priority setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.
Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been enabled and an adaptive
clock with reference clock group setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.
Memo If a group to which an adaptive clock is set is cleared, the adaptive clock setting is also
cleared.
Memo If a group to which variation tolerance is set is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back
to the default value.
Memo When a port number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is
cleared.

TDM Functions
2-185
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input
by specifying a single group number.

The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input
per port basis.

*Switch# clear tdmop group 12
Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch# clear tdmop group 1 e1 1
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-186
Displaying group setting
Shows a group setting of each port for the 32T1E1H card/32T1E1T line card. The setting can be
displayed by the single group specification within a port, multiple group specification, per port
basis, or per device basis.

Command
show tdmop information Display of TDMoP group setting information

Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP group settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop information
TDMoP Group Count
=================
Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
-------------------------------------------
3 1 4 108

TDMoP Group Table
=================
Port Group Time Slot Type
----------------------------
1 1 all e1
2 2 all e1
3 3 all e1
4 4 all e1

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-187
Setting TDMoP variation tolerance
There is a buffer (jitter buffer) for packets received from the Ether side. For TDM-Ether function
settings, the size of this buffer (TDMoP variation tolerance) needs to be adjusted according to the
network configuration.

Setting variation tolerance
Sets variation tolerance (jitter buffer size) for TDM-Ether decapsulation.

Command
set tdmop jitter Setting of variation tolerance

Memo Only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.
Memo Variation tolerance cannot be set to a group number to which a TDMoP path is set.
Memo If a TDMoP group is deleted, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value (4ms).
Memo Only 2ms/4ms/8ms can be set as the variation tolerance if the dynamic mode is set as the
jitter buffer method in the setting of TDMoP mode.
Memo The range available for the setting of variation tolerance varies depending on the number
of frames set in the setting of TDMoP mode. The following table shows the correlations.

Variation
tolerance
Available number of frames
32ms 2,3,4,5,6,7 and 8
64ms 4,5,6,7 and 8
128ms 8

TDM Functions
2-188
Input example
The following sequence example shows how to set a variation tolerance.
(When a TDMoP format is set, the variation tolerance is set to 64ms.)

Displaying variation tolerance setting
Shows TDMoP variation tolerance which has been already set. The setting can be displayed by
the single group specification within a line, multiple group specification, per line basis, or per device
basis.

Command
show tdmop jitter Display of variation tolerance

Input example
The following example shows how to display the settings per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop jitter
TDMoP Jitter Configuration
==========================
Port Group Jitter
-------------------
1 1 2ms
12 12 32ms

*Switch#
*Switch# set port cable-length 8-12 short 399ft
*Switch# set tdmop jitter 12 5 64ms
*Switch#
TDM Functions
2-189
Setting adaptive clock

Setting adaptive clock
As a source clock that will be subject to application to the reference clock, the adaptive clock
extraction from any TDMoP group in the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards and the adaptive
clock extraction from the adaptive clock format setting in the case of 1ATM155A line cards can be
specified.

Command
set adaptive-clock Setting of adaptive clock
set adaptive-clock-mode Setting of adaptive clock mode (for 1ATM155A line card)
set adaptive-clock-format Setting of adaptive clock format (for 1ATM155A line card)

CESoP devices have the following statistics algorithms to synchronize the adaptive clock. The
optimal algorithm depends on the network configuration; you can select the operation algorithm
with an adaptive clock setting command (the set adaptive clock command).
(1) standard mode
An algorithm to decide the optimal packect by processing the statistics in the early stage,
and generates the clock based on the packet. This algorithm generates accurate clocks,
but is vulnerable to packet jitter.
(2) re-sync mode
An algorithm to decide the optimal packet by processing the statistics periodically, and
generates the clock based on the packet. This algorithm generates less accurate clock
than the standard mode does, but is not vulnerable to packet jitter.
(3) averaging mode
An algorithm to generate the clock based on the averaged packet. This mode generates
less accurate clock than the standard mode or re-sync mode does.
Use this mode when the adaptive clock cannot be synchronized in the environment where
other algorithm is used and the accuracy of the master clock is low.

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, only a group number to which a TDMoP
group is set can be specified.
Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, the adaptive clock cannot be set to a group
number to which a TDMoP path is set.
Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, if a TDMoP group is deleted, the adaptive
clock setting is also deleted.
TDM Functions
2-190
Memo In the case of 1ATM155A line cards, the adaptive clock cannot be set to a card to which
an adaptive clock format is set, excepting in the TDMoP blocked state.
Memo When 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards are used, the adaptive clock allows up to three
systems within the system.
Memo When 1ATM155A line cards are used, the adaptive clock allows only one system within
the system.
Memo If any adaptive clock is not set by the command, the adaptive clock cannot be specified for
the reference clock priority setting.
Note If a line extraction clock is selected for reference clock, a line warning may be detected on
the associated device on the TDMoP path extracting an adaptive clock.

TDM Functions
2-191
Input example
The following sequence example shows how to set an adaptive clock.
An adaptive clock is extracted from a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card (when the packet format is TDM
over Ethernet (MEF8)).
(An adaptive clock is extracted from the TDMoP group (group number 5) which is set to port 12 of
the 32T1E1/32T1E1T line card.)

An adaptive clock is extracted from a 1ATM155A line card (when the packet format is TDM over
UDP/IP and RTP header ON).

*Switch# set adaptive-clock-mode line1 udp-ip 100.100.100.3 udp-dst rtp_on
*Switch# set adaptive-clock line1 middle
*Switch# set adaptive-clock-format line1 00:30:13:71:84:7e 1000 100.100.100.5 65530
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch# set adaptive-clock 12 5 wide averaging
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-192
Clearing adaptive clock setting
Clears an adaptive clock mapped to the TDMoP group in the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards
and clears an adaptive clock format setting in the case of 1ATM155A line cards.

Command
clear adaptive-clock Clearing of adaptive clock
clear adaptive-clock-format Clearing of adaptive clock format setting (for 1ATM155A line
card)

Memo In the case of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line cards, the group to which a TDMoP path is set
cannot be cleared. However, an adaptive clock can be set in the TDMoP blocked state.
Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been disabled and an adaptive
clock with reference clock priority setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.
Memo If a group for which the port-independent clock mode has been enabled and an adaptive
clock with reference clock group setting has been set is specified, an error occurs.

Input examples
The following example shows how to clear an adaptive clock setting (in the case of a
32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card).

The following example shows how to clear an adaptive clock setting (in the case of a 1ATM155A
line card).

*Switch# clear adaptive-clock-format
*Switch#

*Switch# clear adaptive-clock
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-193
Displaying adaptive clock setting
Shows an adaptive clock setting that has already been set.

Command
show adaptive-clock Display of adaptive clock setting

Input example
The following example shows how to display the adaptive clock settings (1/2).
In the case of a 1ATM155A line card in the TDM over UDP/IP mode.

(To be continued to 2/2)

*Switch# show adaptive-clock
Adaptive-Clock Mode Configuration Table
=======================================
Frame TDMoP Packet Filter Frame RTP Jitter
Module Type Mode Format Mode Count Header Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 satop udp-ip udp-src 1 off static

Adaptive-Clock Format L2 Configuration Table
============================================
Source Destination
Module MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID Jitter
----------------------------------------------------------------------
line1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 --- 128ms

Adaptive-Clock Format L3 Configuration Table
============================================
Source Source Destination Destination
Module UDP Port IP address IP address UDP Port TTL DSCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------
line1 65535 192.168.100.100 192.168.100.200 2142 255 63

TDM Functions
2-194
The following example shows how to display the adaptive clock settings (2/2).

(Continued from 1/2)
Adaptive-Clock Table(Line)
==========================
Module Network Type Algorithm Status
---------------------------------------
line1 middle averaging acquiring

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-195
Setting TDMoP path

Setting path
Connects a path between TDM and Ether by setting a path on grouped time slot basis.
Commands
set tdmop format Setting of TDMoP path (format setting: to another device)
set tdmop connection Setting of TDMoP path (connection setting: loopback within self
line card)

Memo When a path which loops back at the self line card (connection setting) is set, two groups
needs to be set within the same device.
Memo The ECIDs to be set to each group to which a path which loops back at the self line card
is set need to be set separately.
Memo Do not directly connect ports in that a path which loops back at the self line card is set
with a cross cable.
Memo The TDMoP group to which a TDMoP path has already been set cannot be selected.
Memo The same ECIDs or UDP port numbers need to be set to TDMoP groups to be connected
in the TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) format.
However, the same value cannot be specified redundantly for ECIDs or UDP port
numbers within the self line card.
Note When communicating with the associated device via TDMoP path, confirm that settings of
frame type and time slot number are same as the associated device before the
communication.
Note When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the
frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP
format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault may occur.
Note If the above device fault occurs, delete the TDMoP path setting and TDMoP group setting.
Then, reset the CESoP device (refer to the "reset cesop-device" command) and
reconfigure the TDMoP group appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.

TDM Functions
2-196
Input examples
The following example shows a sequence of the setting of a path to another device. (Destination
MAC address = 00:02:03:04:05:06, VLAN name = CX2200_VLAN_0100, destination IP address =
200.200.200.10, source UDP port number = 49152, TTL = 255, DSCP=5)

* The destination UDP port number is set to the fixed value (2142) because the flow identification
mode is set to "udp-src".
If the flow identification mode is set to "udp-dst", the source UDP port number is set to the fixed
value (2142).

Pat h conn ection
Dest ination device
CX2200
32T1E1H port #12
MAC address 00:02:03:04:05: 06
IP addr ess 200.200.200.10

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 100.100.100.10 udp-src
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch# set adaptive-clock 12 5 wide
*Switch#
*Switch# set tdmop format 12 5 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 7 200.200.200.10
udp 49152 ttl 255 dscp 5
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-197
The following example shows a sequence of the setting of a group which loops back at the self line
card (connection setting). (Port2 (ECID=1048575) and 4 (ECID=1048574) are connected with
CX2200_VLAN_100 in SAToP/TDM over Ethernet (MEF8)).

*Switch# set tdmop connection 2 1 1048575 4 1 1048574 CX2200_VLAN_100 7
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-198
An example of multiple-unit connection is explained below.
Note the following points when configuring each of the units.
- Before setting the TDMoP path (format and connection), be sure to check that the number of
TSs set for the TDMoP group agrees with the ones set to the connected units.
- Check that each of the E1/T1 port settings (frame type, line code and frame format) agrees with
the ones set to the connected units.

If the TDMoP operation mode is set to CESoPSN and the packet format is set to TDM over Ether
(MEF8):
(CX2200-A and CX2200-B are connected with TS number = 12. CX2200-B and the external
device are connected with their E1 ports.)

CX2200-A
TS 1

TS 12
TS 13

TS 32

External device

TS 1
TS 2
TS 32

TS 10

TS 21
TS 11
TS 22
TS 9
TS 2
(Port 1)
CX2200-B
12 TSs are connected
in CESoPSN
(via GbE ports)
(Port 4)
TS 1
TS 2
TS 32

TS 10

TS 21
TS 11
TS 22
TS 9
32 TSs are connected
with E1 ports

TDM Functions
2-199
Examples of connection conditions of the above CX2200-A and CX2200-B are listed below.

Setting item Set value Remarks
TDMoP operation mode CESoPSN
Packet format TDM over Ethernet (MEF8) Default
Frame type E1 Default
Line code HDB3 Default
Frame format CRC4 multiframe Default
Number of TSs to be
transmitted/received
12 TSs
Number of transmitted frames 8 Default
Existence/absence of RTP
headers
Exist Default
CoS value 5 Default
VLAN ID (VLAN name) CX2200_VLAN_0100
ECID 200
Jitter buffer control method Static mode Default
Jitter buffer variation tolerance 4ms Default

Connection conditions of the above CX2200-B and the external device are listed below.


TDM Functions
2-200
Examples of command input for each of the units are described below.

An example of CX2200-A settings:

An example of CX2200-B settings:

If the TDMoP operation mode is set to SAToP and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP:
(CX2200-A and CX2200-B are connected with TS number = 32 (all). CX2200-B and the external
device are connected with their E1 ports.)

(Port 4)
TS 1

TS 31
TS 32
TS 1
TS 2
TS 32
32 TSs are conncted
with E1 ports
External device
TS 2

TS 31
PW R S EL V
RT N PULL
ALM PW R 1
ETH RS-232C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FE CONSO LE SE LV
R TN -48V
16 T1E 1H
A LM
1-8 9-1 6
P WR 2 I N S
CP US W
EX T-M
L IN K
AC T
25 26
AL M
2G BE
-4 8V
FA NU
LI NK
AC T
CX2200
CX2200-A
P W R S ELV
R TN PULL
A LM PW R1
ETH RS-23 2C 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FE C ONSOLE SEL V
RT N - 48V
16T 1E1 H
A LM
1-8 9-16
PW R 2 I NS
C PU SW
EXT -M
LI N K
A CT
25 26
A LM
2GB E
-48 V
FAN U
L IN K
AC T
CX2200
CX2200-B
(Port 15)
TS 31
32 TSs are connected in
SAToP (via GbE ports)

TS 1
TS 2
TS 32

TS 31
TS 31

*Switch# set tdmop format 4 2 00:02:03:04:05:0a CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 200
*Switch#
*Switch# set tdmop format 1 1 00:02:03:04:05:0b CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 200
*Switch#
TDM Functions
2-201
Examples of connection conditions of the above CX2200-A and CX2200-B are listed below.

TDMoP operation mode SAToP Default
Packet format TDM over UDP/IP
Number of TSs to be
transmitted/received
32 TSs Fixed when SAToP is set.
Number of transmitted frames 4
Existence/absence of RTP
headers
Absent
CoS value 7
VLAN ID (VLAN name) 1000
Flow identification method UDP port (dst) + IP (src)
IP address of CX2200-A 192.168.1.100
IP address of CX2200-B 192.168.1.200
Destination UDP port number 50000
TTL value 128 Default
DSCP value 63
Jitter buffer control method Static mode Default
Jitter buffer variation tolerance 4ms Default

Connection conditions of the above CX2200-B and the external device are listed below.


TDM Functions
2-202
Examples of command input for each of the units are described below.

An example of CX2200-A settings:

An example of CX2200-B settings:

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 192.168.1.200 udp-dst 4 rtp_off
*Switch# set tdmop format 15 1 00:02:03:04:05:0c 1000 7 192.168.1.100 udp 50000
dscp 63
*Switch#

*Switch# set tdmop mode satop udp-ip 192.168.1.100 udp-dst 4 rtp_off
*Switch# set tdmop format 4 1 00:02:03:04:05:0d 1000 7 192.168.1.200 udp 50000
dscp 63
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-203
Clearing path setting
Clears a path setting by the single specification of the group number or per port basis.

Commands
clear tdmop format Clearing of TDMoP path setting (format setting: to another
device)
clear tdmop connection Clearing of TDMoP path setting (connection setting: loopback
within self line card)

Memo When the loopback is set, the path setting for the loopback destination is also cleared.
Memo A group number to which a TDMoP group is not set cannot be specified.
Memo When a line number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is
cleared.

Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input by
specifying a single group number. (When a format is set.)

The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input per port
basis. (When connection is set.)

*Switch# clear tdmop connection 8

*Switch# clear tdmop format 1 1
*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-204
Displaying path setting status
Shows parameters which are specified by the path setting commands.
The setting can be displayed by the single group specification with in a line, multiple group
specification, per line basis, or per device basis.

Commands
show tdmop format Display of TDMoP path setting status (format setting: to another
device)
show tdmop connection Display of TDMoP path setting status (connection setting:
loopback within self line card)

Input examples
The following example shows how to display per device basis. (Format setting in the case of
TDM over Ether (MEF8): to another device)

*Switch# show tdmop format
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 e1 satop mef --- 8 on static

TDMoP Format L2 Configuration Table
===================================
Source Destination
Port Group MAC Address MAC Address VID CoS ECID
---------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:bb 1 0 1
16 16 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa 00:30:13:a1:2a:dd 4094 7 1048575

TDMoP Format L3 Configuration Table
===================================

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-205
The following example shows how to display per device basis. (Connection setting in the case of
TDM over UDP/IP: loopback within the self line card)

*Switch# show tdmop connection
TDMoP Mode Configuration Table
==============================
---------------------------------------------------------------
line1 t1 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src 1 off dynamic

TDMoP Connection L2 Configuration Table
=======================================
Port Group ECID Port Group ECID VID CoS
-----------------------------------------------------
1 1 --- 2 2 --- 1 0
16 16 --- 15 15 --- 4094 7

TDMoP Connection L3 Configuration Table
=======================================
Port Group UDP Port Port Group UDP Port
--------------------------------------------
1 1 1024 2 2 1025
16 16 65535 15 15 65534

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-206
Displaying path operation status
Shows the buffer underrun status/TDMoP path blocked status.
The status can be displayed by the single group specification with in a port, multiple group
specification, per port basis, or per device basis.

Command
show tdmop status Display of TDMoP path operation status information

Memo A buffer underrun status (fault) occurs when any packet on the Ether side of the TDMoP
path is not received or when some problem occurs with received packets.

Input example
The following example shows how to display per device basis.

*Switch# show tdmop status
TDMoP Status Table
==================
Port Group Underrun Admin
-------------------------------
1 1 normal enabled
2 2 fault enabled
3 3 fault disabled
4 4 normal enabled

*Switch#

TDM Functions
2-207
Resetting CESoP device
Resets a CESoP device to recover its condition when a failure has occurred in the CESoP device
mounted on a 32T1E1H line card, a 32T1E1T line card, or a 1ATM155A line card.

Resetting CESoP device
Resets a CESoP device mounted on a 32T1E1H line card, a 32T1E1T line card, or a 1ATM155A
line card.

Command
reset cesop-device Resetting of CESoP device

Memo If a path has been set under the following condition, a CESoP device failure occurs when
the path is cleared and reconfigured: either the frame type or the number of time slots (set
in the TDMoP group setting for the TDMoP format setting) of the local unit disagrees with
the one of the associated unit. This command is used to recover the CESoP device from
the above CESoP device failure.
Memo During the "reset cesop-device" command execution, the continuity on the TDMoP path
set in the unit is stopped. A buffer underrun error occurs in the associated unit.

Input example

*Switch# reset cesop-device
Would you like to reset cesop-device? :(Y/N): y

TDM Functions
2-208
Practical procedures to recover a CESoP device from a failure using the "reset cesop-device"
command are described below.

Memo In the case of the following example, disagreement of the numbers of TSs has occurred
between the local unit and the associated unit. In the case of frame type disagreement,
reconfiguration of the TDMoP operation mode is required.

*Switch# set tdmop format 1 32 00:02:03:04:05:06 CX2200_VLAN_0100 ecid 100
*Switch# clear tdmop format 1 32
*Switch# clear tdmop group 1 e1 32
*Switch#
21157 : Since the fault of CESoP device has occurred, the specified command cannot
be executed until the CESoP device is reset.
*Switch#
01/02/2000 02:06:23
===================
WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (LINE#1)
*Switch#
*Switch# reset cesop-device
Would you like to reset cesop-device? :(Y/N): y
*Switch#
01/02/2000 02:07:18
===================
CL CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (LINE#1)
*Switch#
*Switch#

Reconfigure the TDMoP group
setting.
A CESoP device failure caused
by the TDMoP path
reconfiguration has occurred.
The original number of TSs is 10.
Reset the CESoP device to
recover it from the failure.
Reconfigure the TDMoP path.
TDM Functions
2-209
Displaying CESoP device status
Displays condition information of a CESoP device.

Command
show cesop-device status Display of CESoP device status

Input example

*Switch# show cesop-device status
CESoP Device Status Table
=========================
Module Status
--------------
line1 normal

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-210
2.6 EtherOAM Functions
2.6.1 EtherOAM Function
With EtherOAM function, continuity status between units can be checked using frames that are
ETH-CC (Ethernet Continuity Check), ETH-LB (Ethernet LoopBack), ETH-LT (Ethernet Link trace),
ETH-DM (Ethernet Delay Measurement), and ETH-LM (Ethernet Loss Measurement) frames. To
use this function, groups need to be organized in units of MEG (ME Group), and end points (MEP:
MEG End Point) needs to be registered in units of port, VLAN, and MEG Level.
Diagram of unit configuration when EtherOAM function is used is shown below.

As shown in the above figure, MEGs can be hierarchized by using MEG Levels. Thus EtherOAM
function can be used by each of the managers of customers, providers and operators separately.
Note that MEGs must be in nested configuration and a MEG in the lower level cannot exceed the
range of the upper level MEG.
Operator layer
A
CX2200
(Unit A)
Core SW
(Aggregation
SW)
B
MEP
MIP (*1)
MEG: Level 7
MEG: Level 4
MEG: Level 2
MEG: Level 0
VLAN=1
VLAN=1
VLAN=2
VLAN=3
VLAN=2
Port Port
CX2200
(Unit B)
Core SW
(Aggregation
SW)
*1: Not supported by this device
EtherOAM Functions
2-211
Periodically exchanging ETH-CCM frames between MEPs belonging to the same MEG Level
enables failure trap notification to maintenance personnel if there are continuity errors. Also,
sending ETH-LBM frames, ETH-LTM frames, ETH-DMM frames and ETH-LMM frames from MEPs
to MIPs of the relay route or to associated MEPs enables check of frame continuity status between
units with the response results.

ETH-CC failure type
If failures have occurred when MEPs monitor each failure information at ETH-CCM frame
transmission and reception, traps in units of MEP are notified. The default status is no failure
status.
(1) LOC (Loss Of Continuity)

Failure
content
No reception of ETH-CCM frames from an associated MEP.
Detection
condition
No reception of ETH-CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long as the
period value set to a MEP in the reception side.
Cancel
condition
Reception of three ETH CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long as the
period value set to a MEP in the reception side.

(2) RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

Failure
content
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added from an
associated MEP.
Detection
condition
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added at a MEP
in the reception side.
Cancel
condition
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is not added at a
MEP in the reception side.

(3) Unexpected MEG Level

Failure
content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG Level.
Detection
condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG Level value lower than the
MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception side.
Cancel
condition
During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the
reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG Level
value lower than the MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception side.
EtherOAM Functions
2-212
(4) Mismerge

Failure
content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG ID.
Detection
condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and a
MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.
Cancel
condition
reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG
Level value and a MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.

(5) Unexpected MEP

Failure
content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEP ID.
Detection
condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and
MEG ID and an associated MEP ID which is not set to a MEP in the reception
side.
Cancel
condition
Level value and MEG ID and a MEP ID which is not set to the MEP in the
reception side.

(6) Unexpected Period

Failure
content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different Period.
Detection
condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value and
MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is not set to a MEP in the
reception side.
Cancel
condition
Level value and MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is not set to a
MEP in the reception side.

Memo Failure monitoring is continued without failure trap control at port link down.

EtherOAM Functions
2-213
Set frame common information.
Set MEG
Set LBR returning period.
Set MEP.
Set the ID of an associated MEP.
Set ETH-RDI information addition.
Activate the loopback function.
Set ETH-CCM frame transmission
and reception.
Setting EtherOAM commands
Each command needs to set to function the EtherOAM functions. Follow the procedure below.

Setting EtherOAM frame common information 2-215

Setting reply frame returning period 2-217

Setting MEG 2-218

Setting MEP 2-220

Setting associated MEP IDs 2-222

Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception 2-224

Setting ETH-RDI operation 2-226

Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test 2-229

EtherOAM Functions
2-214
Activate the link trace function.
Activate the delay measurement function.
Set a test target MEP.
Activate the loss measurement function.

Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test 2-231

Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test 2-233

Setting test target MEPs 2-235

Executing EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test 2-237

EtherOAM Functions
2-215
Setting EtherOAM frame common information
Sets destination multicast MAC addresses and protocol type values which are used for EtherOAM
frames. The set values are used for EtherOAM frame transmission and reception.

Commands
set ether-oam frame Setting of EtherOAM frame common information
show ether-oam frame Display of EtherOAM frame common information

Among set multicast addresses, select destination multicast addresses of ETH-CCM and
ETH-LBM frames (Class#1), and destination multicast address of ETH-LTM frames (Class#2).
Multicast addresses (Class#1) are used when multicast CC and multicast LB are executed. The
following shows how to figure Class#1.
Class#1 = (Set MAC address AND FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) OR MEG Level [0-7]
Class#2 = (Set MAC address AND FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) OR MEG Level [0-7]

[Usage Example]
If "01:80:c3:00:00:ff" is set as a multicast address:
The following multicast addresses are set as the destination multicast address of the EtherOAM
frames transmitted from the MEPs belonging to the MEG whose MEG Level is "1".
Class1 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f1
Class2 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f9
Memo A frame which has a set MAC address and a protocol type is treated as an EtherOAM
frame. Check the setting contents before using EtherOAM.
Memo Protocol type that has been set is reflected to the R-APS control frames for EtherRing.
Memo Multicast addresses 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:2F/ 01:19:A7:00:00:00 to
01:19:A7:00:00:FF cannot be specified as destination MAC addresses.
Memo By default, the following values are specified.
Multicast MAC address (Class#1): 01:80:c2:00:00:30
Multicast MAC address (Class#2): 01:80:c2:00:00:38
Protocol type: 0x8902
Note Set the same setting as other switches using EtherOAM. If the setting is different,
correct operation is not guaranteed.
Note Do not set this setting during ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception, loopback test,
EtherOAM Functions
2-216
link trace, delay measurement and loss measurement.
Note If you set the values that are reserved for other purposes by IANA such as 0x8100(IEEE
802.Q) or 0x0800(IPv4) as the protocol type, it may result in an unexpected operations.

Setting examples

With the above example, EtherOAM function between Unit A and Unit B is implemented.
As the example indicates, set identical values for MAC addresses of both Unit A and Unit B. Also,
set an identical value for the protocol type of both Unit A and Unit B.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam frame 01:80:c3:00:00:70 0xfffe
*Switch# show ether-oam frame
Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address
=====================================
Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type
=============================
Protocol Type : 0xfffe

Switch#

<Unit B>
*Switch# set ether-oam frame 01:80:c3:00:00:70 0xfffe
*Switch# show ether-oam frame
Ether OAM Frame Multicast MAC Address
=====================================
Class1 : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
Class2 : 01:80:c3:00:00:78

Ether OAM Frame Protocol Type
=============================
Protocol Type : 0xfffe

Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-217
Setting reply frame returning period
At loopback (multicast) test or link trace test, you can set per unit whether to return response
frames of received ETH-LB or ETH-LT after the random time from 0 to 1 second or return them
immediately.
In the default setting, after a loopback frame is received in an associated MEP, the response frame
is returned after the random time from 0 to 1 second. Also, when link trace frame is received in
an associated MEP, the response frame is returned immediately.

Commands
set ether-oam reply-period Setting of Reply frame returning period
show ether-oam reply-period Display of Reply frame returning period

Setting examples

With the above example, both of the response frames for ETH-LB or ETH-LT are returned
immediately on Unit A.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam reply-period loopback immediately
*Switch# set ether-oam reply-period linktrace immediately
*Switch# show ether-oam reply-period
Ether OAM Reply Period Information
==================================
Reply Frame Reply Period
-------------------------
ETH-LBR immediately
ETH-LTR immediately

Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-218
Setting MEG
To use EtherOAM function, set MEG groups first. In the MEG setting, specify transmission period
of MEG ID, MEG Level, and ETH-CC by each group. The setting unit of ETH-CC transmission
period is 3.33, 10 and 100 milliseconds, 1, 10, and 60 seconds. Setting MEGs enables MEP
setting for corresponding groups.

Commands
set ether-oam meg Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg Clearing of MEG

Memo MEGs can be set up to 128 MEGs for unit.
Memo When MEPs are set to MEGs, the MEGs cannot be cleared. To clear the MEGs, clear all
related MEPs first.
Memo Character string within 13 characters or 32-digit number (hexadecimal) can be specified
for a MEG ID.

EtherOAM Functions
2-219
Setting examples

With the above example, the following MEG group settings are applied to Unit A and Unit B: MEG
ID=NEC0000000001, MEG Level=0 and ETH-CC transmission period =1s.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam meg 1 NEC0000000001 0 period 1s
*Switch# show ether-oam meg
Ether OAM MEG Information
=========================
Total number of entries:1

MEG Index MEG ID MEG Level ETH-CC Period
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 NEC0000000001 0 1sec

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-220
Setting MEP
Sets MEPs after setting MEG groups. In this MEP setting, link among ports, VLANs, MEGs, and
MEP IDs is created. With this link, EtherOAM function can be used between MEPs within the
same MEG. In the case of a port with tagbase VLAN settings, specifying untag parameter instead
of VLAN to enable transmission and reception of EtherOAM frames without VLAN tags.

Commands
set ether-oam mep Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep Clearing of MEP

Memo After checking that MEGs are set, set MEPs.
Memo Up to 64 MEPs can be set per port. Only one MEP can be set for the port to which the
EtherRing function is enabled.
Memo If an unsupported OpCode frame is received, they are discarded regardless of the MEG
level.
Note If a MEP is set for a port which is a part of a link aggregation, EtherOAM function may not
work properly for the MEP.
Note If the VLAN which is used for MEP has not been registered or accidentally cleared,
EtherOAM function does not work after that.

EtherOAM Functions
2-221
Setting examples

With the above example, MEP settings are applied to the MEG group set for Unit A and Unit B.
In the example, VLAN (ID=100) and MEP related to the MEG group (level=0) are set to Port 25 of
Unit A. Also, VLAN (ID=100) and MEP related to the MEG group (level=0) are set to Port 25 of
Unit B.
With the above settings, EtherOAM frames of VLAN ID=100 and MEG Level=0 can be
transmitted/received between Port25 of Unit A and Port25 of Unit B.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam mep 1 25 100 1 10
*Switch# show ether-oam mep index
Ether OAM MEP Information
==========================
MEP Index : 1 Port : 25
==========================
VID : 100
MEG Level : 0
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
Position : outside
MEP ID : 10
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : disabled
Receive : disabled
Kind : ---
DES MAC Address : ---
RDI : disabled

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-222
Setting associated MEP IDs
Sets associated MEPs per MEP. ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs registered
here can be monitored. ETH-CCM frames received from associated MEPs which are not
registered are treated as abnormal frames. For each associated MEP, the reception monitoring
can be enabled or disabled.

Commands
set ether-oam peer-mep Setting of associated MEP ID
clear ether-oam peer-mep Clearing of associated MEP ID

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, register associated MEPs. If associated MEPs are not
registered, failure monitoring is not performed.
Memo Up to 64 associated MEPs can be registered per port. Only one MEP can be set for the
port to which the EtherRing function is enabled.
Memo An associated MEP ID of a specified MEP can be cleared in the following cases.
- When the reception in units of local MEP is disabled, IDs of all associated MEPs for the
corresponding local MEP can be cleared.
- When the reception in units of local MEP is enabled and the reception in units of the
associated MEP is disabled, only the corresponding associated MEP ID for the
corresponding local MEP can be cleared.

EtherOAM Functions
2-223
Setting examples

With the above example, associated MEPs of the MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B are set.
In the example, the MEP set for Unit B (ID=20) is specified as the associated MEP of the MEP set
for Unit A. Also, the MEP set for Unit A (ID=10) is specified as the associated MEP of the MEP
set for Unit B.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 20 receive-enable
*Switch# show ether-oam mep index 1
==========================
==========================
VID : 100
MEG Level : 0
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
Position : outside
MEP ID : 10
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : disabled
Receive : disabled
Kind : ---
DES MAC Address : ---
RDI : disabled

ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : normal

Ether OAM Peer MEP Information
==============================
Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received
------------------------------------

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-224
Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception
ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception between MEPs set in the local unit and associated
MEPs enables check of connection with associated units. ETH-CCM frame transmission and
reception monitoring can be set separately. Enabling reception monitoring starts monitoring of
ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs. Enabling transmission monitoring starts
ETH-CCM frame transmission according to transmission period of a MEG to which a MEP belongs.
When failures are detected, autonomous message and traps are output.

Commands
set ether-oam cc Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission

Memo After checking that MEPs and the associated MEPs are set, set the ETH-CC transmission
and reception setting.
Memo Even in ports where link is down, MEP monitors ETH-CC reception.
Note If destination MAC addresses are specified in this ETH-CC transmission and reception
setting, ETH-CCM frame is sent only to one corresponding address. To transmit
ETH-CCM frames to multiple associated MEPs, specify multicast transmission.

EtherOAM Functions
2-225
Setting examples

With the above example, ETH-CCM frames are transmitted and received between MEPs set for
Unit A and Unit B.
In the example, multicast ETH-CCM frames are transmitted from the MEP set for Unit A and
receptions of ETH-CCM frames from the specified associated MEP (ID=20) are monitored. Also,
multicast ETH-CCM frames are transmitted from the MEP set for Unit B and receptions of
ETH-CCM frames from the specified associated MEP (ID=10) are monitored.
<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable
=========================
==========================
VID : 100
MEG Level : 0
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
Position : outside
MEP ID : 10
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : enabled
Receive : enabled
Kind : multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
RDI : disabled

ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : normal

==============================
------------------------------------
20 normal disabled

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-226
Setting ETH-RDI operation
This is the function to send ETH-CCM frames which are transmitted to a MEP set as a local unit
from an associated MEP with adding ETJ-RDI information when LOC is detected due to timeout of
ETH-CC receiving. This function keeps sending ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information to
the other unit until the LOC is recovered. Enabling this function allows the associated MEP to be
noticed that a local unit has an LOC failure.

Command
set ether-oam rdi Setting of ETH-RDI operation

Memo ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information are not transmitted unless the ETH-CCM
frame transmission is enabled in the ETH-CC transmission and reception setting.

EtherOAM Functions
2-227
Setting examples

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable
==========================
==========================
VID : 100
MEG Level : 0
MEG Index : 1
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
Position : outside
MEP ID : 10
CC Priority : 7
Transmit : enabled
Receive : enabled
Kind : multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:80:c3:00:00:70
RDI : enabled

ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : normal

==============================
------------------------------------
20 normal no-rdi

*Switch#

<Unit B>
*Switch# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-228
With the above example, ETH-RDI information is attached to ETH-CCM frames transmitted from a
MEP if a LOC failure has been detected from it among the MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B.
In the example, when a LOC failure is detected in the MEP of Unit A, multicast ETH-CCM frames
with ETH-RDI information are transmitted from the MEP. MEP of Unit B receives the ETH-CCM
frames (with ETH-RDI information) from the associated MEP (in this case, MEP of Unit A) and
detects the RDI failure.
For LOC failure and RDI failure, refer to the page "2-211".

EtherOAM Functions
2-229
Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test
This is the function to transmit ETH-LB M (LookBack Message) frame from a specified MEP and
check reception of frames returned back in a MIP in a relay route or associated MEP. Unicast LB
and multicast LB functions are supported.
To perform unicast LB, send ETH-LBM (LoopBack Message) frame with a specified MAC address
as the destination MAC address. MEPs or MIPs which belong to the same MEG Level and have
the corresponding MAC address return ETH-LBR frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame.
Thus, connection normality can be checked between the two points.
To perform multicast LB, send ETH-LBM frames to which multicast DA is given. All MEPs
belonging to the same MEG Level return ETH-LBR frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame.
Thus, existence of all the MEPs in the corresponding MEG Level can be checked.
In the source MEPs, ETH-LBR frame reception is monitored for up to five seconds, and the
reception results are shown.

Command
loopback ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LB.
Memo For the detailed test procedures of ETH-LB, refer to 4.2.1.1.
Note Multiple commands of ETH-LB execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also,
multiple commands of ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution, ETH-DM execution and
ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.

EtherOAM Functions
2-230
Execution examples

With the above example, multicast ETH-LBM frames are transmitted from the MEP of Unit A and
responses from the MEP of Unit B are received. The MAC address of the port to which the MEP
of Unit B is set "00:30:13:b0:01:01" is displayed as the execution result.

<Unit A>
*Switch# loopback ether-oam 1
Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID : 100
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
MEP ID : 10
MEG Level : 0

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information
===============================================
1 00:30:13:b0:01:01

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-231
Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test
This is the function to transmit ETH-LTM (Link Trace Message) frames from a specified MEP and
check the route between the specified MEP and a MIP on the relay route or the associated MEP.
ETH-LTM (Link Trace Message) frames are transmitted from the MEP to the specified MAC
address by a command. If the associated MEP receives the frames, it returns ETH-LTR frames to
the source MEP (i.e. the MEP which sent the LTM frames) after checking that the Target MAC
address has been learned. At this time, the ETH-LTM frames are terminated.
Also, MIPs on the relay route and associated MEPs return ETH-LTR frames to the source MEP to
terminate the ETH-LTM frames, even when each MAC address agree with the Target MAC
address.
The source MEP displays the source MAC addresses of the received ETH-LTR frames in the TTL
order after monitoring for 5 seconds or 10 seconds.

Command
linktrace ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test

Memo Information that indicates whether the response is generated because the Target MAC
address has been learned (RlyFDB) or because the Target MAC address agrees with the
MAC address of a MIP on the relay route or the associated MEP (RlyHit) is attached to
ETH-LTR frames.
Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LT.
Note Multiple commands of ETH-LT execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also,
multiple commands of ETH-LT execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-DM execution and

EtherOAM Functions
2-232
Execution examples

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-LTM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then,
the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. The MAC address of the port to
which the MEP of Unit B is set "00:30:13:b0:01:01" will be displayed as the execution result.
If an aggregation SW exists on the route between the MEP of Unit A and MEP of Unit B, and a MIP
related to the MEG level and VLAN which are identical with the ones set to Unit A and Unit B is set,
responses from the MIP are also received. The MAC address of the port to which the MIP is set
"00:30:13:a0:01:f9" is displayed as the execution result.
<Unit A>
*Switch# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 wait 5s ttl 5
Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information
=====================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID : 100
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
MEP ID : 10
MEG Level : 0

Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01
=============================================================
TTL MAC Address Relay Action
------------------------------------
4 00:30:13:a0:01:f9 RlyFDB
3 00:30:13:b0:01:01 RlyHit

Trace Complete

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-233
Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test
This is the function to send ETH-DMM (Delay Measurement Message) frames from a specified
MEP and measure delay time of frames to an associated MEP. In ETH-DM execution, the local
MEP sends an ETH-DMM frame storing frame transmission time (TxTimeStampf) to a specified
MAC address destination.
After receiving the ETH-DMM frame, an associated MEP stores the reception time
(RxTimeStampf) and the transmission time (TxTimeStampb) newly in the frame time information
and send the information as an ETH-DMR (Delay Measurement Reply) frame to the originating
MEP.
After receiving the ETH-DMR frame, the originating MEP measures frame delay time by comparing
the frame time information with frame reception time in the local unit (RxTimeb).
This unit sends ETH-DMM periodically to measure the maximum of frame delay time (Delay
Maximum), the minimum (Delay Minimum), the average (Delay Average), and the variation (Delay
Variation).

Command
dm ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test

Memo Only Two-way ETH-DM is supported for this unit.
Memo Frame delay time (Frame Delay) is calculated by the following calculating formula.
Frame Delay = (RxTimeb - TxTimeStampf) (TxTimeStampb RxTimeStampf)
If this unit receives ETH-DMM frames, values (TxTimeStampb, RxTimeStampf) to be
stored in ETH-DMR are 0.
Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-DM.
Note Multiple commands of ETH-DM execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also,
multiple commands of ETH-DM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and

EtherOAM Functions
2-234
Execution examples

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-DMM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then,
the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. In the example, the measurement
of the response delay time is implemented for 10 times. The
minimum/maximum/average/deviation values of the delay time are displayed as the execution
results.
<Unit A>
*Switch# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1
Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information
============================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID : 100
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
MEP ID : 10
MEG Level : 0

During an ETH-DM examination........

Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01
====================================================================
Request DMM : 10
Receive DMR : 10
Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Average(msec) : 0.11
Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00
Error Count : 0
Result : complete

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#
EtherOAM Functions
2-235
Setting test target MEPs
This is the function to set IDs of the test target MEPs which are required for loss measurements of
frames. This function registers the priority of test target frames and the measurement target
MEPs.

Commands
set ether-oam lm Setting of test target MEP
show ether-oam lm Display of test target MEP
clear ether-oam lm Clearing of test target MEP

Memo After checking that MEPs are set, set test target MEPs.
Memo The priority of the count target frames can be specified only when the MEP is set on the
port with tagbase VLAN setting. If the MEP is set on the port with portbase VLAN
setting, frames of all the priorities become the measurement targets.
Memo To specify the priority of frames, the MEPs of both the local device and the associated
device must be set on ports with tagbase VLAN setting. In addition, an identical priority
must be specified for both the local device and the associated device.

EtherOAM Functions
2-236
Setting examples

With the above example, MEPs set for Unit A and Unit B are specified as the test target MEPs of
ETH-LM.
In the example, the test target MEPs are set by specifying "all" for the priority of the test target
frame.
With the above settings, transmissions and receptions of the measurement target frames on the
ports to which the test target MEPs are set are counted. Note that if the test target MEPs are set
by specifying "all" for the frame priority, transmissions and receptions are counted regardless of the
frame priorities.

<Unit A>
*Switch# set ether-oam lm 1 all

*Switch#

<Unit B>

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-237
Executing EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test
This is the function to measure the frame loss between the specified test target MEP and the test
target MEP set to the associated device by sending ETH-LMM (Loss Measurement Message)
frames from the specified test target MEP. During ETH-LM execution, LMM (Loss Measurement
Message) frames that store the frame transmission counters (TxFcf) are sent from the MEP of the
local device to the specified MAC address.
The MEP of the associated device receives ETH-LMM frames, then, newly inserts ETH-LMM
frame reception counters (RxFcf) and ETH-LMR frame transmission counters (TxFcb) into the
transmission counters of the received frames and returns them to the source device as ETH-LMR
(Loss Measurement Reply) frames.
The source MEP receives the ETH-LMR frames, then, measures the frame loss number by using
the difference between the received ETH-LMM frame reception counter (RxFcf) and the ETH-LMR
frame transmission counter (TxFcb) in its own device and the difference between the frame
transmission counter information (TxFcf) and the frame reception counter information (TxFcl) in
own device.
Transmission frame loss number (far_end) and reception frame loss number (near_end) can be
measured in this device by sending ETH-LMM frames periodically.

Command
lm ether-oam Executing of EtherOAM Frame Loss Measurement test

Memo Only ETH-LM frames in Single-ended method are supported by this device.
Memo Frame loss number (Frame Loss) is calculated by the following calculating formulas.
Frame Loss (far_end) = | TxFcf - previous TxFcf | - | RxFcf - previous RxFcf |
Frame Loss (near_end) = | TxFcb - previous TxFcb | - | RxFcl - previous RxFcl |
Memo After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LM.
Memo The ETH-LM function enables loss measurements of the following frames:
- User frames
- EtherOAM frames of the MEG level which is higher than the MEG level of the test
target MEP
- ETH-CCM frames of the MEG level which is equivalent to the MEG level of the test
target MEP
Note Multiple commands of ETH-LM execution cannot be executed simultaneously. Also,
multiple commands of ETH-LM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and
ETH-DM execution cannot be executed simultaneously.
EtherOAM Functions
2-238
Execution examples

<Unit A>
*Switch# lm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information
===========================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID : 100
MEG ID : NEC0000000001
MEP ID : 10
MEG Level : 0

During an ETH-LM examination.....

Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01
===================================================================
Examination MEP Index : 1
Examination MEP ID : 10
Target Priority : all
Request LMM : 11
Receive LMR : 11
Transmit Frame Near : 100
Receive Frame Far : 100
Transmit Frame Far : 100
Receive Frame Near : 100
Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Far : 0.00%
Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0
Rate of Frame Loss Near : 0.00%
Error Count : 0
Result : complete

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-239

With the above example, the MEP of Unit A sends ETH-LMM frames to the MEP of Unit B. Then,
the MEP of Unit A receives responses from the MEP of Unit B. In the example, the measurement
of the frame loss is implemented for 10 times. The following values are displayed as the
execution results.
- Total number of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Transmit Frame Near
- Total number of frames received at Unit B : Receive Frame Far
- Loss value of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Sum of Frame Loss Far
- Loss rate of frames sent from Unit A to Unit B : Rate of Frame Loss Far
- Total number of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Transmit Frame Far
- Total number of frames received at Unit A : Receive Frame Near
- Loss value of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Sum of Frame Loss Near
- Loss rate of frames sent from Unit B to Unit A : Rate of Frame Loss Near

<Unit B>

*Switch#

EtherOAM Functions
2-240
Supplements
Frame formats of the frames which are transmitted and received with EtherOAM function are
shown below.

ETH-CCM frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 MEL Version OpCode Flags TLV Offset
5 Sequence Number
9 MEP ID
13
17
:
MEG ID
57
61 Reserved
:
73 End TLV

- MEL: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP
- Version: 0
- OpCode: CCM
- Flags: RDI detection bit/Period values
- TLV Offset: 70
- Sequence Number: 0
- MEP ID: ID of the frame transmitting MEP
- MEG ID: ID of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP
- End TLV: 0

EtherOAM Functions
2-241
ETH-LBM frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Transaction ID
9
: Data TLV
last End TLV

- MEL: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP
- Version: 0
- OpCode: LBM
- Flags: 0
- TLV Offset: 4
- Transaction ID: Value incremented at every transmission of LBM frame
- Data TLV: Type/Length/Data Pattern
- End TLV: 0

ETH-LBR frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Transaction ID
9
: Data TLV
last End TLV

- OpCode: LBR
- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received LBM frame

EtherOAM Functions
2-242
ETH-LTM frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Transaction ID
9 TTL OriginMAC Address
13
17 TargetMAC Address
21 End TLV
25
:
Reserved
45

- MEG Level: Level of the MEG which includes the frame transmitting MEP
- Version: 0
- OpCode: LTM
- Flags: HW only
- TLV Offset: 17
- Transaction ID: Value incremented at every transmission of LTM frame
- TTL: Value decremented when passing Time to Live MIP
- Origin MAC Address: MAC address of the port to which the frame transmitting MEP is set
- Target MAC Address: MAC address of the targeted endpoint
- End TLV: 0

EtherOAM Functions
2-243
ETH-LTR frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Transaction ID
9 TTL Relay Action End TLV
17
:
Reserved
45

- OpCode: LTR
- TLV Offset: 6
- TTL: Time to Live value after decrementing TTL of the ETH-LTM frame
- RelayAction: RlyHit/RlyFDB
- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received ETH-LTM frame

EtherOAM Functions
2-244
ETH-DMM frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5
9
TxTimeStampf
13
17
Reserved for DMM receiving equipment
(for RxTimeStampf)
21
25
Reserved for DMR
(for TxTimeStampb)
29
33
Reserved for DMR receiving equipment
37 End TLV Reserved
41
45

- Version: 0
- OpCode: DMM
- Flags: 0
- TLV Offset: 32
- TxTimeStampf: Time stamp when transmitting the ETH-DMM frame
- Reserved for DMM receiving equipment: 0
- Reserved for DMR: 0
- Reserved for DMR receiving equipment: 0
- END TLV: 0

EtherOAM Functions
2-245
ETH-DMR frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5
9
TxTimeStampf
13
17
RxTimeStampf
21
25
TxTimeStampb
29
33
Reserved for DMR receiving equipment
(for RxTimeStampb)
37 End TLV Reserved
41
45

- OpCode: DMR
- RxTimeStampf: 0 (Not supported)
- TxTimeStampb: 0 (Not supported)
- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received DMM frame

EtherOAM Functions
2-246
ETH-LMM frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 TxFCf
9 Reserved for RxFCf in LMR
13 Reserved for TxFCb in LMR
17 End TLV Reserved
:
45

- Version: 0
- OpCode: LMM
- Flags: 0
- TLV Offset: 12
- TxFCF: Frame transmission counter value when transmitting the ETH-LMM frame (32 bit
unsigned integer)
- Reserved for RxFCf in LMR: 0
- Reserved for TxFCb in LMR: 0
- END TLV: 0

EtherOAM Functions
2-247
ETH-LMR frame format

1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 TxFCf
9 RxFCf
13 TxFCb
17 End TLV Reserved
:
45

- OpCode: LMR
- RxFCf: Frame reception counter value when receiving the ETH-LMM frame (32 bit unsigned
integer)
- TxFCb: Frame transmission counter value when transmitting the ETH-LMR frame (32 bit
unsigned integer)
- Other fields: Values same as the ones of the received LMM frame

EtherOAM Functions
2-248
2.6.2 EtherRing Function
CX2200 provides the EtherRing function which is compliant with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1731. The
EtherRing function switches over protections in a ring topology using ETH-CC (Ethernet Continuity
Check) of EtherOAM and R-APS_PDU for ring control.
This function supports 2GBE line card only.
The EtherRing function in CX2200 supports the following functions.

Supported Function Remarks
Switchover control Single ring (per port) Switchover for a group (instance) which
consists of multiple VLANs is not
supported.
Switchback mode Revertive (automatic
switchback)
Non-revertive (automatic switchback) is
not supported.

In a steady state where one node with a RPL port is set among nodes that are connected in the
form of a ring, the EtherRing function unblocks the RPL port and blocks the failed port to
switchover paths in case of a line failure in the ring.

R-APS frame
User frame
RPL port
When a failure occurred
When no failure occurred (steady state)
Unblocked port
Blocked port
Failure occurred

Block the failed port
Unblock the RPL port
RPL Owner
EtherOAM Functions
2-249
Note The EtherRing function does not work for ports where the spanning tree function is
enabled.
Note The EtherRing function does not work for ports where the link aggregation function is
enabled.

EtherOAM Functions
2-250
Glossary
Words and terms used for the EtherRing function are described below.

Term Description
RL (Ring Link) port Port included in the ring
RPL (Ring Protection
Link) port
Port which blocks communications with user frames and R-APS control
frames to prevent loops in a ring in a steady state
RPL Owner Node which has the RPL port in the ring
Ring index Identifier assigned for the device within the ring
Ring ID ID used to identify the ring
R-APS control frame Frame used to control ring switching

EtherOAM Functions
2-251
EtherRing status
The following node and port states can be caused by the EtherRing function.

Node status
Node status is described below.

Node status Description
idle State where only an RPL port has been blocked and no fault has
occurred at every link in the ring
protection State where one or more failures occurred at a link(s) in the ring, or
switchback has been performed after a fault recovery

Port status
Port statuses are described below.

Port status Description
rpl-block State where an RPL port has been blocked
This state can be caused at a port that has been set as an RPL port.
forward State where user frames and R-APS control frames can be
communicated
signal-fail State where a link fault was detected and the port with the fault has been
blocked
recovery State where a link fault has been recovered
wait-to-restore State where a switchback to the steady state has been performed after a
link fault recovery
This state can be caused at a port that has been set as an RPL port.

EtherOAM Functions
2-252
Correlation between node status and port status
Correlation between node status and port status is described below.

Port status
Node status
rpl-block forward signal-fail recovery
wait-to-
restore
idle
protection
: Correlated
: Not correlated

Status change trigger
Triggers for change of node and port status are described below.

Status change trigger Description
local-nr Status change caused by NR order from local node
local-sf Status change caused by SF detection at local node
remote-nr Status change caused by NR order from remote node
remote-sf Status change caused by SF detection at remote node

Memo The port status and status change trigger displayed by the "show ether-ring status"
command is "---" by default of ring setting.

EtherOAM Functions
2-253
Types of EtherRing failure
Failures detected in EtherRing are described below.

SF failure
The following failures lead the EtherRing function to switch a path as signal-fail (SF) failures.

Failure Description
Link down Link down of a port was detected.
Link down caused by a port block is detected without any protection time.
LOC
(Loss Of Continuity)
LOC was detected by EtherOAM ETH-CC function.
LOC of lower level than the MEG level which has been set for the control
VLAN of EtherRing is detected.

R-APS failure
The EtherRing function monitors the following failure as an R-APS failure.

Failure Description
Loop Detection Frame loop was detected in the ring.
<Detection condition>
Detected when 16 R-APS control frames are received within 10msec
per instance
<Release condition>
Released at a deletion by the command

EtherOAM Functions
2-254
Enable EtherRing.
Set the EtherRing control VLAN.
Set the RPL port.
Set various timers for EtherRing.
Disables EtherRing.
Setting EtherRing
Each command needs to be set to get the EtherRing function to work. Follow the procedure
below.

Enabling EtherRing 2-254

Setting EtherRing control VLAN 2-255

Setting RPL port 2-255

Setting EtherRing timer 2-256

The following command needs to be set to disable the EtherRing function.

Disabling EtherRing 2-264

Enabling EtherRing
Enables the EtherRing function. Select the ports to be used and also set the switchback mode.

Commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
show ether-ring config Display of EtherRing configuration information

EtherOAM Functions
2-255
Setting EtherRing control VLAN
Sets the control VLAN. Set the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority value.

Commands
set ether-ring control-vlan Setting of EtherRing control VLAN

Memo Ring ID is used for the value of lower 1 byte of the destination MAC address of the R-APS
control frame.
Note The value of the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority need to be set with a
common value among all nodes in the ring.
Note This unit supports the single ring only. "1" can be set for the ring ID.
Note If you have performed the VLAN setting for the port to be used in the ring before executing
this command, a loop may occur. Be sure to execute this command to check EtherRing
operation before setting the VLAN for the relevant port.

Setting RPL port
Sets an RPL port. Select one node out of the all nodes within the ring, and execute this command
for any port that belongs to the ring. When you set an RPL port, the R-APS control frames
transmission to each node starts.

Commands
set ether-ring rpl-owner Setting of EtherRing RPL port

Note If you set or clear an RPL port during operation, the EtherRing status of the node is
switched to the default state.
Note If you set multiple RPL ports within the same ring, switching operation does not performed
correctly because the ring is split. Be sure to set one RPL port in one ring.

EtherOAM Functions
2-256
Setting EtherRing timer
(1) WTR (Wait to Restore) timer
Sets the protection time to switchback operation after a SF failure recovery. The protection time
can be set only for the node to which the RPL port setting has been performed.

Default value 5min
Customizable range 5 to 12min (in increments of 1min)

Commands
set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

(2) Guard timer
Set the time for temporarily discarding the received R-APS control frames to prevent inconsistency
of status among other units in case of a SF failure recovery. Set a higher value than the round
trip time of one ring for this timer.

Default value 500msec
Customizable range 10 to 2000msec (in increments of 10msec)

Commands
set ether-ring time Setting of EtherRing timer

EtherOAM Functions
2-257
Setting examples
As the configuration shown below, EtherRing settings are performed for port 25 and 26 of the
2GBE line card in Unit A,B and C. Communication is performed between ports 17 of CPUSW
card in Unit A, B and C.

CX2200 Unit A CX2200 Unit C
CX2200 Unit B
Port 25 Port 26
Port 25
Port 26
Port 25
Port 26
RPL Owner
RPL port
Unblocked port
Blocked port
MEP
ETH-CCM frame flow
R-APS control frame flow
User frame
26 25
A
B
C
25 26
25 26
EtherOAM Functions
2-258
The setting procedure to use EtherRing with the network configuration given in the previous page
is described below for each unit.
When using the EtherRing function, executing the command in the wrong order may cause a frame
loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to set EtherRing in the following order.

<Unit A>
(1) Enabling EtherRing
(2) Setting EtherRing control VLAN
(3) Setting EtherRing Guard timer
(4) Setting a tagbase VLAN for control VLAN
(5) Setting MEG, MEP and associated MEP
(6) Setting ETH-CCM frame transmission/reception
(7) Setting portbase/tagbase VLAN for user VLAN

EtherOAM Functions
2-259


*Switch# set ether-ring 1 enable 25 26 revertive
*Switch# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 3000 7 5
*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 guard 1000
*Switch# set vlan member 3000 tagbase 25,26
*Switch# set ether-oam meg 10 MEG123 5 period 3.33ms
*Switch# set ether-oam peer-mep 110 100
*Switch# set vlan member 10 portbase 17 tagbase 25,26
*Switch#
*Switch# show ether-ring config
Ether Ring Configuration
========================
Revertive RPL Guard
Index Port Mode Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)
--------------------------------------------------------
1 25,26 revertive --- --- 1000

Ether Ring Frame Configuration
==============================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)
Protocol Type : 0x8902
===============================================
Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority
-----------------------------------------------
1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#

(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
EtherOAM Functions
2-260
<Unit B>
(3) Setting RPL port
(5) Setting EtherRing WTR timer
(6) Setting tagbase VLAN for control VLAN

EtherOAM Functions
2-261


*Switch# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 26
*Switch# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12
*Switch#
========================
Revertive RPL Guard
--------------------------------------------------------
1 25,26 revertive 26 12 1000

==============================
===============================================
-----------------------------------------------
1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
EtherOAM Functions
2-262
<Unit C>
(4) Setting a tagbase VLAN for control VLAN

EtherOAM Functions
2-263

*Switch#
========================
Revertive RPL Guard
--------------------------------------------------------
1 25,26 revertive --- --- 1000

==============================
===============================================
-----------------------------------------------
1 1 3000 7 5

*Switch#
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
EtherOAM Functions
2-264
Disabling EtherRing
Disables the EtherRing function. Control VLAN, RPL port setting and timer setting are all cleard
all together.

Commands
set ether-ring Setting of EtherRing enable/disable

Disabling the EtherRing function when VLAN setting is still remained on the port may cause a
frame loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to disable the function in the following order for
every node.
(1) Clearing the portbase VLAN for user VLAN (tagbase VLAN setting [without VLAN])
(2) Clearing tagbase VLAN for control/user VLAN
(3) Disabling EtherRing

*Switch# set vlan tagbase 17
*Switch#
*Switch# clear vlan tagbase 25
*Switch#
*Switch# clear vlan tagbase 26
*Switch#
*Switch# set ether-ring 1 disable
*Switch#
*Switch#
========================

==============================

*Switch#

(3)
(2)
(1)
EtherOAM Functions
2-265
Troubleshooting
When using the EtherRing function, some settings related to other functions or settings between
nodes within a ring may affect the operation of EtherRing function. Frequently encountered
trouble is given below. If you have encountered the same symptom, check the items to be
confirmed and solutions.

Symptom check point Action
Is the network configuration in
the form of a ring?
Configure the network in the
form of a ring with the ports to
be used with EtherRing.
Have the VLAN that was
specified as an EtherRing
control VLAN been set with
tagbase for every port to be
used with EtherRing?
Set the VLAN ID that has been
specified for the R-APS control
frame with tagbase for every
port to be used with EtherRing.
Is the value of EtherRing
control VLAN setting the same
among all nodes within the
ring?
Set a common value among all
nodes for a ring ID, control
VLAN ID and MEG Level.
EtherRing does not start and is
still in the initial status after the
EtherRing settings
Haven't RPL Owner been set,
or have it been set for multiple
nodes?
Set one node within one ring
as the RPL Owner.

Configuration Data
2-266
This subsection describes the structure of the
CX2200 configuration data.
This subsection describes three types of
configuration data used in CX2200.
2.7 Configuration Data
2.7.1 About Configuration Data
This section discusses the following topics.

2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data 2-267

2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data 2-268

Configuration Data
2-267
2.7.1.1 Structure of configuration data
Configuration data refers to the set of data that determines the behavior of CX2200.
The following figure shows the structure of the CX2200 configuration data.

Built-in Flash memory
Main memory
Running
configuration
data
Startup
configuration
data
Initial
configuration
data
Reference
show startup-config command
upload startup-config command

Setting
write memory command
clear startup-config command
download startup-config command
Copy at
startup
Save write
memory
command
Automatically
set by
software if
startup-config
does not exist
in ACT at
startup
Reference
show running-config command
upload running-config command

Setting
set/clear commands
download running-config command
Configuration Data
2-268
2.7.1.2 Types of configuration data
CX2200 has three types of configuration data - running configuration data, startup configuration
data, and initial configuration data.
All these types of configuration data can be added, changed, referenced, and deleted as
necessary. The procedures, however, differ depending on the type of configuration data.

Running configuration data
The running configuration data is the setting information used in the current operating status of
CX2200.
The running configuration data is all deleted at the time of startup, and the startup configuration
data is copied if it exists.
If the startup configuration data does not exist, the initial configuration data is copied.
If you want to use the currently used running configuration data again the next time you start up
CX2200, save the configuration data to built-in flash memory by using the "write memory"
command.
The running configuration data can be added, changed, and deleted by using the set/clear
commands and "download running-config" command.
The set data can be retrieved by using the "show running-config" command or "upload
running-config" command.

Startup configuration data
The startup configuration data is the setting information that is stored in the CX2200 built-in flash
memory for backup purposes.
The startup configuration data is not lost even if the power is turned off.
The startup configuration data is copied to the running configuration data file at the time of startup.
If you want to get the currently stored startup configuration data reflected on the operation, you
need to restart.
The startup configuration data cannot be added.
The startup configuration data can be changed and deleted by using the "write memory"/"clear
startup-config" command or the "download startup-config" command.
The set data can be retrieved by using the "show startup-config" command and the "upload
startup-config" command.

Configuration Data
2-269
Initial configuration data
The initial configuration data is the setting information applied in the initial status of CX2200.
If the startup configuration data has been cleared and is not available or remains in the factory-set
condition, the software copies the initial configuration data to the running configuration data file.
The initial configuration data cannot be added, changed, deleted, or retrieved.

Configuration Data
2-270
This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2200 running configuration
data.
This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2200 startup configuration
data.
This subsection describes how to manage the CX2200 configuration data using an
FTP server.
2.7.2 Configuration Data
Management
This section discusses the following topics.

2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data 2-271

2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data 2-272

2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server 2-276

Configuration Data
2-271
2.7.2.1 Setting and referencing the running
configuration data

Setting the running configuration data
The running configuration data is the setting information concerning the current operating status.
Therefore, it can be updated using the relevant setting commands.
These are typically those commands beginning with set or clear that you can enter in the privileged
mode.

Referencing the running configuration data
The running configuration data can be referenced using the "show running-config" command.

Memo When the set/clear command is executed from another session during displaying data by
the "show running-config" command, the setting is reflected to the system, but it is not
reflected to the running "show running-config" command. In addition, when the "show
running-config" commands are executed by multiple sessions, the data will not be
reflected until the display for all the sessions is completed.
Note The "show running-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.
The setting commands displayed by the "show running-config" command are only those
that differ from the initial configuration data.

Command
show running-config Display of running configuration

Configuration Data
2-272
2.7.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup
configuration data

Setting the startup configuration data
The "write memory" command allows you to save the current running configuration data to built-in
flash memory as the startup configuration data.
Also, the "clear startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data simultaneously.

Commands
write memory Saving of setting information
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

Referencing the startup configuration data
The startup configuration data can be referenced using the "show startup-config" command.

Note The "show startup-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.
The setting commands displayed by the "show startup-config" command are only those
that differ from the initial configuration data.

Command
show startup-config Display of startup configuration

Configuration Data
2-273
Displaying differences between the startup and
running configuration data
If there is any difference between the startup configuration data and running configuration data, "*"
appears in front of the command prompt.
When the "write memory" command saves the running configuration data to built-in flash memory
as the startup configuration data, "*" disappears.
Changing the running configuration data after executing the "write memory" command results in
differences in the configuration data. The configuration data difference indicator is displayed even
if you undo the changes you have made.

Memo If the system does not have its own startup configuration data, there are no differences
because it cannot check for configuration data difference at startup.
Memo If the system starts with corrupted startup configuration data, it is considered that there
are configuration data differences. In that case, it seems that no startup configuration
data is set.
Memo If the system starts in a condition that the device configuration has been changed since
the startup configuration had been saved, it is considered that there are configuration data
differences.

Configuration Data
2-274
Recovery configuration and boot-up messages
If any startup configuration data has not been set, the system restarts with the initial configuration
status. In this case, the restart completion message will be as follows.

Standard
TRAP MIB
Message
Additional information 1
(Cause of restart)
Meaning
POWER-ON RESET Restart caused by
Power on
COMMAND RESET Restart caused by a
reset command
cold start IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP
(CAUSE:%s)
PROCESSOR FAILURE Restart caused by a
failure

If the startup configuration data has been set, the system checks whether the startup configuration
setting can be reflected. If it can be, the system restarts with the startup configuration status. If
the startup configuration data has been damaged, the system restarts with the emergency
configuration data.
If the device configuration has been changed since the startup configuration data had been saved,
only the corresponding line card and CPUSW setting are reflected using startup configuration data.
The restart completion message is as follows.

Standard
TRAP MIB
Message
(Cause of restart)
(For recovery
configuration)
POWER-ON RESET STARTUP CONFIG
COMMAND RESET EMERGENCY CONFIG
warm start IF RECOVER CONFIG BOOT UP
(CAUSE:%s,BOOT:%s)
PROCESSOR FAILURE PART OF STARTUP
CONFIG

Configuration Data
2-275
The detailed information for the additional information 2 (For recovery configuration) is as follows.

For recovery
configuration
Meaning Condition Configuration content
STARTUP CONFIG Reflects the startup
configuration data
Startup configuration
data has been saved.
The whole startup
configuration data will be
reflected.
EMERGENCY
CONFIG
Reflects the emergency
configuration data
Startup configuration
data has been damaged.
Default configuration
PART OF
STARTUP CONFIG
Partly reflects the startup
configuration data
Line card configuration
has been changed.
Configuration data of
CPUSW and line cards
corresponding to the
configuration will be
reflected using startup
configuration data.

Memo If the system configuration is changed, the system restarts with the configuration data
partly reflected using the startup configuration data even if line card setting has not been
performed for the new configuration.
Memo Even if the system has been restarted using partly reflected the startup configuration data,
the whole contents of the startup configuration data can be reflected when restarting the
system restoring the configuration to the one as the startup configuration data had been
saved.

Configuration Data
2-276
2.7.2.3 Managing configuration data using a
server
CX2200 allows the running and startup configuration data to be uploaded to a server for backup
purposes and to be downloaded from the server for data restoration. The server enables the files
you upload and download to be managed and edited in text format.

Note If the software version of the client to which the data is downloaded is different from that
used when uploading, the configuration data may not be set properly.

Setting the console port and server
Managing the configuration data requires an FTP server.
Connect the console port and the server via a network.
Either the outbound or inbound console port may be used.
For details, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of
this manual.

Configuration Data
2-277
Uploading and downloading the running configuration
data
The "upload running-config" command allows you to upload the running configuration data to an
FTP server for storage.
The "download running-config" command lets you download the running configuration data from
the FTP server to make additional settings in the current running configuration data.

Note The "download running-config" command is intended to overwrite or add new settings to
the currently set running configuration data.
Any command that conflicts with the current system configuration results in an execution
error. Only those commands that can be executed will be reflected in the running
configuration data.
In the event of this error, the following reply message is output:
Because there is execution error command in downloaded configuration, this part has
not been reflected. : <number of configuration data items not reflected>. First Error :
<line number of the first configuration data that caused the error>.
Check the downloaded text configuration data, and enter the command again.
Note While the "download running-config" command is executing, you cannot initialize the line
card.
Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as
the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24
and 192.168.129.0/24, that server can be configured although communication cannot be
accomplished normally.

"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2200
configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the running
configuration data.

Configuration Data
2-278
Input example

Commands
upload running-config Uploading of running configuration to FTP server
download running-config Downloading of running configuration from FTP server

*Switch# download running-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt
FTP Login Name : cx2200
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring..
Data setting...
*Switch#

Configuration Data
2-279
Uploading and downloading the startup configuration
data
The "upload startup-config" command allows you to upload the startup configuration data to an
FTP server for storage.
The "download startup-config" command lets you download the startup configuration data from the
FTP server to set the downloaded data as new startup configuration data replacing all the current
data.

Note The "download startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data currently
stored in built-in flash memory and saves the downloaded data to built-in flash memory as
new startup configuration data.
Note If the downloaded startup configuration data contains any command that causes an
execution error due to an invalid command format or other reason, all the downloaded
configuration data will be discarded and the startup configuration data stored in built-in
flash memory will not be updated.

"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2200
configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the startup
configuration data.

Configuration Data
2-280
Input example

Commands
upload startup-config Uploading of startup configuration to FTP server
download startup-config Downloading of startup configuration from FTP server

*Switch# download startup-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt
Data Transferring..
Data setting..
Writing Flash Memory.........
*Switch#

Configuration Data
2-281
About configuration files in the FTP server
You can edit the configuration data uploaded to the FTP server by using a text editor.
The edited configuration data can be downloaded as running or startup configuration data.

Note The file names and path names of the files uploaded to the FTP server are subject to the
limitations shown in the following table.

Characters usable
in file names
Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:
% & , . = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ -
Characters usable
in path names
Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:
% & , / : = [ ] ^ _ { } ~ -

Memo The upload and download time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data
being transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN
cabling.
You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the
Ctrl + c key combination.
After checking the size of the data to be downloaded and the conditions of the network
and FTP server, enter the command again.

(blank page)

Installation
3-1

3 Installation
3.1 Outline..........................................3-2
3.2 Settings for Network
Connection ........................................3-3
3.2.1 Installation Procedure..................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Unit Mounting ................................................. 3-4
3.2.3 Cable Connection........................................... 3-7
3.2.4 Power on and Login...................................... 3-21
3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance ................ 3-34
3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase....................... 3-54

Outline
3-2
3.1 Outline
This chapter describes the procedure for installing the CX2200, connecting cables and power, and
setting consoles.

Settings for Network Connection
3-3
Select the connection mode corresponding to
the network environment to be configured and
connect cables.
Mount the CX2200 in the 19-inch rack.
Turn on the CX2200 and log in it.
Perform settings for remote maintenance by
inband network communication and outband
network communication.
Perform basic settings of the CX2200 after
purchase.
3.2 Settings for Network
Connection
3.2.1 Installation Procedure
This section describes the procedure for installation of the CX2200.

3.2.2 Unit Mounting 3-4

3.2.3 Cable Connection 3-7

3.2.4 Power on and Login 3-21

3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance 3-34

3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase 3-54

3-4
3.2.2 Unit Mounting

Confirming mounting location
The CX2200 can be mounted on the 19-inch rack. To mount it in the 19-inch rack, use the screws
in the standard accessories.
Be sure not to mount the unit in the following locations to prevent operation errors, troubles,
electric shocks, etc.:
Unsteady locations (such as shaking stands and sloping locations)
Locations where the unit may be bathed in water or chemicals
Locations near devices emitting strong magnetism
Locations preventing radiation and ill-ventilated locations
The place of installation is restricted toTelecommunication Center and similar environment.
Temporary transmission quality dagration may occur due to by electromagnetic distubances such
as lightning or ESD.
Use shielded cables only for line cables.
Mounting procedure
Be sure to follow the following procedure to mount the CX2200 on the 19-inch rack:
1. Mount the brackets (non-accessories) at the 19-inch rack side.
Prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for them.

3-5
2. Mount the CX2200 in the 19-inch rack and fix it with large screws (M5) at the left and right
sides of the front.

3. Mount the FAN module and the cards.
4. Connect the ground and power cables. (See "3.2.4 Power on and Login".)

Notes
(1) The mounting and replacement work should be performed by the maintenance personnel.
Be sure to wear the wrist strap connected to the ESD terminal of the unit during the work.
(2) The screws are used to mount the chassis to the rack. Tighten the screws firmly using tools.
(3) When mounting the power module, fan module and cards, insert them horizontally along with
the rails in the chassis up to the back. Mount each card, not applying excessive force to it by
using the ejectors or knobs at both ends of the card. For details, see "4.2.12 Replacement".
(4) Mount each card in its correct slot. If a card is mounted in an incorrect slot, the card and
chassis may be destroyed.
(5) If a LINE1 or LINE2 card is not installed, mount a dedicated blank panel instead.

3-6
The metal fittings are a set of flanges (for right and left sides) of the following size. These flanges
have already been attached to the unit. The flanges cannot be mounted in some cases
depending on the type of the 19-inch rack. So, confirm that they can be mounted in advance.
If they cannot be mounted, prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for
them.
The metal fittings, conforming to the Kawamura Electric manufactured-[HD RACK] and its size, are
19-inch rack-dedicated metal fittings.

Fig. Flanges (L)

3-7
3.2.3 Cable Connection

3.2.3.1 Network connection mode
The CX2200 allows various types of network connection modes.

CX2200 connection example

Base station
Base station
Ether unit
Console terminal
Console terminal
CX2200
3-8
3.2.3.2 Cable connection

Ethernet cable types
Ethernet
See the following table for the Ethernet cable types.

Table Ethernet Cable Types
System Connector Cable type Max. cable length
10/100BASE-TX RJ-45 STP category 5 or higher 100 m
(full duplex)

The CX2200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).

Giga-bit Ethernet
See the following table for the Giga-bit Ethernet cable types.

Table Giga-bit Ethernet Cable Types
System Connector Cable type Core Max. cable length
1000BASE-SX LC Multi-mode
optical fiber
50 m 500 m
(full duplex)
1000BASE-LX LC Single-mode
optical fiber
9 m 10000 m
(full duplex)
1000BASE-ZX LC Single-mode
optical fiber
9 m 70000 m
(full duplex)
1000BASE-BX LC Single-mode
optical fiber
9 m 10000 m
(full duplex)
1000BASE-T RJ-45 STP category 5E
or higher
100 m
(full duplex)

3-9
T1/E1
The T1/E1 cable is connected by the MDR68-pin (female). The following table describes the
terminal accommodation. The T1 impedance is 100 and the E1 impedance is 120 or 75 .
Use the cable with the same impedance when possible.

Table Accommodation of T1/E1 Interface (1/2)
Pin# Signal Name Pin# Signal Name
1 GND 35 GND
2 CH16_IN+ 36 CH16_IN-
3 CH16_OUT+ 37 CH16_OUT-
4 CH15_IN+ 38 CH15_IN-
6 CH14_IN+ 40 CH14_IN-
8 CH13_IN+ 42 CH13_IN-
10 CH12_IN+ 44 CH12_IN-
12 CH11_IN+ 46 CH11_IN-
14 CH10_IN+ 48 CH10_IN-
16 CH9_IN+ 50 CH9_IN-
18 CH8_IN+ 52 CH8_IN-
20 CH7_IN+ 54 CH7_IN-
22 CH6_IN+ 56 CH6_IN-
23 CH6-OUT+ 57 CH6-OUT-
24 CH5_IN+ 58 CH5_IN-
26 CH4_IN+ 60 CH4_IN-
28 CH3_IN+ 62 CH3_IN-
3-10
30 CH2_IN+ 64 CH2_IN-
32 CH1_IN+ 66 CH1_IN-
34 GND 68 GND

Table Accommodation of T1/E1 Interface (2/2)
1 GND 35 GND
2 CH48_IN+ 36 CH48_IN-
4 CH47_IN+ 38 CH47_IN-
6 CH46_IN+ 40 CH46_IN-
8 CH45_IN+ 42 CH45_IN-
10 CH44_IN+ 44 CH44_IN-
12 CH43_IN+ 46 CH43_IN-
14 CH42_IN+ 48 CH42_IN-
16 CH41_IN+ 50 CH41_IN-
18 CH40_IN+ 52 CH40_IN-
20 CH39_IN+ 54 CH39_IN-
22 CH38_IN+ 56 CH38_IN-
23 CH38-OUT+ 57 CH38-OUT-
24 CH37_IN+ 58 CH37_IN-
3-11
26 CH36_IN+ 60 CH36_IN-
28 CH35_IN+ 62 CH35_IN-
30 CH34_IN+ 64 CH34_IN-
32 CH33_IN+ 66 CH33_IN-
34 GND 68 GND

STM-1/OC-3 ATM
See the table below for the ATM cable types.

Table ATM Cable Types
Connector Cable type Core Max. cable length
SONET OC3 IR-1 LC Single-mode
optical fiber
10 m 15 km
SONET OC3 LR-1 LC Single-mode
optical fiber
10 m 40 km
SONET OC3 LR-2 LC Single-mode
optical fiber
10 m 80 km

3-12
Cable connection method
The procedure for connecting cables to the CX2200 is described below. For more information of
the cable connection method, see each item in the flowchart.

1000BASE-SX port connection 3-13
1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection 3-13
1000BASE-BX port connection 3-14
1000BASE-T port connection 3-14
10/100BASE-TX port connection 3-15

T1/E1 port connection 3-16

STM-1/OC-3 port connection 3-17

Connecting clock interface 3-17

Local console connection 3-18

Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection 3-19 1000BASE-SX port connection 3-13
1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection 3-13
1000BASE-BX port connection 3-14
1000BASE-T port connection 3-14
10/100BASE-TX port connection 3-15
Remote maintenance by outband
network communication
Remote maintenance by
inband network
communication
Ether port
connection
Local console port
connection
Connection for remote maintenance
STM1/OC-3port
connection
T1/E1port
connection
Clock interface
connection
3-13
1000BASE-SX port connection
The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-SX port (LC connector).
The connection procedure is described below.
(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-SX port and LC connector optical
fiber cables (two cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of this
unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of the HUB.
(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of
this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (multi-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-SX port specifications of
this unit.

1000BASE-LX/ZX port connection
The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port (LC connector).
(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port and LC connector
optical fiber cables (two cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX TX port of
this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX RX port of the HUB.
(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX RX
port of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX TX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-LX/ZX port specifications
of this unit.
RX
1000BASE-SX port
TX RX
Multi-mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors
Another unit
(such as CX2600)
TX
RX
TX RX
1000BASE-LX/ZX port Single mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors
TX
Another unit
(such as CX2600)
3-14
1000BASE-BX port connection
The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-BX port (LC connector).
(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-BX port and LC connector optical
fiber cables (one cable per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-BX port of this unit
and the other end to the 1000BASE-BX port of the HUB.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-BX port specifications of
this unit.
Use a 1000BASE-BX10-D SFP and a 1000BASE-BX10-U SFP as one pair between the units.

1000BASE-T port connection
The CX2200 mounts the 1000BASE-T port (RJ45 connector).
For connection with a router
(1) Prepare a router mounting the 1000BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher)
straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the 1000BASE-T
port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the
1000BASE-T port of the router.

Fig. Connection to 1000BASE-T of Router

1000BASE-BX port
Single mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors
Another unit
(such as CX2600)
RJ-45 STP straight cable
1000BASE-T port
Router
3-15
10/100BASE-TX port connection
The CX2200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX port (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).
For connection with a HUB
(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10/100BASE-TX and an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or
higher for the 10BASE-TX connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX
connection) straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-TX connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of
this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-TX connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of
the HUB.
RJ-45STPstraightcable

10/100BASE-TX
port HUB

Fig. HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-TX

For connection to the 10/100BASE-T cascade port (MDI) of the HUB, when the Ether port auto
negotiation is disabled, use the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable.

3-16
T1/E1 port connection
The CX2200 mounts the T1/E1 port (MDR 68-pin female connector).
(1) Prepare a TDM unit/ATM (when ATMP is connected) unit mounting T1/E1 interface and an
RJ-45 STP cable with one end which accommodates signals defined in ANSI T1.403. (For
signal accommodation of CX2200, see "1.3.2 Interface Specifications > 1.3.2.1 Line interface
specifications > T1/E1 interface" in this manual. Use a straight cable or crossing cable in
accordance with signal accommodation of the remote device and the connector type.)
(2) Connect the MDR 68-pin side of the RJ-45 STP cable to the T1/E1 port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP cable to the T1/E1 port of the TDM unit/ATM unit.

Fig. T1/E1 Cable Connection

When connecting CX2200 T1/E1 ports between stations, use the special conversion box [option
CONVU-DS] or [option CONVU-RJ].
The conversion box supports T1 (100)/ E1 (120) and converts from the MDR68 connector to
Dsub37 or RJ45 connector. The conversion box does not support E1 (75).
For connection between the CX2200 and the conversion box, use the special connection cable
[option MDR68-MDR68 cable].
For the detailed specification, refer to the [Option CONVU-DS] or [Option CONVU-RJ] Instruction
Manual or check with your distributor.

Fig. T1/E1 cable connection (Connection between stations)

T1/E1(D-Sub 37())
TDM
RJ-45
T1/E1 port (MDR 68-pin (female))
Dedicated cable
RJ-45, etc.
TDM unit (switch,
base station, etc.)
CX2200
Special connection cable
(MDR68-MDR68)
Conversion box
Connection cable
(Dsub37/RJ45))
The other
station
3-17
STM-1/OC-3 port connection
The CX2200 mounts the STM-1/OC-3 port (SFP supported connector).
(1) Prepare an ATM switch etc. mounting a STM-1/OC-3 interface and optical fiber cables (two
cables per one interface).
(2) Connect the one end of the optical fiber cable to the STM-1/OC-3 TX port of the unit, and
connect the other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of the ATM switch etc.
(3) Connect the one end of the other optical fiber cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of the unit,
and connect the other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 TX port of the ATM switch etc.

Prepare optical fiber cables (single mode) which are complied with the STM-1/OC-3 port
specification of this unit.

Connecting clock interface
The CX2200 is equipped with a clock interface port to synchronize with the network clock.
Connect to the clock supply destination using the clock supply cable [Dsub 9-pin cable]. The
procedure is as follows:
(1) Prepare the clock supply destination and the Dsub 9-pin cable. (For CX2200 signal
installation, refer to "1.3.2.3 Clock interface specification" of this manual.) Prepare a cable
according to the signal storage on the clock supply destination side and the connector shape.
(2) Connect one end of the Dsub 9-pin cable to the clock interface port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the Dsub 9-pin cable to the clock input port of the clock supply
destination.

Fig. Clock interface cable connection

EXTCLK interface
D-Sub 9-pin Cable
Clock supply destination
TX RX
STM-1/OC-3 port
Optical fiber cable ATM switch etc.
RX
TX
3-18
Local console connection
The CX2200 mounts the console port (asynchronous serial DCE mode).
Connect the unit to a device with which asynchronous transmission is performed by using a
console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable].
To operate the CX2200, a console terminal enabling non-procedural asynchronous communication
by RS-232C is required.
The default communication parameter setting values are as follows:
- 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
The connection procedure is as follows:
(1) Prepare a console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable].
(2) Connect the RJ-45 side of the console communication cable [optional CX2200 console cable
to the RS-232C port of this unit.
(3) Connect the D-Sub 9-pin side of the console communication cable [optional CX2200 console
cable] to a console terminal (such as a PC).

Fig. Console Terminal Connection

When the console terminal mounts an RS-232C port having a different form, prepare an RS-232C
conversion adapter or a male/female conversion adapter.

CX2200 console cable
RS-232C port Console terminal
3-19
Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection
The Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection procedure is described below.

For connection with HUB MDI-X port
(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP
(category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the
100BASE-T connection) straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-T port
(CONSOLE) of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection
and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-T
(MDI-X) port of the HUB.

Fig. HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-T (MDI-X)

For connection to HUB 10/100BASE-T cascade port (MDI), use an RJ-45 STP (category 3 or
higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection)
crossing cable.

RJ-45 UTP

Console port
RJ-45 STP straight cable
3-20
For connection to a console terminal (such as PC)
(1) Prepare a console terminal (PC) mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-T and an RJ-45 STP
(category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the
100BASE-T connection) crossing cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable to the 10/100BASE-T port
(CONSOLE) of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 STP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection
and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-T connection) crossing cable to the 10BASE-T port
or the 100BASE-T port of the console terminal.

Fig. Terminal (Such as PC) Connection (10/100BASE-T)

RJ-45 UTP
Console port
RJ-45 STP crossing cable
Maintenance
terminal
3-21
Confirm cable connection between console
port and console terminal.
Connect power cables and confirm display of
login message and login prompt.
Log in CX2200 through the local console
connection and set the password required for
login.
3.2.4 Power on and Login
This section describes the procedure to log in the CX2200 by the local console connection.
In addition to the local console connection, you can log in the CX2200 through up to four sessions
by the telnet connection from a remote console.
For remote console settings, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote
Maintenance".

3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection 3-22

3.2.4.2 Power on 3-22

3.2.4.3 Login 3-27

3-22
3.2.4.1 Confirming console port connection
Confirm that the cable is connected to the console port correctly.

3.2.4.2 Power on

Power cable connection
The CX2200 uses a DC-48V power supply.
When restarting this unit after turning power off, turn on power after a while. If you turn on the
power immediately, this may cause a failure.
After turning on the power, be sure not to turn off the power until this unit is completely started. If
this unit is turned off during its start, this may cause a failure.

Ground connection
Be sure to connect the ground by using the FG cable with the ground terminal on the front of this
unit.
The ground connection decreases the damage by lightning strike and prevents electric shock and
noises.

Note Be sure to connect the grounding wire for safety.
Note Be sure not to connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe. If connected, a fire may be
caused.
Note Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the grounding wire.

3-23
DC Power cable connection
(1) Prepare a DC power supply (-48 V) having the power capacity necessary for using this unit.
(2) Gather power cables by using the provided power connector.

3-24
(3) Connect the power connector to the power of the unit.

Fig. DC Power Connection

Note Connect/disconnect the power cables with the ground conductor connected.
Note Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the power cables.
Note Measure the voltages at the DC power connection terminals (-48V and G) to confirm the
voltages are 0 (power off).

3-25
System start procedure after power-on
When power is turned on, the system starts in the following order:
(1) The system boots and the diagnosis executed..
(2) The DRAM memory area is cleared.
(3) A boot entry is executed and the program file set in the built-in flash memory is loaded in
DRAM as a running program.
(4) The startup configuration data in the built-in flash memory is loaded in DRAM as running
configuration data. If the startup configuration data is not found, the initial configuration
contents are loaded in DRAM as running configuration data for starting.
For more information of the configuration data, see "2.7 Configuration Data > 2.7.1 About
Configuration Data" of this manual.
(5) When self diagnosis/memory diagnosis and configuration data loading terminate normally, the
"Welcome to CX2200 System" message and the login prompt are displayed as shown in the
following example.
If you need to end the operation after turning the power on, confirm that the prompt is displayed
and no commands are executed and then turn the power off.
When the system is restarted by the reset system command, it starts in the same order as that
performed when power is turned on, excluding the self diagnosis/memory diagnosis,. In this case,
all running configuration data before the restart is lost.

3-26
Input example

System Boot

Copyright 2001-2002 NEC

CPU: PPC 405GP
Version: 5.4
BSP version: 1.2/5
Boot version: K01.00
Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54

Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...
memory test start ...... end
... coming up latest image

auto-booting...

Starting at 0x10038...

Attaching interface lo0...done

Adding 6418 symbols for standalone.

System is coming up now ..............


Switch>

3-27
3.2.4.3 Login

About user authority
The CX2200 login modes include the "general mode" and "privileged mode".
In each mode, commands corresponding to the mode can be input. For more information of the
commands, refer to the "Command Reference" (separate manual).
General mode
This mode is used by general users. In this mode only a part of commands can be used.
Setting commands excluding autonomous message and scroll control commands cannot be
used.
Privileged mode
This mode is used by privileged users. All setting commands and display commands can be
used.

Command prompt display
The command prompt displayed on the screen indicates which user authority is available.

<General mode>
In the general mode, the prompt is indicated by ">".

Input example

<Privileged mode>
In the privileged mode, the prompt is indicated by "#".

Input example

Switch>

Switch#

3-28
When there are differences between startup-config settings and running-config settings, "*" is
displayed at the beginning of the command prompt.

<When there are no differences>
When there are no differences, a "space" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.

Input example

<When there are differences>
When there are differences, "*" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.

Input example

Memo Characters "Switch" displayed in the prompt are set as the default.
The prompt name can be changed to a new prompt name by setting of the prompt display
change using the set terminal prompt command for identifying the unit.
Note If "!" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt, the start processing did not terminate
normally or a CR failure (critical failure) occurred. In this state, normal operations are not
assured.

Command
set terminal prompt Setting of terminal prompt

Switch#

*Switch#

3-29
Login authentication
The CX2200 login authentication methods include "mode login authentication" and "account name
login authentication". When an account is not registered, "mode login authentication" is
performed. When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed.

Mode login authentication
Login authentication is performed by inputting a login password. After login authentication, the
general mode screen is displayed. When no login password is set, the general mode screen is
displayed without login authentication.
The general mode can be changed to the privileged mode by executing the "enable" command in
the general mode and inputting a privileged mode password. If a privileged mode password is not
set, the privileged mode screen is displayed by the [Enter] key.

Memo When a password is set for each mode, password authentication is performed.
Note After login, set a password for security.
Note When an account is registered, login by "mode login authentication" is disabled. A login
password and a privileged mode password can be set. They are enabled when the
account is deleted.

Fig. Mode Transition Diagram during Mode Login Authentication

General mode
Mode login
authentication
Login
password
Privilege mode
exit
exit
Power ON Connection from
telnet
enable
Privilege mode
password
disable
3-30
Commands
disable Switch from privileged mode to general mode
enable Switch from general mode to privileged mode
exit Logout
set enable password Setting of privileged mode password
clear enable password Clearing of privileged mode password
set login password Setting of login password
clear login password Clearing of login password

Account name login authentication
Login authentication is performed by inputting an account and a password. After login
authentication, the general mode or privileged mode screen is displayed according to the user
authority.

Memo The account used for login can be confirmed by the "show session" command.

Fig. Mode Transition Diagram during Account Name Login Authentication

General mode
Account name
login authentication
Account
Password
Privilege mode
exit exit
Power ON
Connection from
telnet
Account
Password
3-31
Forcible logout due to time out
A time out event occurs when no commands are input for a predetermined period of time after
login, and the CX2200 performs forcible logout.

Commands
set terminal logout Setting of automatic logout time
show terminal config Display of terminal information

Account management
When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed from the next
login. To register the account, the general mode (read-only) or privileged mode (read-write) user
authority is required and a password containing four to 16 characters must be registered.
The registered password can be changed by specifying the registered account name and the user
authority and inputting the registered password.
When a new account is registered, login with default account "admin" is enabled. The initial
password of the default account is "admin". The default account password can be changed.
The default account cannot be cleared.
Excluding the default account, up to six accounts can be registered.

Memo When no accounts are registered, also the default account is not displayed by the "show
user account" command.
Note After a new account is registered, change the password of default account "admin" for
security.

Commands
set user account Registration of user account
show user account Display of user account
clear user account Clearing of user account

3-32
Session management
Up to four sessions can be set up by login to the CX2200 by telnet connection from a remote
console in addition to from a local console. Session management displays login statuses and
clears login sessions forcibly.
For remote console settings, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for
Remote Maintenance" of this manual.
If the link with a remote console is disconnected due to a failure in the line, session information is
held for five minutes and deleted.

Commands
show session Display of session
clear session Clearing of session

3-33
Autonomous message
The CX2200 outputs an autonomous message to each console if events such as a failure and
information occur. The "set terminal monitor" command sets the output setting of the autonomous
message. (The default setting of the autonomous message output is "enable" for a serial console
and "disable" for a remote console.)

[1] Occurrence date and time
[2] Message
[3] Additional information

Memo When a login password is set or an account is registered, the autonomous message is
output after login authentication.
Note If a large amount of events occurs and the number of autonomous messages waiting to
be output exceeds 16000, the autonomous message after that is not be output. If this
happens, the following message is output: "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
(CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)". When the output restarts, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
RECOVER" is output.
If the number of autonomous messages waiting to be output exceeds the upper
accumulation limit, the autonomous message after that is not be output either. If this
happens, the following message is output: "There were some autonomous messages
discarded by the buffer overflow."

Commands
set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output

01/01/2000 00:00:37
===================
IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP (CAUSE:POWER-ON RESET)
[1]
[3]
[2]
3-34
Input example
Autonomous message output is set. For RS-232C, the default value is set to output enabled and
for telnet, it is set to output disabled.

3.2.5 Settings for Remote
Maintenance
The CX2200 calls communication through the FastEther (FE) port and GigabitEther (GbE) port
"in-band network communication" and communication through the console port "out-band network
communication". The remote communications enable remote maintenance using telnet from a
remote console.
To enable access from a remote console using telnet, IP addresses must be set. No IP
addresses are factory set for the CX2200. IP addresses setting for the CX2200 is made from the
local console.
When IP address setting is completed and telnet connection is enabled, all commands that can be
used from the local console become available from a remote console.
This section explains the settings to enable access to the CX2200 in the network from a remote
console using a network example shown in the following figure.
In the following figure, communications from remote hosts 1 and 2 are enabled through in-band
network communication and communications from remote hosts 3, 4, and 5 are enabled through
out-band network communication.
*Switch# setal monitor enable
*Switch# show terminal config
Current Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5
Output Length : 22
Alarm Monitor : enabled

Default Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5
Output Length : 22

*Switch#

3-35

For telnet connection, up to four sessions including connections through in-band network
communication and connections through out-band network communication, can be started at the
same time.

192.168.1.254
Gateway
169.127.10.1
Remote host 1
169.127.10.3
CX2200
Higher switch
Local console
RS-232
FE/GbE port
Remote host 2
192.168.1.4
Out-band network
10.42.74.0/16
Console port 1
Remote host 3
10.42.74.25
Remote host 4
10.40.36.123
In-band network
192.168.1.0/24
10.42.74.254
Gateway
10.40.36.1
10.42.74.253
Gateway
10.41.18.1
Remote host 5
10.41.18.124
3-36
Connect cables for in-band network
communication.
Allocate IP addresses to CX2200.
Allocate VLAN ID to CX2200.
Set port blocking or unblocking for in-band
port.
3.2.5.1 Setting IP addresses
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP
addresses. ("xxx" are any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.
IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.
When IP addresses of gateways and various types of servers and managers are set,
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set. When
gateways and various types of servers and managers exist in network addresses 192.168.128.0/24
and 192.168.129.0/24, the servers and managers can be configured but correct communications
cannot be implemented.

3.2.5.2 Remote maintenance through in-band
network
When remote maintenance through in-band network communication is performed for the CX2200,
access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure:
Until the procedure is completed, operations from a remote console are disabled.

Connecting in-band network 3-38

Setting IP addresses 3-38

Setting VLAN ID 3-39

Setting port blocking 3-40

3-37
Limit login through telnet communication.
Check the CX2200 and the remote console
telnet communication status.
Save the set data contents.
Log into CX2200 through telnet
communication from remote console.

Setting telnet connection access list 3-42

Checking communication statuses 3-43

Saving set data 3-44

Login from remote console 3-44

Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the
operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.

3-38
Connecting in-band network
Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the FastEther (FE) port and
GigabitEther (GbE) port.

Setting IP addresses
To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through in-band, IP addresses
must be allocated to the CX2200. And set a default gateway as needed.
The set IP address is used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.
One IP address can be set as the in-band system IP address per unit.
When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks,
communications may not be set up correctly.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP
addresses. ("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and
192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.
Note IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.

3-39
Setting VLAN ID
To perform remote maintenance using the in-band port, a VLAN ID must be set.

Note Only one VLAN ID can be set for the in-band port. The same VLAN ID must be set for
the port of the CX2200 connected to the network (or the higher switch) to which the
remote host is connected.

Commands
set ip address in-band Setting of in-band IP address
set in-band vid Setting of in-band port VLAN
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
show ip config Display of network information
clear ip address in-band Clearing of in-band IP address
clear in-band vid Clearing of in-band port VLAN
clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

3-40
Setting port blocking
Sets port blocking or unblocking for the in-band port and refers the setting.

Commands
set in-band admin Block/unblock of in-band port
show in-band information Display of in-band port setup information

Input example (1/2)
"192.168.1.10" is set as the IP address of the CX2200, "255.255.255.0" is set as the subnet mask,
and "192.168.1.254" is set as the default gateway address.
100 is set as the VLAN ID for the in-band port and unblock the maintenance port.


Switch# set ip address in-band 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0
*Switch# set ip route default 192.168.1.254
*Switch# show ip config

IP Table
========
Management Port MAC Address IP Address Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------------
out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

IP Routing Table
================
Destination Gateway
Index Address Netmask Address Port
------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.254 in-band

*Switch#

3-41
Input example (2/2)

*Switch# set in-band vid 100
*Switch# set in-band admin enable
*Switch# show in-band information
In-band Configuration
=====================
Admin: enabled
VID : 100
Name : default

*Switch#

3-42
Setting telnet connection access list
The CX2200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from
remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. How
to set the telnet connection access list is described below.
When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.
Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the out-band network.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP
addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct
communication cannot be set up.

Commands
set session ip-permit Setting of access list
show session ip-permit Display of access list
clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Input example
IP address "192.168.1.4" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "169.127.10.0/24" is set in
access list 2.

*Switch# set session ip-permit 1 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.255
*Switch# show session ip-permit
Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address Netmask
------------------------------------
1 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.255
2 169.127.10.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch#

3-43
Checking communication statuses
Checks the status of telnet communication between the CX2200 and a remote console from the
local console.

Command
ping Checking of connection with host

Input example
Confirm that communication between the CX2200 and the remote console having IP address
"192.168.1.4" is set up.

*Switch# ping 192.168.1.4

PING 192.168.1.4: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<5ms

--- 192.168.1.4 ping statistics ---
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/1.250/5.000/2.165 ms

*Switch#

3-44
Saving set data
Saves the contents set in the CX2200 into the built-in flash memory.
When IP addresses used in the out-band network are used, restart by executing the "write
memory" command and the "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP
addresses in the in-band network are set.

Command
write memory Saving of setting status

Login from remote console
Logs into the CX2200 from a remote console through telnet communication.
For the login method, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.4 Power on and Login >
3.2.4.3 Login" of this manual.

Input example
telnet connection to the CX2200 from a remote console is established. After the command
prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is enabled.

> telnet 192.168.1.10

Switch>

3-45
Connect cables for out-band network
communication.
Allocate IP addresses to CX2200.
Modify speed for out-band or flow control
settings.
Limit login by telnet communication.
Check the CX2200 and the remote console telnet
communication status.
Save the set data contents.
Log into CX2200 from remote console by telnet
communication.
3.2.5.3 Remote maintenance through
out-band network
When remote maintenance is performed for the CX2200 through out-band network communication,
access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure.
Until the procedure is completed, operations from the remote console are disabled.

Connecting out-band network 3-46

Setting IP addresses 3-46

Setting speed of maintenance port 3-47

Setting telnet connection access list 3-49

Checking communication statuses 3-50

Saving set data 3-51

Login from remote console 3-51

Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the
operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.
3-46
Connecting out-band network
Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the console port.

Setting IP addresses
To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through out-band, IP
addresses must be allocated to the CX2200. And set a default gateway as needed.
The set IP addresses are used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.
One IP address can be set as the out-band system IP address per unit.
When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks,
communications may not be set up correctly.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP
addresses. ("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and
192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.
Note IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.

Commands
set ip address out-band Setting of out-band IP address
set ip route default Setting of default gateway
clear ip address out-band Clearing of out-band IP address
clear ip route default Clearing of default gateway

3-47
Setting speed of maintenance port
Sets speed, duplex mode or flow control for the out-band port and refer the settings.

Commands
set out-band speed Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction
set out-band flowcontrol Setting of out-band port flow control
show out-band information Display of out-band port setup information

Input example (1/2)
"10.42.74.100" is set as the IP address for out-band network communication of the CX2200,
"255.255.0.0" is set as the subnet mask, and "10.42.74.254" is set as the default gateway address.
Also, "auto" is set for maintenance port speed.


*Switch# set ip address out-band 10.42.74.100 255.255.0.0
*Switch# set ip route default 10.42.74.254
IP Table
========
---------------------------------------------------------------------
out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 10.42.74.100 255.255.255.0
in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

IP Routing Table
================
Destination Gateway
------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.42.74.254 out-band

*Switch#

3-48
Input example (2/2)

*Switch# set out-band speed auto
*Switch# show out-band information
Out-Band Table
==============
Port Link Flowcontrol Flowcontrol
Speed Status MDI Configuration Status
-------------------------------------------------------
auto 100m-full auto disabled disabled

*Switch#

3-49
Setting telnet connection access list
The CX2200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from
remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. The
setting method of telnet connection access lists is described below.
When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.
Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the in-band network.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP
addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct

Commands
set session ip-permit Setting of access list
show session ip-permit Display of access list
clear session ip-permit Clearing of access list

Input example
IP address "10.42.74.25" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "10.40.36.0/24" is set in
access list 2.

*Switch# show session ip-permit
Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address Netmask
------------------------------------
1 10.42.74.25 255.255.255.255
2 10.40.36.0 255.255.255.0

*Switch#

3-50
Checking communication statuses
Checks the status of telnet communication, between the CX2200 and a remote console, through
out-band network communication from the local console.

Command

This command enables the local console to confirm the status of telnet communication between
the CX2200 and a remote console through out-band network communication.

Input example
Confirm that communication between the CX2200 and the remote console having IP address
"10.42.74.25" is set up.

*Switch# ping 10.42.74.25

64 bytes from 10.42.74.25: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5ms

--- 10.42.74.25 ping statistics ---

*Switch#

3-51
Saving set data
Saves the contents set in the CX2200 into the built-in flash memory.
When IP addresses used in the in-band network are used, restart by executing the "write memory"
command and the "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP addresses in the
out-band network are set.

Command

Login from remote console
Logs into the CX2200 from a remote console in the out-band network through telnet
communication.
For the login method, see "3.2 Settings for Network Connection > 3.2.4 Power on and Login >
3.2.4.3 Login" of this manual.

Input example
telnet connection to the CX2200 from a remote console in the out-band network is established.
After the command prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is
enabled.

> telnet 10.42.74.100

Switch>

3-52
3.2.5.4 Maintenance network construction
When a LAN including two or more gateways is constructed while a maintenance network is
constructed, gateways excluding the default gateway can be set for the CX2200 by the following
procedure.

Adding static routes 3-52

Adding static routes
Adds gateways excluding the default gateway as static gateways.
Up to 32 static routes can be set.

Memo When setting a static route, set a gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway.
Note If the gateway belongs to neither of the out-band and in-band networks, communications
with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.
Note When both in-band and out-band network IP addresses are set and gateways belong to
both of the networks, set the gateway in a network in which many network address parts
match. To set the gateway in a network in which few network address parts match, set
the IP address, which is different from one in the network in which many network address
parts match, as the gateway IP address.
Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127. and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses.
("xxx" is any number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24
cannot be set. A gateway address can be set to 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24
network addresses, but communications cannot be performed correctly.
Note It is recommended to stop the communication currently in progress. If not,
communications with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.

3-53
Commands
set ip route Setting of static route
clear ip route Clearing of static route

Input example
Gateway "10.42.74.253" to the remote host "10.41.18.124" is set as the 32nd static route.

*Switch# set ip route 32 10.41.18.124 255.255.255.0 10.42.74.253
IP Table
========
---------------------------------------------------------------------
out-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4b 10.42.74.100 255.255.255.0
in-band 00:0b:6d:02:31:4c 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

IP Routing Table
================
Destination Gateway
------------------------------------------------------------------
- 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.42.74.254 out-band
32 10.41.18.0 255.255.255.0 10.42.74.253 out-band

*Switch#

3-54
Set current date and time.
Set system information according to CX2200
operation mode.
Set each function according to CX2200 operation
mode.
Save the set and modified data.
3.2.6 Basic Settings after Purchase
This section describes the procedure for basic settings by the CLI (command interface) to be
performed after purchase of the CX2200.

3.2.6.1 Setting date and time 3-55

3.2.6.2 Setting system information 3-59

3.2.6.3 Setting functions 3-59

3.2.6.4 Saving set information 3-60

3-55
3.2.6.1 Setting date and time
The CX2200 provides the clock function. It sets the time zone, current date and time, and
daylight saving time period and synchronizes the time by the NTP function. The CX2200 can deal
with years 2000 to 2099.

Time zone setting
Sets the time lag from Greenwich mean time. The local time is set to the unit based on the time
zone setting when the time is synchronized by the NTP function.

Note The default setting of the time zone is +09:00. If the date and time is before 2000/01/01
00:00:00 by the time zone setting, the date and time of the unit is 2000/01/01 00:00:00.

Commands
set system timezone Setting of timezone
show system date Display of date and time

Input example
The time zone is set to -06:00.

*Switch# set system timezone -06:00
*Switch# show system date
System Date
===========
Date : 01/01/2000
Time : 00:00:02
Time Zone: GMT -06:00

*Switch#

3-56
Date and time setting
Sets the date and time entered to the unit.

Memo Years 2000 to 2099 can be set.

Commands
date Setting of date and time

Input example
The date and time is set to 2006/10/22 12:00:00.

*Switch# date 10/22/06 12:00:00
*Switch# show system date
System Date
===========
Date : 10/22/2006
Time : 12:00:03
Time Zone: GMT -06:00

*Switch#

3-57
Daylight saving time setting
The daylight saving time is a function to set the time ahead during the period set. The daylight
saving period can be set by specifying a date or a day of the week. The time is automatically set
ahead when the daylight saving time period starts and is set back when it ends. The time
difference can be set freely.

Memo If the time difference is omitted in setting the daylight saving time, 01:00 is assumed.
Memo In specifying a date, the same date cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight
saving time. In specifying a day of the week, the same month/week/day of the week
cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight saving time.
Memo If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the specified
end date is changed to that of the next year.
Memo If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap
years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time
difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year of the
leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter than
time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the previous
year of a leap year.
Memo During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.

Commands
set system daylight-time Setting of daylight saving time
clear system daylight-time Clearing of daylight saving time

3-58
Input example
Daylight saving time is set as starting from 00:00 on the first Sunday in April and ending in 00:00
on the last Sunday in October.

NTP setting
The CX2200 provides the NTP function. The NTP function is a protocol that synchronizes the
network time between the NTP server and the CX2200. This synchronization enables respective
events to be related according to time information during system log creation or at event
occurrence.
For the details of the NTP function setting method, see "4.2.14 NTP function" of this manual.

*Switch# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 00:00 last sunday 10 12:00
*Switch# show system date detail
System Date
===========
Current Date : 10/22/2006
Current Time : 13:00:07 (DST)
Time Zone : GMT -06:00
Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 00:00
Daylight Time End : 10/29/2006 12:00
Daylight Time Offset: 01:00

*Switch#

3-59
3.2.6.2 Setting system information
Sets system information of the CX2200.
System information includes an administrator to contact, a system name and a system location.
This information can be referenced as maintenance information during SNMP access and telnet
access from a remote host.

Commands
set system contact Setting of administrator contact
set system name Setting of system name
set system location Setting of system location
show system information Display of system information

3.2.6.3 Setting functions
Performs various types of settings according to the CX2200 operation mode.
Functions are set by CLI commands. For details of the setting method, see "2.3 Setting of Basic
Functions" of this manual.
If you have configuration data to be set, copy the necessary setting data and paste it in the console
screen of this unit. Input the data as is as a command. Some communication software allows
you to set the configuration data as is in batch mode by sending it to this unit. For details of the
setting method, see "2.7 Configuration Data > 2.7.2 Configuration Data Management" of this
manual.

3-60
3.2.6.4 Saving set information
The set/modified data is written as running configuration data in the DRAM area. So, if power is
turned off, the data disappears.
The running configuration data is saved in built-in flash memory as startup configuration data so
that the set/modified data will not disappear even if power is turned off.

Command

Maintenance
4-1

4 Maintenance
4.1 Outline..........................................4-2
4.2 Method of Operating Maintenance
and Management Functions.............4-3
4.2.1 Loopback Test ................................................ 4-3
4.2.2 Connection Test............................................ 4-18
4.2.3 SNMP-based Management .......................... 4-20
4.2.4 Counter Monitoring ....................................... 4-26
4.2.5 Fault Monitoring............................................ 4-53
4.2.6 Faults............................................................ 4-56
4.2.7 syslog Functions........................................... 4-57
4.2.8 MAC Learning............................................... 4-62
4.2.9 Port Mirroring................................................ 4-65
4.2.10 System Reboot ........................................... 4-69
4.2.11 Initialization................................................. 4-71
4.2.12 Replacement............................................... 4-73
4.2.13 Resource Monitoring................................... 4-86
4.2.14 NTP Function.............................................. 4-88
4.3 Useful Functions.......................4-91
4.3.1 Version Up.................................................... 4-91
4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection Function ......... 4-98
4.4 Troubleshooting......................4-103
Outline
4-2
4.1 Outline
This chapter describes how to operate the functions for network and system maintenance and
management through monitoring and logging. Also, this chapter describes the procedures for
upgrade and troubleshooting (solutions and restoration to the default state required in trouble).

Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions
4-3
4.2 Method of Operating
Maintenance and Management
Functions
4.2.1 Loopback Test
CX2200 has the following loopback test functions:
(1) Ether network loopback test
This test function checks the status of the transmission path between the CX2200 Ether port
and the distant device.
(2) ATM transmission path loopback tes
This test function checks the status of the ATM transmission path state between the CX2200
and the other unit (segment-to-end or end-to-end).

4-4
4.2.1.1 Ether network loopback test
Loopback tests for Ether network can be conducted by using ETH-LB of the EtherOAM function.

ETH-LB test procedure

Setting the MEP
A MEP must be set in advance to the device to be tested (local device/distant device) before
conducting the ETH-LB test.
For the setting of MEP, see "Command Reference".

Starting the ETH-LB test
Select one of the following tests for the ETH-LB test.
(1) Unicast ETH-LB test
Conducts a loopback test to the specified device on the Ether network. Test count can be
specified in the range of 1 to 127 times. Also, interval can be specified in the range of 1 to 10
seconds.
(2) Multicast ETH-LB test
Conducts loopback test to multiple devices by transmitting multicast frames.

Memo The test count for multicast ETH-LB test is fixed to "1".

The "loopback ether-oam" command starts the ETH-LB test. Parameters are shown below.

MEP index A value whose range is from 1 to 128 can be specified.
Destination MAC address The MAC address of the distant device port is specified.
LBM transmission count A value whose range is from 1 to 127 can be specified.
Transmission period A value whose range is from 1 to 10 (sec) can be specified.
PDU size A value whose range is from 46 to 8982 can be specified.
Priority A value whose range is from 0 to 7 can be specified.

4-5
The following parameters are optional. If they are omitted, the values in parentheses will be
assumed.
Destination MAC address (Multicast MAC Address set by set ether-oam frame)
LBM transmission count (4 times)
Transmission period (1 sec)
PDU size (46)
Priority (7)

Memo When the destination MAC address is omitted, transmission count/ transmission interval
cannot be specified.

Command
loopback ether-oam Transmission of ETH-LB

Memo Set the transmission of ETH-LB after confirming that the MEP is set. For the setting of
MEP, see "Command Reference".
Note You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and the ETH-DM transmission command simultaneously.

4-6
Terminating the ETH-LB test
To terminate the ETH-LB test, press Ctrl+ c .

Memo If the Multicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically.
If the Unicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically when the test
count reaches to the specified count.

Input examples
Example The following example conducts the Unicast ETH-LB test.

Switch# loopback ether-oam 123 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c count 3 period 1 size 46 priority 7
Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56
VID : 100
MEG ID : TEST123456789
MEP ID : 20
MEG Level : 3

result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=1 bytes=46 time=300ms
result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=2 bytes=46 timeout
result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=3 bytes=46 time=500ms

Ether OAM Loopback Result Information for 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c
===========================================================
request = 3, test ok = 2, test fail = 1 (33% failure)
delay minimum = 300ms, maximum = 500ms, average = 400ms
delay variation = 100ms

Switch#

4-7
Example The following example conducts the Multicast ETH-LB test.

Switch# loopback ether-oam 123
Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Port Information
=============================================
Port : 25
MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56
VID : 100
MEG ID : TEST123456789
MEP ID : 20
MEG Level : 3

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information
===============================================
1 00:4c:c4:1e:20:1c
2 00:4c:c4:1e:20:2c
3 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c
4 00:4c:c4:1e:20:4c
5 00:4c:c4:1e:20:3c

Switch#

4-8
4.2.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test
CX2200 has the following functions to check normality of ATM transmission paths:
(1) Loopback test function
(2) Loopback monitoring function

Transmitted loopback cell setting procedure

Setting the source ID for the ATM loopback test
The source ID is the local device ID used when CX2200 transmits loopback cells. It is a common
value shared by the loopback test function and loopback monitoring function.
Upon receipt of a loopback cell from the other unit, the source ID is compared with the location ID
in the received cell. If they match, a response is returned.
* For operations on ATM loopback cell reception, refer to "11 List of Operations on ATM
Loopback Cell Reception" in Appendix.

Commands
set loopback atm source-id Setting of ATM loopback source ID
show loopback atm source-id Display of ATM loopback source ID

Memo The values, all bits as "0" and all bits as "1" (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) cannot be set.

4-9
Checking the source ID for transmitted loopback cells
To check the source ID for transmitted loopback cells, use the "show loopback atm source-id"
command.

Input example
Example In the following example, "FFAA33" is set as the source ID for transmitted loopback
cells.

*Switch# set loopback atm source-id FFAA33
*Switch# show loopback atm source-id
ATM Loopback Source-ID Table
============================
Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33

*Switch#

4-10
Loopback test procedure
You can conduct the ATM transmission path loopback test on a specified connection for a
specified number of times (1 to 1000).

Starting the loopback test
To start the loopback test, use the "loopback atm" command. Parameters are shown below.

Level Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.
PVC identifier Port number VPI value
Port number VPI value/VCI value
PVC name
Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.
Test section Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be
specified.
Location ID A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to
0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.
Indication check Either "enable" or "disable" can be specified.
Test count A value can be specified within the range from 1 to 1000 (counts).
Response wait time A value can be specified within the range from 5 to 10 (seconds).
Test direction Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.
outside: Line direction (from CPUSW to ATM line card)
inside: SW direction (from ATM line card to CPUSW)

assumed.
Test section (end-end)
Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
Indication check (enable)
Test count (1)
Response wait time (5 seconds)
Test direction (outside)

4-11
Command
loopback atm Starting of ATM loopback test

Note If you execute the "write memory" command during the loopback test, the test status will
not be saved in startup-config.
Note The loopback test automatically stops if the system is rebooted.
Memo Multiple loopback tests (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) are not available.

Terminating the loopback test
To terminate the loopback test, press Ctrl+ c .

Memo If the loopback test count is 1, the test will stop automatically; you do not need to perform
this step.

4-12
Input example
Example The following example conducts the loopback test.

*Switch# loopback atm f4 1 0 end-end enable count 3 wait 5 inside
result 1 seq=1 time=470ms
result 1 seq=2 time=460ms
result 1 seq=3 timeout

loopback statistics for 1 0
level f4
section end
indication-check enabled
wait 5s
location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
direction inside
count = 3, ok = 2, fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460ms, maximum = 470ms, average = 465ms

*Switch#
*Switch# loopback atm f5 1 0/32 segment enable count 5 wait 5 outside

loopback statistics for 1 0/32
level f5
section segment
indication-check enabled
wait 5s
location-ID 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
direction outside
count = 5, ok = 0, fail = 5 (100% failure)
minimum = 0ms, maximum = 0ms, average = 0ms

*Switch#
4-13
Loopback monitoring procedure
You can perform loopback monitoring on a specified connection.

Setting loopback monitoring
To set loopback monitoring, specify "enable" or "disable" in the "set loopback atm keepalive-mode"
command.

Command
set loopback atm keepalive-mode Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode

Note Enabling loopback monitoring clears the monitoring statistics.

Setting the loopback monitoring configuration data
To set the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "set loopback atm keepalive" command.
Parameters are shown below.

level Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.
PVC identifier Port number VPI value
Port number VPI value/VCI value
PVC name
Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.
Test section Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be
specified.
Location ID A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to
0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.
Loopback monitoring result
(success) change threshold
A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10
(counts).
Loopback monitoring result
(fail) change threshold
A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10
(counts).
Test direction Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.
outside: Line direction (from CPUSW to ATM line card)
inside: SW direction (from ATM line card to CPUSW)

4-14
assumed.
Test section (end-end)
Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
Loopback monitoring result success change threshold (1)
Loopback monitoring result fail change threshold (1)
Test direction (outside)

Command
set loopback atm keepalive Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function

Memo ATM loopback monitoring is performed on a port-by-port basis, beginning with the
smallest VPI/VCI number.
Memo The timeout value is 5 seconds per PVC. The monitoring cycle for all PVCs is 5 minutes.
Memo Changing the monitoring configuration data deletes the monitoring statistics for the target
PVC.
Memo Multiple loopback monitoring configuration (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) is not
available.
Note If the target PVC is deleted, the setting of this function is cleared.

4-15
Clearing the loopback monitoring configuration data
To clear the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "clear loopback atm keepalive"
command. The parameters are level (f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level) and PVC identifier
(port number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).

Command
clear loopback atm keepalive Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function

Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data
To display the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "show loopback atm keepalive
config" command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).
If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring configuration data for all ports will be
displayed.

Command
show loopback atm keepalive config Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration

Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring information
To display the ATM loopback monitoring information, use the "show loopback atm keepalive
information" command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC
name).
If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring information for all ports will be displayed.

Command
show loopback atm keepalive
information
Display of ATM loopback monitoring information

4-16
Input example
Example The following example conducts loopback monitoring.

*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable
*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3 0 segment 0x1234 success 10 fail 5
*Switch# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4 0/32
*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive config
ATM Loopback Configuration Table
================================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Configuration Table
========================================
Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
----------------------------------------------------------------
3 0 segment outside 10 5

ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI Location-ID
---------------------------------------------
3 0 0x00000000000000000000000000001234

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table
=================================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
--------------------------------------------------------------------
4 0/32 end outside 1 1

ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI/VCI Location-ID
-------------------------------------------------
4 0/32 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff

*Switch#

4-17

*Switch# show loopback atm keepalive information
ATM Loopback Configuration Table
================================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled

ATM Loopback F4 Status Table
============================
Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3 0 segment outside success ok 10/10

ATM Loopback F5 Status Table
============================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
4 0/32 end outside fail timeout 0/1

*Switch#

4-18
4.2.2 Connection Test
This test lets you check whether CX2200 is connected to a specified host properly.

4.2.2.1 Connection test procedure
Enter the "ping" command.
To suspend the connection test, press the Ctrl+ c key combination.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as an
IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, communication to the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24
cannot be accomplished normally.

Command

4-19
Input example
The following example tests the connection with 10.40.36.196.

[1] A timeout occurred 4 times, indicating that the connection failed to be confirmed after 4 test
frame transmissions.
[2] Four packets were transmitted, and 4 packets were received, with the packet loss rate of 0%,
indicating that the connection was successfully confirmed (4 times).

Switch# ping 10.40.36.196

Request timed out
Request timed out
Request timed out
Request timed out

--- 10.40.36.196 ping statistics ---
Switch# ping 10.40.36.196

64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time=5.000 ms
64 bytes from 10.40.36.196: icmp_seq=1 ttl=128 time<1.000 ms

--- 10.40.36.196 ping statistics ---

Switch #

[1]
[2]
4-20
4.2.3 SNMP-based Management
As the network management protocol, CX2200 supports SNMP v1 (Simple Network Management
Protocol Version 1) defined by RFC 1157 and SNMP v2c (Community-based SNMP Version 2)
defined by RFC 1901.
If the system fails or the need arises to report some event, an SNMP trap can be issued to an
SNMP manager to notify the maintenance personnel of the event.
If you do not intend to perform network management, it is not necessary to make the
SNMP-related settings described below.
CX2200 stores its operating status information as objects in an MIB. The SNMP manager can
grasp the CX2200 status using reference requests and update the CX2200 settings remotely using
set requests.

Community name
One parameter you need to specify when setting SNMP-based network management is a
community name. A community name defines the range of the network (community) to be
managed by the SNMP manager. It is used as an authentication feature to limit access from the
SNMP manager to CX2200.
It is also possible to specify more than one SNMP manager and trap manager for a single
community. When adding different addresses, you need to enter the relevant command for each
additional address.

4-21
Setting procedure
Make the settings necessary for SNMP-based network management using the following procedure:
Set SNMP.
Set the SNMP manager.
Set SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.
Set the trap manager.
Save the set data.

4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP - set snmp 4-22

4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager - set snmp manager 4-23

4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance - set snmp authen-trap 4-24

4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager - set snmp trap-manager 4-24

4.2.3.5 Saving the set data - write memory 4-25

4-22
4.2.3.1 Setting SNMP
CX2200 has the function to set SNMP and to show the set SNMP data. The "set snmp"
command enables SNMP to allow the SNMP manager to find and set the network management
information by means of the SNMP management functions. Also, CX2200 faults can be reported
to the trap manager.

Commands
set snmp Setting of SNMP enable/disable
show snmp Display of SNMP setting information

4-23
4.2.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager
The "set snmp manager" command sets the community name and access privilege, which are
used to authenticate messages exchanged between networks managed by the SNMP manager, as
well as the IP address of the host of the SNMP manager. As the access privilege, you can set
one of the two options - read-only and read-write.
Up to 20 SNMP managers can be registered. CX2200 has the functions to set, show, and clear
SNMP managers.

the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses,
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although
communication cannot be accomplished normally.
Note A response timeout error may occur in SNMP managers in the following cases.
Response delay due to network congestion
Response delay due to simultaneous access from multiple SNMP managers.
Response delay due to search of next MIB specified according to configuration
conditions.
If the error occurs, extend the response monitoring timer for SNMP managers.

Commands
set snmp manager Setting of SNMP manager
clear snmp manager Clearing of SNMP manager settings

4-24
4.2.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access
trap issuance
CX2200 can transmit a trap in the event of an unauthorized SNMP access attempt. The "set
snmp authen-trap" command enables the SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance function to
permit this trap to be issued.

Commands
set snmp authen-trap Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission

4.2.3.4 Setting the trap manager
The "set snmp trap-manager" command sets a host that serves as the trap manager that manages
traps. The parameters for the trap manager are the community name, IP address, and device
name. Up to 10 trap managers can be registered, each managed by its respective manager
number. CX2200 has the functions to set, show, and clear trap managers.

the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses,
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although
communication cannot be accomplished normally.
Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, trap data may not be transmitted. In
that case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be transmitted.
When the trap transmission has been restarted, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER"
is transmitted.

Commands
set snmp trap-manager Setting of SNMP trap manager
clear snmp trap-manager Clearing of SNMP trap manager settings

4-25
4.2.3.5 Saving the set data
Saves the set data to the startup configuration data file after finishing the data setting.

Command

Limitation
About the date
In order for traps to contain the date and time information, you need to set the date and time in
advance. For information about how to set the date and time, see "Method of initial setup".

4-26
4.2.4 Counter Monitoring
CX2200 offers counter monitoring functions that allow monitoring on a per port basis as well as on
a per VLAN basis.

4.2.4.1 Port counters
CX2200 has a per port counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of transmitted
and received frames.
The counter values can be shown in the following two ways:
Displaying in real time
Displaying details

Note This function does not work for other than the GbE and FE port.

CX2200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects the counter values showing the
number of frames transmitted and received by each port and shows the collected data in real time,
and the other clears the counter values.
The values of the counters shown below are collected.
The transmitted frame counter value and received frame counter value of each port are shown in
real time.
These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.

Display item Description
Pkts(Rx) Number of received frames
Pkts(Tx) Number of transmitted frames

Commands
clear counter port Clearing of port counter
show counter port Display of port counter
4-27
Displaying details
CX2200 can collect and show the detail counter values of a specified port.
This function shows the detail counter values of a specified port.
The counter values that are the latest at the time of command input are shown only once.
The values of the counters listed below are collected. For the data collecting conditions for
counter monitoring, see Appendix "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List".
CX2200 has the functions to show and clear collected counter values. Clearing the counter
values clears the corresponding MIB values as well.

RxOctets Number of received octets
RxPkts Number of received frames
RxDropEvents Number of drop events *
RxErrors Number of reception error frames
RxUndersizePkts Number of received frames with data length shorter than 64 octets
RxFragments Number of received error frames with data length shorter than 64
octets
Rx64octs Number of received frames with data length of 64 octets
Rx65to127octs Number of received frames with data length of 65 to 127 octets
RxCRCErrors Number of alignment or FCS error frames received
RxOversizePkts Number of received frames with the data length of 1519 octets or
bigger, Number of received error frames
RxJabbers Number of received error frames with the data length of 1519 octets
RxUcastPkts Number of received unicast frames
RxMcastPkts Number of received multicast frames
RxBcastPkts Number of received broadcast frames
RxUnsupp Number of unsupported frames that were received and discarded
RxDiscards Number of frames discarded for reasons other than reception errors
TxOctets Number of transmitted octets
TxPkts Number of transmitted frames
TxErrors Number of transmission error frames
4-28
TxCollisions Number of transmitted collision frames *
TxUcastPkts Number of transmitted unicast frames
TxMcastPkts Number of transmitted multicast frames
TxBcastPkts Number of transmitted broadcast frames
TxUnsupp Number of unsupported frames that were transmitted and discarded
TxDiscards Number of frames discarded for reasons other than transmission
errors
* When display is executed, 0 is always displayed.

Commands
show counter port Display of port counter

4-29
Displaying discard counter details
CX2200 can collect and show the detail data about the discard counter values of a specified port.
The "show counter discard" command shows the counter values that are the latest at the time of
command input only once.
counter monitoring, see Appendix "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List".

Note This function does not work for other than GbE and FE port.

The discard counter values are collected at two points - line card and L2SW.

Line card discard counters
The following table lists the counters of frames discarded by the line card.

RxUnknownTPID Number of unsupported TPID received frames discarded or
Ethernet type 0x8100 received frames discarded at a portbase
untagged port
RxUnknownVID Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded
TxUnknownTPID Number of unsupported TPID transmitted frames discarded or
Ethernet type 0x8100 transmitted frames discarded at a portbase
untagged port

Line card L2SW
Rx
Tx
4-30
L2SW discard counters
The following table lists the counters of frames discarded by the L2SW.

RxDropPkts Number of received frames discarded by the L2SW as invalid
frames or number of received frames discarded with the following
cases:
- The case that transfer destination ports (including mirroring
output destination ports) do not exist
- The case that RPL Owner receives R-APS control frames
regularly with the EtherRing function or the case that the
switching of the EtherRing function occurs at an RL port
TxDropPkts Number of transmitted frames discarded by the L2SW before being
placed into the transmission queue.
TxQueue0DisPkts Number of transmitted no-class frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue1DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-D frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue2DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-C frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue3DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-B frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue4DisPkts Number of transmitted Class-A frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue5DisPkts Number of transmitted frames of control frames from the CPU
discarded by the L2SW
RxDisInQoSPkts Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function of the input port
RxFilterPkts Number of received frames discarded by the input filtering function
TxDisOutQoSPkts Number of transmitted frames discarded by the maximum
bandwidth limit function of the output port

Commands
show counter discard Display of discard counter

4-31
4.2.4.2 VLAN counters
CX2200 has a per VLAN counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of transmitted
and received frames. Also, collected counter information for each VLAN can be displayed for
each priority in the VLAN counter information detail display.
There are two ways of collecting VLAN counter information. Specify either method when
registering VLAN counters.
Short-cycle collection VLAN counter: Collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about
one second.
Long-cycle collection VLAN counter: Collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about 25
seconds.

Note This function does not work for other than the GbE and FE port.

Registering a VLAN counter
The "set counter vlan entry" command registers VLAN counter collection conditions. Use this
command before using the per VLAN counter monitoring function.

Commands
set counter vlan entry Registration of VLAN counter
clear counter vlan entry Clearing of VLAN counter registration
show counter vlan entry Display of VLAN counter registration information

For the short-cycle collection VLAN counter, there are three ways of displaying collected VLAN
counter information as described below:
Displaying details
Displaying details in real time

Memo The long-cycle collection VLAN counter cannot display counter information in real
time/detail counter information in real time.
4-32
Note If the short-cycle collection VLAN counter and long-cycle collection VLAN counter are
registered in the same port with the same VID, the long-cycle collection VLAN counter
collects VLAN counter information at intervals of about one second only for the redundant
VID.

CX2200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects counter values showing the number
of transmitted frames and received frames under VLAN counter collection conditions set in the
real-time display function and shows the collected data in real time, and the other clears the
counter values.
The values of the counters shown below are collected.
Counter values for transmitted frames and received frames under registered VLAN counter
collection conditions are shown in real time.
These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.

Pkts(Rx) Number of received frames
Pkts(Tx) Number of transmitted frames

Commands
clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter
show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

4-33
Displaying details/displaying details in real time
CX2200 can collect and show the detail counter values under registered VLAN counter collection
conditions.
The detail counter values under registered VLAN counter collection conditions are shown. Also,
collected counter information for each VLAN can be displayed for each priority and each class.
For the detail display, the latest counter values for each type at the time of command input are
shown only once.
For the real-time detail display, the latest counter values for each type are shown in real time, and
these counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
counter monitoring, see "5 Counter Monitoring Condition List" in Appendix.
RxOcts Number of received octets
RxUcastOcts Number of received unicast octets
RxMcastOcts Number of received multicast octets
RxBcastOcts Number of received broadcast octets
RxDisInQoSOcts Number of received octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function for input ports *
RxPkts Number of received frames
RxUcastPkts Number of received unicast frames
RxMcastPkts Number of received multicast frames
RxBcastPkts Number of received broadcast frames
RxDisInQoSPkts Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth
limit function for input ports *
TxOcts Number of transmitted octets
TxUcastOcts Number of transmitted unicast octets
TxMcastOcts Number of transmitted multicast octets
TxBcastOcts Number of transmitted broadcast octets
TxPkts Number of transmitted frames
TxUcastPkts Number of transmitted unicast frames
TxMcastPkts Number of transmitted multicast frames
TxBcastPkts Number of transmitted broadcast frames
* When FE port information is shown, 0 is always shown.
4-34
Commands
clear counter vlan value Clearing of VLAN counter
show counter vlan value Display of VLAN counter

4-35
Input example
The following example registers VLAN ID 4094 of port 17 as the short-cycle collection VLAN
counter and shows the detail VLAN counter information about priority value 0.

Switch# set counter vlan entry short 17 4094
*Switch# show counter vlan entry short
VLAN Counter Entry (Short Cycle)
================================
Entry Count : 1

Port VID Name
--------------------------------------------
17 4094 VID-4094

*Switch# show counter vlan value short detail 17 4094 0
VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 17
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : Priority.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Item Counts | Item Counts
====================================+=======================================
RxOcts : 1000000 | TxOcts : 0
RxUcastOcts : 1000000 | TxUcastOcts : 0
RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0
RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0
RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |
RxPkts : 10000 | TxPkts : 0
RxUcastPkts : 10000 | TxUcastPkts : 0
RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0
RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0
RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#

4-36
Input example
The following example registers VLAN ID 4094 of port 24 as the long-cycle collection VLAN
counter and shows the detail VLAN counter information.

Switch# set counter vlan entry long 24 4094
*Switch# show counter vlan entry long
VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)
===============================
Entry Count : 1

Port VID Name
--------------------------------------------
24 4094 VID-4094

*Switch# show counter vlan value long 24 4094
VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)
===============================
Port : 24
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : All
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
======================================+=====================================
RxOcts : 18446744073709551616 | TxOcts : 18446744073709551616
RxUcastOcts : 18446744073709551616 | TxUcastOcts : 18446744073709551616
RxMcastOcts : 0 | TxMcastOcts : 0
RxBcastOcts : 0 | TxBcastOcts : 0
RxDisInQoSOcts : 0 |
RxPkts : 288230376151711744 | TxPkts : 288230376151711744
RxUcastPkts : 288230376151711744 | TxUcastPkts : 288230376151711744
RxMcastPkts : 0 | TxMcastPkts : 0
RxBcastPkts : 0 | TxBcastPkts : 0
RxDisInQoSPkts : 0 |

*Switch#

4-37
4.2.4.3 ATM counters
CX2200 has the following ATM counter monitoring functions.
Registering PVC for OAM counter
Collecting cell counters
Displaying/clearing cell counters

Registering PVC for OAM counters
Registers PVC to collect OAM counters.
For OAM counters, up to 32 PVC can be registered per device.
Following commands are used for PVC registration for OAM counter.

Commands
set counter pvc entry Registration of PVC for OAM counter
clear counter pvc entry Clearing of PVC for OAM counter
show counter pvc entry Display of PVC for OAM counter

4-38
Collecting cell counters
The following are cell counter collection intervals.

Counter
Classification
Per port
(User, discard cell)
Per PVC
(User cell)
Per F4
(OAM cell) (*1)
Per F5
(OAM cell) (*1)
Interval One second One second Five seconds Five seconds
*1 Only when an OAM cell is registered as the counter, the corresponding counter is collected.

The cell counter values are collected at points as follows.
1) Counter collection for a 32T1E1H (ATMoP) line card

[1] (Per Port) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter and reception error
discard counter
[3] (Per F4/F5) collection point of transmission and reception OAM cell counter
- Ingress direction terminated/ transparent OAM cell count.
- Egress direction transparent OAM cell count
[5] (Per PVC) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter
[7] (Per Port) collection point of transmission shaper discard counter

Note F4/F5END-AIS transmitted from [4] to the egress direction at the device fault detection is
counted at the transmission counters of [1] and [3].
Note Because PHY is the blocking point when the port is blocked, the reception counter is not
counted. However, the transmission counter is counted.
Note When PVC is blocked, the reception counter of [1] is counted because [2] is the discard
point for the ingress direction. The transmission shaper discard counter of [7] is counted
because [6] is the discard point for the egress direction.

D
i
s
c
a
r
d

a
t

P
V
C

B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
O
A
M

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

P
V
C

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

[2] [4] [5] [6]
O
A
M

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

A
T
M

C
a
p
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

I
M
A

P
r
o
c
e
s
s
o
r

[3] [1] [7]
(Egress)
D
i
s
c
a
r
d

a
t

P
V
C

B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g
L2SW
(Ingress)
ATM network
4-39
2) Counter collection points for a 1ATM155A line card

[1] (Per Port) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter and reception error
discard counter
[3] (Per F4/F5) collection point of transmission and reception OAM cell counter
- Ingress direction terminated/ transparent OAM cell count.
- Egress direction transparent OAM cell count
[5] (Per PVC) collection point of transmission and reception cell counter
[7] (Per Port) collection point of transmission shaper discard counter

Note F4/F5END-AIS transmitted from [4] to the egress direction at the device fault detection is
counted at the transmission counters of [1] and [3].
Note Because PHY is the blocking point when the port is blocked, the reception counter is not
counted. However, the transmission counter is counted.
Note When PVC is blocked, the reception counter of [1] is counted because [2] is the discard
point for the ingress direction. The transmission shaper discard counter of [7] is counted
because [6] is the discard point for the egress direction.

D
i
s
c
a
r
d

a
t

P
V
C

B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g

O
A
M

T
e
r
m
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

P
V
C

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

[2] [4] [5] [6]
O
A
M

C
o
u
n
t
e
r

A
T
M

C
a
p
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

S
D
H

F
r
a
m
e
r

[3] [1] [7]
(Egress)
D
i
s
c
a
r
d

a
t

P
V
C

B
l
o
c
k
i
n
g

ATM network L2SW
(Ingress)
4-40
Displaying / Clearing cell counter
The cell counter display function provides real time and detailed display.
The real-time display function updates the display of the counter values every 2 seconds until the
Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
Display items for the real-time display function are shown below.

Cells(Rx) Number of received cells
Cells(Tx) Number of transmitted cells

The detail display function shows more items.
Display items for the detail display function are shown below.

RxCells Number of received cells
RxErrors Number of received error discard cells
RxQoSDiscards Number of received shaper discard cells
RxF4SegAIS Received segment VP-AIS cells
RxF4SegRDI Received segment VP-RDI cells
RxF4SegLoopback Received F4 level segment loopback cells
RxF4SegOthers Received F4 level segment other OAM cells
RxF4EndAIS Received end VP-AIS cells
RxF4EndRDI Received end VP-RDI cells
RxF4EndLoopback Received F4 level end loopback cells
RxF4EndOthers Received F4 level end other OAM cells
RxF5SegAIS Received segment VC-AIS cells
RxF5SegRDI Received segment VC-RDI cells
RxF5SegLoopback Received F5 level segment loopback cells
RxF5SegOthers Received F5 level segment other OAM cells
RxF5EndAIS Received end VC-AIS cells
RxF5EndRDI Received end VC-RDI cells
RxF5EndLoopback Received F5 level end loopback cells
RxF5EndOthers Received F5 level end other OAM cells
TxCells Number of transmitted cells
4-41
TxErrors Number of transmitted error discard cells
TxQoSDiscards Number of transmitted shaper discard cells
TxF4SegAIS Transmitted segment VP-AIS cells
TxF4SegRDI Transmitted segment VP-RDI cells
TxF4SegLoopback Transmitted F4 level segment loopback cells
TxF4SegOthers Transmitted F4 level segment other OAM cells
TxF4EndAIS Transmitted end VP-AIS cells
TxF4EndRDI Transmitted end VP-RDI cells
TxF4EndLoopback Transmitted VP-loopback cells-end
TxF4EndOthers Transmitted F4 level end other OAM cells
TxF5SegAIS Transmitted segment VC-AIS cells
TxF5SegRDI Transmitted segment VC-RDI cells
TxF5SegLoopback Transmitted F5 level segment loopback cells
TxF5SegOthers Transmitted F5 level segment other OAM cells
TxF5EndAIS Transmitted end VC-AIS cells
TxF5EndRDI Transmitted end VC-RDI cells
TxF5EndLoopback Transmitted F5 level end loopback cells
TxF5EndOthers Transmitted F5 level end other OAM cells

Following commands are used for the cell counter.

Commands
show counter cell Display of cell counter information per port
(Display of cell counter information per IMA group at IMA group
setting)
show counter cell f4 Display of cell counter information per F4
show counter cell f5 Display of cell counter information per F5
show counter cell ima-port Display of cell counter information per IMA group port
clear counter cell Clearing of cell counter information

Note Number of transmitted cells and received cells for show counter cell f4/ show counter cell
f5 indicates counters per PVC.
4-42
Counter clear event
Each counter is cleared in the following events.
Counter Type
OAM Event
Per port Per PVC
Per F4 Per F5
Device restart
(*1)

Registration of PVC
Clearing of PVC (Port collectively)
Clearing of PVC (VP collectively)
Clearing of PVC (VC connection singularly)
(*3)

clear counter cell (Port collectively)
(*1)

clear counter cell (VP collectively)
clear counter cell (VC connection singularly)
Registration of PVC for OAM counter
(*2)

Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (Port
collectively)

Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (VP collectively)
Clearing of PVC for OAM counter (VC connection
singularly)

(*3)

Registration of IMA groups, Change of the root
port

(*1)

Change of IMA group configuration ports
(*4)

Clearing of IMA groups
(*1)

Change of port modes (*5)
*1 When an IMA group is set, the IMA group counter and the port counter under the group are
cleared.
*2 Only at the first PVC registration under a VP, counters are cleared.
*3 Only at the last PVC deletion under a VP, counters are cleared.
*4 Only counters for changed ports are cleared.
*5 Only at change of ATMoP<->other modes, counters are cleared.
4-43
Input example
The following example shows PVC registration for OAM counter for port1, in the range of
PVC0/32-43.

*Switch# set counter pvc entry 1 0/32-43
*Switch# show counter pvc entry
PVC Counter Entry
=================
Entry Count : 12

Port VPI/VCI Name
-----------------------------------------------
1 0/32
1 0/33
1 0/34
1 0/35
1 0/36
1 0/37
1 0/38
1 0/39
1 0/40
1 0/41
1 0/42
1 0/43

*Switch#

4-44
The following example shows the per F5 cell counter real-time information for port1, in the range of
PVC0/32-43.

*Switch# show counter cell f5 real 1 0/32-43
F5-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 1

VPI/VCI Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
--------------------------------------------------
0/32 18446744073709551615 51539607563
0/33 42949672969 34359738375
0/34 25769803781 17179869187
0/35 18446744073709551615 51539607563
0/36 42949672969 34359738375
0/37 25769803781 17179869187
0/38 18446744073709551615 51539607563
0/39 42949672969 34359738375
0/40 25769803781 17179869187
0/41 18446744073709551615 51539607563
0/42 42949672969 34359738375
0/43 25769803781 17179869187

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#

4-45
The following example shows the per F4 cell counter detailed information for PVC0/32 and VPI0 of
the port2 registered as OAM counter.

*Switch# show counter cell f4 detail 2 0
F4-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port : 2
VPI : 0

-------------------------------- ---+---------------------------------------
RxCells : 206158430247 | TxCells : 309237645375
RxErrors : 0 | TxErrors : 0
RxQoSDiscards : 0 | TxQoSDiscards : 0
RxF4SegAIS : 4294967296 | TxF4SegAIS : 8
RxF4SegRDI : 1 | TxF4SegRDI : 4294967305
RxF4SegLoopback : 4294967298 | TxF4SegLoopback : 18446744073709551615
RxF4SegOthers : 3 | TxF4SegOthers : 4294967307
RxF4EndAIS : 4294967300 | TxF4EndAIS : 12
RxF4EndRDI : 5 | TxF4EndRDI : 4294967309
RxF4EndLoopback : 4294967302 | TxF4EndLoopback : 14
RxF4EndOthers : 7 | TxF4EndOthers : 4294967311
RxF5SegAIS : 12884901936 | TxF5SegAIS : 12884901960
RxF5SegRDI : 12884901939 | TxF5SegRDI : 12884901963
RxF5SegLoopback : 12884901942 | TxF5SegLoopback : 12884901966
RxF5SegOthers : 12884901945 | TxF5SegOthers : 12884901969
RxF5EndAIS : 12884901948 | TxF5EndAIS : 12884901972
RxF5EndRDI : 12884901951 | TxF5EndRDI : 12884901975
RxF5EndLoopback : 12884901954 | TxF5EndLoopback : 12884901978
RxF5EndOthers : 12884901930 | TxF5EndOthers : 12884901933

*Switch#

4-46
The following example shows the cell counter real-time information per IMA group port for the port1
to 4 to which the IMA group is set with the port1 to 4 and the detailed information with the port 4.

*Switch# show counter cell ima-port real 1-4
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port Cells(Rx) Cells(Tx)
--------------------------------------------------
1 25769803781 17179869187
2 18446744073709551615 51539607563
3 42949672960 34359738368
4 25769803781 17179869187

Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter cell ima-port detail 4
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port : 4

----------------------------------+-------------------------------------
RxCells : 25769803781 | TxCells : 17179869187
RxErrors : 8590366356 | TxErrors : 0

*Switch#

4-47
4.2.4.4 Line quality counters
CX2200 can collect and display the line quality counters on a per port basis.
The line quality counters display the counter with the show command input and clears the relevant
counter.

Displaying line quality counters
The line quality counters display the counter from the last show command input to the latest show
command input.
Display items for the line quality counters are shown below.

When the 1ATM155A card is installed
Section BIP-8 Number of BIP-8 detection for relay section errors in the section
overhead
Line BIP-24 Number of BIP-24 detection for section errors in the section overhead
Line FEBE Number of line level far end block errors detected
Path BIP-8 Number of BIP-8 detection for path errors in the path overhead
Path FEBE Number of path level far end block errors detected

When the 32T1E1H card is installed
FER Number of framing bit errors detected
OOF/FEBE OOF: Number of out of frame errors detected (T1 mode)
FEBE: Number of far end block errors detected (E1 mode)
Bit/CRC Error Bit Error: Number of bit errors detected (T1 mode)
CRC Error: Number of cyclic redundancy check errors detected (E1
mode)
LCV Error Number of LineCode violation errors detected

Note Since the line quality counters are counted while the quality is degrading, the counting
continues during a link down.
Memo When the 32T1E1H card is installed and the frame format is "Unframed", only LCV Errors
are counted. The value of other counters is fixed to "0".
4-48
The following command is used for the line quality counters.

Command
show counter port pmon Display of line quality counter

Input example

When the 1ATM155A card is installed

When the 32T1E1H card is installed

*Switch# show counter port pmon 1
Performance Monitor Counter
===========================
Port : 1

--------------------------+---------------------------
Section BIP-8 : 65535 |
Line BIP-24 : 1089 | Line FEBE : 2438
Path BIP-8 : 246 | Path FEBE : 11

*Switch#
*Switch# show counter port pmon 1
Performance Monitor Counter
===========================
Port : 1

--------------------------+---------------------------
FER : 34 | OOF/FEBE : 15
Bit/CRC Error : 34 | LCV Error : 0

*Switch#
4-49
4.2.4.5 EtherOAM counter
The CX2200 has the transmitted/received EtherOAM frame count collection/display function as the
EtherOAM counter monitoring function.
To collect counter information, register the EtherOAM counter collection conditions in advance.
The conditions can be registered in the unit of VLAN, MEG Level, and OpCode of the EtherOAM
frame to be counted. The table below lists the OpCodes of the EtherOAM frames that are
supported by this unit. Registration and collection can be performed within the range from 0 to
255.

OP-Code
EtherOAM frame
type
OP-Code
EtherOAM frame
type
1 CMM 2 LBR
3 LBM 4 LTR
5 LTM 39 E-APS
40 R-APS 42 LMR
43 LMM 46 DMR
47 DMM

Note The counter cannot be re-registered for the registered line number. To change counter
registration, the existing registration must be deleted.

Commands
set counter ether-oam entry Registration of the EtherOAM counter
show counter ether-oam entry Display of EtherOAM counter registration
clear counter ether-oam entry Deletion of EtherOAM counter registration

4-50
See below for the items displayed for the counter values that are collected.

Counter display items

RxPkts
Displays the number of received frames that match the registered
collection condition.
TxPkts
Displays the number of transmitted frames that match the
registered collection condition.

Commands
show counter ether-oam value Display of the EtherOAM counter

Memo The counter values that were collected are cleared when they are displayed by 'show
counter ether-oam value'.

4-51
Input example
The EtherOAM counters of ports 25 and 26 are registered under the conditions of VLAN ID 55,
MEG level 6, and OP-Code 1 and the counter information is displayed for transmission/reception of
the EtherOAM frames of ports 25 and 26 that match the registration conditions for ports 25 and 26.

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 25 55 6 1
*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 26 55 6 1
*Switch#
*Switch# show counter ether-oam entry
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
---------------------------------
25 55 6 1
26 55 6 1

*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch# show counter ether-oam value
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port RxPkts TxPkts
----------------------------
25 2307 2307
26 2086 2087

*Switch#
*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry 25
*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry 26
*Switch#

4-52
The EtherOAM counters of ports 25 and 26 are registered under the conditions of all EtherOAM
frame specification and the counter information is displayed for transmission/reception of the
EtherOAM frames that match the registration conditions.

*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 25 all
*Switch# set counter ether-oam entry 26 all
*Switch#
*Switch# show counter ether-oam entry
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
---------------------------------
25 all all all
26 all all all

*Switch#
*Switch#
*Switch# show counter ether-oam value
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port RxPkts TxPkts
----------------------------
25 2307 2307
26 2086 2087

*Switch#
*Switch# clear counter ether-oam entry
*Switch#
4-53
4.2.5 Fault Monitoring
CX2200 monitors devices for hardware faults, as well as line faults, during operation. Upon
detection of a fault, it transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the fault while at the
same time showing the relevant message on the local and remote consoles.
For the fault types and actions, see "3 Fault List" in Appendix.
You can check whether a device is experiencing a fault by having its status shown using the
relevant command.
The fault information can be read using the relevant command.
This section describes the following functions:
Line status
Protection time setting
Fault information
Restart cause

Line status
CX2200 lets you check the line status by examining the on/off status of the LED on the line card.

Setting protection time
CX2200 shows a fault message or issues a trap notification when the preset protection time
elapses after a change in the port link status is detected. The "set port protection-time" command
sets either forward protection time (link down) or backward protection time (link up).
Forward protection time:
Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link down in the link up status until a status
transition to link down occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port
link status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault
message and trap issuance will not be provided.
4-54
Backward protection time:
Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link up in the link down status until a status
transition to link up occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port link
status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault message
and trap issuance will not be provided.

Commands
set port protection-time Setting of port link down occurrence/recovery detection time

Input example
The following example sets the forward protection time to 2 seconds and the backward protection
time to 1 second.

Switch# set port protection-time 17 link-down 2000
*Switch# set port protection-time 17 link-up 1000
*Switch# show port information 17
Cpusw Port Information Table
============================
Port Link
------------------------------------------------------

Flowcontrol Flowcontrol
Port Configuration Status
--------------------------------

-------------------------------------------------
17 enabled 1000 2000

*Switch#

4-55
Displaying fault information
Shows fault information. The following two types of fault information are provided. Collect fault
information, and contact your local distributor for assistance.
(1) Hardware fault information
Information about hardware-caused faults detected by the monitoring function of CX2200s
CPU. The fault information may include external factors such as power and line cable
connections, installation location, and ambient environment.
(2) Software fault information (exception information and error information)
Information storing the CPUs internal status recorded when a software-triggered fault
occurred. These faults are due to CX2200s internal factors. Collect the local log data
(using the Input example: the "show syslog local all" command) along with the fault
information, and contact your local distributor.
As for the existing faults, the "show fault present" command shows both the hardware fault
information and software fault information. The "show fault past" command shows the information
on the past software faults. If there are no past software faults, the command will show "No entry
in the table.".

Commands
show fault present Display of current fault and alarm information
show fault past Display of past fault information

Displaying restart cause
Shows the cause of the restart.
For details of the restart causes, see "7 Restart Cause List" in Appendix.

Command
show reset Display of reset factor

4-56
4.2.6 Faults
In the event of a fault, CX2200 transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the fault
while at the same time showing the relevant message on the local and remote consoles. Check
the content of the shown message, and take an action appropriate for the reported fault.
CX2200 has the link trap transmission setting function that lets you enable or disable per port link
status change notification.
By default, if a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault is detected, the module in which that fault is
detected will be rebooted in 10 seconds. You can set CX2200 not to reboot the module.

Commands
set port link-trap Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
set terminal monitor Setting of autonomous message output
set fault auto-reboot Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable in case of
reboot requiring fault
show fault auto-reboot Display of autonomous rebooting settings in case of reboot
requiring fault

4-57
4.2.7 syslog Functions
CX2200 implements the syslog functions defined by RFC 3164.
Enabling the syslog functions makes it possible to send information on the CX2200 operating
status to a remote server (remote logging) and to save such information in built-in flash memory
(local logging).
This section describes the following functions:
Local logging
Remote logging
Mapping

Local logging
CX2200 has the local logging function that records and shows the information described below
together with the occurrence time, as well as the local log clearing function.
About up to 2 MB of log data (about 20000 log records when the length of each character string to
be saved is assumed to be 80 characters) can be recorded.
Local log data is recorded as local system events only by the system that detects or executes the
event. Also, rebooting or powering off the system does not clear the log data.
Local log data can be uploaded to an FTP server.
For information about the settings necessary to use an FTP server, see "3.2 Settings for Network
Connection > 3.2.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of this manual.
For the fault numbers and severity levels shown in fault information, see "3 Fault List" in Appendix
of this manual.
Information to be collected as local log data
1 Setting command execution log excluding terminal setting (normally ended commands only)
2 Telnet-related log (login, logout, idle timeout, forced disconnection, connection rejection, login
authentication failure)
3 Fault information
4 Device status transition information (ACH, etc.)
5 Configuration setting log from the SNMP agents (only switchbacks due to setting and setting
errors)
* Character strings "UNDO" are added in the last part of setting switchback logs.
4-58
Commands
clear syslog local Clearing of local log
show syslog local Display of local log
upload local-syslog Uploading of system log to ftp server

Memo The upload time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data being
transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN
cabling.
You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the
Ctrl+c key combination.
After checking the conditions of the network and FTP server, enter the command again.
the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.) Also, if the server
resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and
192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although communication cannot be
Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, local log data may not be collected, in
which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent.
Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.

4-59
Remote logging
CX2200 supports the remote logging function (syslog) that allows it to transmit the same messages
as in local logging to the syslog server.
The syslog server needs to be set up using the "syslogd" command. For information about the
syslogd setup, see the setup method of UNIX (including Linux and FreeBSD).
Up to 5 syslog servers and facilities from Local0 to Local7 can be registered per CX2200.

Note If a large number of events occur simultaneously, remote log data may not be transmitted,
in which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent.
Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.

Commands
set syslog server Setting of syslog server and message facility
set syslog remote Setting of remote log enable/disable
clear syslog server Clearing of syslog server
show syslog server Display of syslog server configuration information

4-60
Input example
The following example sets the IP address of the syslog server to 192.168.2.200, sets the facility to
local7, and enables remote logging.

Mapping
CX2200s remote logging function maps groups of remote logging events to several levels
according to their severity. These levels are listed below.
Groups mapped to a certain level may be remapped to another level.

Level Meaning
LOG_CRIT Critical condition
LOG_ERR Error condition
LOG_WARNING Warning condition
LOG_INFO Informational message

Switch# set syslog server 1 192.168.2.200 local7
*Switch# set syslog remote enable
*Switch# show syslog server
Syslog Remote Configuration
===========================
Syslog Remote: enabled

Syslog Server Table
===================
Index IP Address Facility
----------------------------------
1 192.168.2.200 local7

*Switch#

4-61
The following table shows the groups of remote logging events and their default levels.

Group Meaning Level
TRAP_SYSFLT System status fault message
Reboot fault message
LOG_CRIT
TRAP_SYSMJR System status fault message LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSMNR System status minor fault message LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSWAR System status warning message LOG_WARNING
TRAP_SYSCLR System status fault recovery message LOG_INFO
TRAP_SYSINF System informational message LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTMJR Port fault occurrence message LOG_ERR
TRAP_PORTCLR Port recovery message LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTINF Port information message LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEMJR Route control fault message LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEMNR Route control minor fault message LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEWAR Route control warning message LOG_WARNING
TRAP_ROUTECLR Route control fault recovery message LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEINF Route control informational message LOG_INFO
COMMAND_LOG Setting command execution log excluding terminal
setting
(Normally ended commands only)
LOG_INFO
SNMP_LOG Configuration setting log from SNMP agents
(Only switchbacks due to setting and setting
errors)
LOG_INFO

Commands
set syslog map Setting of syslog message level remapping
clear syslog map Clearing of syslog message level remapping
show syslog map Display of syslog message level mapping status

Limitation
The reboot completion message and those logs collected before the NTP server is accessed at the
time of reboot may use the default date value - "2000/01/01".

4-62
4.2.8 MAC Learning
CX2200 has the following MAC learning functions:
- CPUSW MAC learning function
This function shows and clears the MAC address information learned by the CPUSW.

4.2.8.1 CPUSW MAC learning function
This system learns and stores the source MAC address of each received frame on a per line and
per VLAN basis. It references the learned information when transferring frames. Received
frames containing the learned MAC address as the destination address are unicast, while those
whose destination MAC address is not learned are flooded within the same VLAN.
If no frame is received from a source MAC address for a defined period of time, then that MAC
address will age and be cleared from the learning information table.
You can check the current number of learned entries and the learning information on a per port or
per VLAN basis, by using the relevant command. It is also possible to clear information stored in
the learning table. For details, see "Command Reference".
The following functions are described:
Aging
Displaying the number of learned MAC entries for the CPUSW
Displaying the MAC learning information for the CPUSW
Clearing the MAC learning information

Memo Regarding the MAC learning information of the ATMoP and TDMoP group, the MAC
addresses of the line group a shown for each line group.
Note While CX2200 can learn up to 16K MAC addresses, there may be cases where MAC
addresses cannot be learned depending on learning conditions and the 16K table cannot
be fully used.
Note Aging function is common among CPUSWs.
Note More than the maximum learned MAC entry count may be shown when information is
registered to and cleared from the MAC learning information repeatedly due to port move
and other operations.

4-63
Aging
Clears learned MAC addresses after a defined period of time. By default, learned MAC
addresses are retained in the table for 5 minutes and automatically cleared if they are not learned
again during the 5-minute period. The period of time to retain learned MAC addresses can be
changed in the range of 10 to 1000000 seconds by using the relevant command.

Commands
set fdb agingtime Setting of aging time
show fdb agingtime Display of aging time

Displaying the number of learned MAC entries for the
CPUSW
Shows the number of learned MAC entries on a per device, per port, or per VLAN basis.

Commands
show fdb count all Display of MAC learning count per device
show fdb count port Display of MAC learning count per port
show fdb count vid Display of MAC learning count per VLAN

4-64
Displaying the MAC learning information for the
CPUSW
Shows the MAC learning information on a per port or per VLAN basis without sorting.

Commands
show fdb table port Display of MAC learning information per port
show fdb table vid Display of MAC learning information per VLAN

Memo The information sorted by the MAC addresses per port basis is shown for the per port
basis display.

Clearing the MAC learning information
Clears the MAC learning information on a per port or per VLAN basis.

Commands
clear fdb table port Clearing of MAC learning information per port
clear fdb table vid Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN

Memo As for the all MAC learning information clearing event, a trap is sent indicating that all
entries have been cleared after the input of the command.

4-65
4.2.9 Port Mirroring
This system has the function to mirror traffic of a specific port to a port which is specified as a
mirroring output destination. With this function, traffic on network can be monitored.

Setting condition
In the mirroring function, one mirroring output destination port can be set per system.

Note Note the bandwidth of the mirroring origination. If multiple ports whose bandwidth use
rate is high are mirrored, the mirrored frames may get congested and be discarded.
Note This function cannot be set for other than the GbE and FE port.

Setting mirroring
The following are set as the mirroring start settings.
[1] Mirroring output destination port
Specified traffic to be mirrored is output by mirroring of the traffic.
[2] Mirroring target port (input side: in-port)
A frame input from a specified port is mirrored.
[3] Mirroring target port (output side: out-port)
A frame output from a specified port is mirrored.

The mirroring start settings cannot be configured in the following cases.
- If the mirroring output destination port and a port to be mirrored are redundantly set.
- If a VLAN is set for a port to be specified as the mirroring output destination port.
- If link aggregation is set for a port to be specified as the mirroring output destination port.

Note The mirroring setting is not the target of write memory.

4-66
Frame contents to be mirrored
[1] When a mirroring target port is a portbase VLAN.
When mirroring in the input side (in-port) is performed, a frame after tags for Ethernet type
(0x8100) to be used inside the device and the portbase VLAN ID setting are added is output to
the mirroring output destination port.
Also, a frame after QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

When mirroring in the output side (out-port) is performed, like the mirroring in the input side
(in-port), a frame before tags are removed is output to the mirroring output destination port.
Also, a frame before QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
CX2200
Switch
Mirroring
in the
input side
Output the mirrored
frame
Portbase VLAN
(Add a tag)
Port
Portbase VLAN
(Remove the
tag)
Port
Port
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/
p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

l
F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
CX2200
Mirroring
in the
output
side
Output the mirrored
frame
Portbase VLAN
(Add a tag)
Port
Portbase VLAN
(Remove the
tag)
Switch
Port
Port
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/
p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

l
F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
4-67
[2] When a mirroring target port is a tagbase VLAN
When mirroring in the input side (in-port) is performed, the Ethernet type is converted to
0x8100. If VLAN tag swapping has been set, frames whose tag was swapped are output to
Also, a frame after QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

When mirroring in the output side (out-port) is performed, the Ethernet type is converted to
0x8100. If VLAN tag swapping has been set, frames are output to the mirroring output
destination port before their tag is swapped.
Also, a frame before QoS control and filtering are applied is the mirroring target.

Note If the frame size is set to the mirroring output destination port, the frame size setting value
is the allowed frame size in the output side. Any frames that exceed the size will not be
mirrored.

Tagbase VLAN
(Tag swapping
setting)
CX2200
Output the mirrored
frame.
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag swapping
setting)
Switch
Port
Port
Port
Mirroring
in the
input side
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/
p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g

B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g

CX2200
Mirroring in
the output
side
Output the mirrored
frame.
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag swapping setting)
Switch
Port
Port
Port
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag swapping
setting)
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/
p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g
B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g

B
a
n
d
w
i
d
t
h
/

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

F
i
l
t
e
r
i
n
g

4-68
Commands
mirror port Setting of mirroring start or stop
show mirror port Display of mirroring settings

Input example
The following example shows how to mirror the traffic of the input side of the port 17 to be mirrored
to the mirroring output destination port 24.

[1] Indicates the mirroring output destination port.
[2] Indicates the mirroring target port (input side).
[3] Indicates the mirroring target port (output side)

Note Protocol control frame can be monitored only at the input side port of the mirroring target.

*Switch# mirror port start 24 in-port 17
*Switch#
*Switch# show mirror port
Mirror Information
==================
Mirror To
---------
Port: 24

Mirror From
---------------------------
In Port : 17
Out Port:

*Switch#
*Switch# mirror port stop
*Switch#

[1]
[2]
[3]
4-69
4.2.10 System Reboot
There are two methods to reboot CX2200, as described below. Since the rebooting procedure
differs with the method, choose the appropriate reboot method as needed.

Rebooting procedure Power off Reset
Self diagnosis
Program load
Startup configuration data load
Clearing of DRAM
: To be done : Not to be done

Rebooting by turning the power off and then on
This reboot method involves self diagnosis, program load, startup configuration data load, and
clearing of DRAM.

Reboot method
Make sure that no command is running, and then turn all the power switches to OFF. Wait for
about 30 seconds. Then, turn the power switches to ON again, and the system will automatically
reboot.

4-70
Rebooting by using the reset command
This reboot method involves program load, startup configuration data load, and clearing of DRAM.

Command
reset system Resetting of entire device

Reboot method
The "reset system" command reboots the system.

[1] Enter the command.
[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system. Press y and then Enter.

*Switch# reset system
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

<Omitted>

Switch>

[1]
[2]
4-71
4.2.11 Initialization
To reset all the data to their factory-set values, initialize CX2200. Once initialized, CX2200 can be
accessed only from the local console.
Initializing CX2200 clears the running configuration and startup configuration data settings.
To maintain the current running configuration and startup configuration data settings, back up the
data before initialization, as described in "2.7 Configuration Data" of this manual.
The time and date settings will remain unchanged even after initialization.

Initialization procedure
Take the following two steps:
(1) Clear the startup configuration data.
(2) Reboot the system by using the reset command.

(1) Clearing the startup configuration data
Clear the startup configuration data.

Command
clear startup-config Clearing of startup configuration

(2) Rebooting the system by using the reset command
Reboot CX2200 to validate the clearance of the startup configuration data in (1).

Command

4-72
Input example

[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to clear the configuration data. Press y and then
Enter.
[4] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system. Press y and then Enter.

Switch# clear startup-config all
Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch#
*Switch# reset system
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....

System Boot

<Omitted>

Switch>

[3]
[1]
[2]
[4]
4-73
4.2.12 Replacement
This section describes how to replace, expand, remove and add line cards and fan modules.

When you work on replacement

When inserting/removing cards and modules, pay attention to the following points.
[1] Insert/remove FAN units or cards wearing gloves.
[2] Insert/remove FAN units or cards with the unit installed in the rack.
[3] When inserting/removing FAN units and cards, hold the handle, ejectors, card front boards,
and hand screws using both hands.
[4] When removing LINE1/LINE2/CPUSW cards, make sure to turn off the power switch (PWR)
on the device front, and pull out the power cable. (FAN units can be inserted/removed
without turning off the power.)
[5] When LINE1/LINE2 cards are not installed, attach the dedicated blank panels instead of the
cards.
LINE1 card
LINE2 card
CPUSW card FAN unit

4-74
Describes the procedure for replacing a line
card.
Describes the procedure for replacing a line
card.
Describes the procedure for replacing a
CPUSW card.
Describes the procedure for replacing a FAN
module.
Describes the procedure for replacing the
fuse of the CPUSWE card.

4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card 4-75

4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card 4-77

4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card 4-79

4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit 4-83

4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE card 4-85

4-75
4.2.12.1 Replacing LINE1 card
Removal
[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the LINE1 card. Then, hold the both hand
screws and remove the LINE1 card while placing fingers on the card front side. (Some
pressure is put on the fingertips, but the card can be removed smoothly.)

Note Do not remove a line card while the PWR1 and PWR2 lamps are lit in green. Doing so
may cause an equipment failure.
Note Be sure to pull the two screws simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may
be warped or damaged.

Loosen the hand screws.
4-76
Insertion
[1] Set the both sides of a LINE1 card along the upper slot
on the chassis and move it backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the front panel side using both hands until you feel the
resistance due to connection of the card and the chassis connector.
Insert the card until gap between the rack mount side and the card front board is almost
cleared.
* Note: Do not push parts when inserting the card.

[3] Tighten the hand screws on the both sides by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten
the left and right hand screws together until almost no step between the front board and rack
mount side disappears and they contact each other.

Upper slot
Left hand screw
Right hand screw
4-77
4.2.12.2 Replacing LINE2 card
Removal
[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the LINE2 card. Then, hold the both hand
screws and remove the LINE2 card while placing fingers on the card front side. (Some
pressure is put on the fingertips, but the card can be removed smoothly.)

Note Be sure to pull the two screws simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may

4-78
Insertion
[1] Set the both sides of a LINE2 card along the upper
slot on the chassis and move it backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the front panel side using both hands until you feel the
resistance due to connection of the card and the chassis connector.
Insert the card until gap between the rack mount side and the card front board is almost
cleared.
* Note: Do not push parts when inserting the card.

[3] Tighten the hand screws on the both sides by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten
the left and right hand screws together until almost no step between the front board and rack
mount side disappears and they contact each other.

Upper slot
Left hand screw
Right hand screw
4-79
4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card
Removal
[1] First, loosen the hand screws on both sides of the SW card. Then, pull the CPUSW card
while slowly turning the ejectors on both sides outward. The card can be removed smoothly
without pressure on fingertips

Note Be sure to pull the two levers simultaneously with equal force; otherwise, the system may

[2] Pull out the CPUSW card toward you.

Note When replacing a CPUSW card, be sure to remove it after all the other line cards are
removed.
Left hand screw
Right hand screw
4-80
Insertion
[1] Set the both sides of a CPUSW card along the lower
slot on the chassis. Open the ejectors on both sides
of the card parallel to the card width and then move the
card backward.

[2] When moving the card backward, push the card until you feel the resistance due to connection
of the card and the chassis connector.

[3] Insert the card furthermore while slowly turning the ejectors on the both sides inward using
both hands.

Lower slot

CPUSW card
Left ejector
Right ejector
4-81
[4] When the ejectors are parallel to the cart front board, confirm that the gap between the device
rack mount side and the card front board is about 1 mm.

[5] Tighten the hand screws by turning them clockwise using fingers. Tighten the left and right
hand screws together until almost no step between the card front board and rack mount side
disappears and they contact each other.

Gap 1 mm
Hand screw
Contact
4-82
[Note when a CPUSW card is inserted]
The underside of a CPUSW card front board is engaged with the underside of the chassis at three
points of the left, center, and right parts. If you cannot insert the SW card, insert the card again to
engage the parts like the figure of the device underside.

Figure The center part which is not engaged (Figure shown from the side)

* When inserting a CPUSW card, make sure that the chassis is fixed to the rack.

Figure State that the SW card is inserted into the chassis

Three engaged points
Underside of the CPUSW card front board
Device
underside
4-83
4.2.12.4 Replacing a FAN unit
Removal
[1] Loosen the hand screw in the fan unit front board by
turning it counterclockwise using fingers.
[2] The hand screw is removed. Hold the handle and
pull out it using fingers.

Note Keep your hands away from the rotating fans; otherwise, you may get your fingers caught
and be injured. Make sure that the rotation of the fans comes to a complete halt, before
removing the module.

Insertion

[3] After pushing the card completely (see the picture shown on the right), tighten the hand screw
on the fan unit by turning it clockwise using fingers. Tighten the hand screw to insert the unit
furthermore until there is almost no step between the card front board and the rack mount side
and they contact each other.

[1] Insert a fan unit by pushing the center part
of the front board using fingers.
[2] Push the fan unit until the gap between the
fan unit front board and the rack mount side
is 1 mm.
Pull out the unit. Loosen the screw.
Completion of insertion Tighten the screw. Push the unit. Insert the unit.
About
1 mm
FAN unit front board
Rack
mount
Details of a FAN unit
Handle
4-84
Note When replacing the fan unit, make sure that the fans are removed (the fans are at a
complete halt) for not longer than 2 minutes under the environment where the temperature
is below 45C. Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if the fans are removed for over
2 minutes. In addition, replacing the fan unit under the environment where the
temperature is above 45C is not covered under warranty.
Note Lifetime of a fan unit is 3 years. Replace it periodically.

4-85
4.2.12.5 Replacing the fuse of the CPUSWE
card

[1] Remove the CPUSWE card from the CPUSW slot according to the procedure described in
4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card.
[2] Remove the fuse cover of the RWR1 or RWR2 fuse to be replaced.
[3] Remove the fuse whose cover was removed from the fuse folder.
[4] Using the tester, check that the fuse that was removed is damaged.
[5] Check that the replacement fuse is not damaged using the tester.
[6] Replace the damaged fuse with the replacement fuse and mount it in the fuse folder that was
removed.
[7] Mount the fuse cover on the fuse folder that was mounted.
[8] Insert the CPUSWE card with new fuse in the CPUSW slot according to the procedure
described in 4.2.12.3 Replacing a CPUSW card.
[9] Turn on the power switch after connecting the power cable and check that the power is
supplied to the fuse that was replaced.
Front of the unit
Rear of the unit
PWR1 fuse
(F1 3.15AH/250VP)
PWR2 fuse
(F2 3.15AH/250VP)
4-86
4.2.13 Resource Monitoring
CX2200 monitors the rate of CPU use and the rate of memory use.

Displaying the rate of CPU use
Shows the rate of CPU use is measured at 5-second, 1-minute, and 5-minute intervals, and the
latest average CPU use rates, as well as the peak values of the average CPU use rates measured
between the last read time and the current time, respectively.

Memo Each time this command is entered, the previously stored peak values are cleared.

Command
show resource cpu Display of CPU usage

Input example
The following example shows the rate of CPU use.

*Switch# show resource cpu
CPU Activity Information
========================
Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:--
Current Time :01/01/2004 03:39:27

The Rate of CPU Use
===================
Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)
--------------------------------------------------------
5 (sec) 7 11 (01/01/2004 03:36:40)
1 (min) 6 7 (01/01/2004 03:39:15)
5 (min) 6 6 (01/01/2004 03:39:04)

[1]
[2]
[6] [5] [4]
[3]
4-87
[1] The last read time is shown.
[2] The current time is shown.
[3] The average CPU use rate measurement time is shown.
[4] The latest average CPU use rate is shown.
[5] The peak value of the average CPU use rates measured between the last read time and the
current time is shown.
[6] The time when the peak value in [5] was recorded is shown.

Displaying the rate of memory use
Shows the rate of memory use, the size of memory space currently used, and the size of memory
space actually available.

Command
show resource memory Display of memory usage

Input example
The following example shows the rate of memory use.

*Switch# show resource memory
The Rate of Memory Use
======================
Rate(%) Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)
----------------------------------------------
39 17042776 / 42925880

*Switch#

4-88
4.2.14 NTP Function
The CX2200 supports the NTP function. NTP is a protocol for synchronizing the network times
between the NTP server and the CX2200. On the CX2200, two NTP servers can be set including
the priority (primary) server and alternate (secondary) server, and this ensures correct network
time synchronization. Time synchronization makes it possible to associate events by using the
time information when a system log is written or a certain event occurs.
The NTP function of the CX2200 uses SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Version3. Make
sure that the server you want to specify supports SNTP.
When the network time is synchronized, the console shows the execution result. The following
shows the list of trap messages.

Execution result Display
Normal termination for
priority server
IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED
Abnormal termination for
priority server
IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED
(PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)

If the synchronization with the priority server terminates abnormally, synchronization with the
network time of the alternate server is executed and the execution result of the priority server and
the alternate server is shown as additional information. The following shows the content of
additional information.

Additional information 1 Additional information 2 Meaning
Priority server error factor Alternate server error factor
NO ENTRY NO ENTRY
NO MEMORY NO MEMORY
BAD ARGUMENT BAD ARGUMENT
DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING
ERROR
DEVICE ADDRESS SETTING
ERROR
NO SERVER NO SERVER
SOCKET ERROR SOCKET ERROR
ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE ADDRESS ALREADY IN USE
BIND ERROR BIND ERROR
IOCTL ERROR IOCTL ERROR
TIMER ERROR TIMER ERROR
SIGNAL ERROR SIGNAL ERROR
NTP server access error
4-89
Additional information 1 Additional information 2 Meaning
SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED SYNCHRONIZATION FAILED
OTHER ERROR OTHER ERROR
SUCCEEDED

When (SUCCEEDED) is shown as the alternate server error factor of additional information 2,
synchronization with the network time is successful.
Set up the NTP server as follows. If the NTP server is inaccessible, network time synchronization
cannot be performed. It is recommended to confirm accessibility using the "ping" command.
Synchronize the network time after setting the IP address of the NTP server when the NTP access
time is already set on the NTP server, or after setting the access time to the NTP server when the
IP address of the NTP server is already set.
If the IP addresses of both the priority and alternate servers of the NTP server are set, first
synchronize the network time with the priority server. Only if it fails, synchronize the network time
with the alternate server.
Set the IP address of the NTP server (set ntp server).
Set the NTP access time to the NTP server (set ntp access-time).
To disable the NTP function, set the access time to 0.

Note As the server IP address, you cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx
to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx ("xxx" can be any number). If a server exists at the network address
of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set up the server but you cannot make
it communicate correctly.
Note When the time difference between the time set to CX2200 and the time of the NTP server
is 34 years or more, the time cannot be set properly.

Commands
set ntp server Setting of IP address of NTP server
set ntp access-time Setting of NTP access time
show ntp Display of NTP server setting information
clear ntp server Clearing of IP address of NTP server

4-90
Input example
The IP address of the priority server is set to 192.168.2.212, the IP address of the alternate priority
server to 192.168.2.201, and the access time to eight hours.

Switch# set ntp server primary 192.168.2.212
*Switch# set ntp server secondary 192.168.2.201
*Switch#
*Switch# set ntp access-time 8
*Switch#
*Switch# show ntp
NTP Server Configuration
========================
Primary IP Address : 192.168.2.212
Secondary IP Address : 192.168.2.201
Retrieval Time (hour): 8

*Switch#

Useful Functions
4-91
4.3 Useful Functions
4.3.1 Version Up
When a new version software program or new-version hardware data is released, update is
possible. For the version up, the new program file is downloaded from the ftp server through a
network, using the ftp client function of the CX2200.
You can use either a local console or a remote console to access the CX2200, as long as it can
access the CX2200.

Useful Functions
4-92
Confirm that the network between the CX2200
and the ftp server is normal.
Specify the ftp server IP address and the file to be
updated.
Specify user name of the ftp server.
Input password of the specified user name.
Execute update.
Confirm that the write was executed normally.
Restart the CX2200.
Confirm that update was performed successfully.
4.3.1.1 Version up procedure
When the program file is updated, the unit needs to be restarted. At this time,
automatically-created statistical information and MAC learning table information are lost.
Perform the version up by the following procedure.

1 Pre-preparation 4-93

2 Executing download command 4-93

3 Specifying user name 4-94

4 Specifying password 4-94

5 Executing update 4-94

6 Confirming version 4-95

7 Restart 4-95

8 Confirming version 4-96

Useful Functions
4-93
1 Pre-preparation
(1) Send a ping to the ftp server to check that the network between this unit and the ftp server is
normal.
(2) Save the running configuration data in the startup configuration data by the "write memory"
command.

Memo It is recommended to display the startup configuration data or the running configuration
data on the screen by the "show running-config" command and to save the data in a file
such as an editor log file for the worst.

Commands

2 Executing download command
Specify the IP address of the ftp server and the name of the file to be updated. The file name is
composed of a software version and a model name.

Note 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be specified
for the server IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) If the server exists in network
addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, the server can be set but correct

Commands
download software Downloading of software
download fpga Downloading of FPGA

Useful Functions
4-94
3 Specifying user name
Specify the user name of the server in which the file is saved.

4 Specifying password
Specify the password of the user account specified by the user name.

5 Executing update
Read the update software from the server and write it in the built-in flash memory.

Memo The down load time may become longer depending on any reasons such as the size of
data to be transferred, network traffic, ftp server performance, and LAN cable cabling.
The communication with the ftp server can be stopped forcibly by pressing Ctrl+c key
combination during download.
Confirm the size of data to be downloaded and the statuses of the network and ftp server.
Then, re-enter the command.
Note If the update does not terminate normally due to a network load, ftp server problems, or
the like, try the procedure again from step 1.

Useful Functions
4-95
6 Confirming version
Confirm the displayed version to see if the write in the built-in flash memory was executed
normally.
Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.
By checking the Latest Soft Ver or Latest Hard Ver, confirm that the version downloaded by steps
2 to 5 is displayed.

Note If the Latest Hard Ver indicates ff.ff.ff even though the "download fpga" command was
executed, the version is not updated. Try the procedure again from step 2.

Command
show system revision Display of various version information

7 Restart
Execute a restart to validate the updated software.

Command

Note When executing the "download fpga" command (download of FPGA), specify
fpga-version-up for the first parameter of the "reset system" command.

Useful Functions
4-96
8 Confirming version
Confirm the version display to see if the update was executed normally.
Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.
By checking the Current Software or Current Hardware, confirm that the version downloaded by
steps 2 to 5 is indicated.

Version up procedure example
The following network is assumed for explanation.
The program file of a new version is named cx2200_soft_020010.dlm.

Local console
ftp server (192.168.0.10)
Remote console
Higher switch
CX2200
CX2600/220 CX2600/220
Useful Functions
4-97
Input example

*Switch# download software 192.168.0.10 cx2200_soft_020010.dlm
Data Transferring.......................
Writing Flash Memory......................
*Switch# show system revision
System Revision
===============
Current Latest Backup Current Latest
Module Install Software Software Software Hardware Hardware
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cpusw : cpusw 01.00.07 02.00.10 01.00.07 01.01.01 01.01.01
Line1 : 32t1e1h --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a
Line2 : 2gbe --- --- --- 01.02.0a 01.02.0a

*Switch#

Useful Functions
4-98
4.3.2 Trap Transmission Selection
Function
The CX2200 groups messages in the unit of functions and enables and disables each group to be
sent as autonomous messages, Trap messages, local log messages, or remote log messages.

Trap groups
A group is composed of two or more members. Each member is composed of messages
classified according to their functions.

Group Group explanation Member Member explanation
critical critical error *1
major major error *1
minor minor error
fault Failure message
warning warning error *1
sfp SFP change
information

ntp NTP access error
connect telnet login and logout telnet telnet message
fail telnet abnormality
out-band Maintenance network load
(Out-band)
maintenance-network Maintenance network
message
in-band Maintenance network load
(In-band)
spantree Spanning tree
fdb MAC learning
aggregation Link aggregation
detect-f1f3 F1/F2/F3 alarm detection
detect-f4f5 F4-F5 alarm detection
atm-oam ATM OAM alarm
detect-minor MN alarm detection
unexpect-level Unexpect MEG Level
mismerge Mismerge
ether-oam EtherOAM alarm
unexpect-mep Unexpect MEP
Useful Functions
4-99
Group Group explanation Member Member explanation
unexpect-
period
Unexpect Period
loc LOC
rdi RDI
t1e1 T1E1OAM
information

tdmop TDMoP information
ima IMA group
loopback-atm ATM loopback event
ether-ring EtherRing event
command Command
(only for remote-log/
local-log)

snmp SNMP
(only for remote-log/
local-log)

*1. When disabled is set for the member, note that fatal failures are not notified.

Some groups have elements. Elements indicate message additional information such as port
numbers (including information such as individual Trap number and Trap-ID).

Group Group explanation Element Element explanation
private-trap Individual Trap 1-999 Individual Trap number
trap-id Trap-ID 1-999 Trap-ID number *1
port Port message 1-26, 33-48 Port number
link Link change *2 1-26, 33-48 Port number

*1. Element number 12 of the trap-id group corresponds to the SNMP authentication error
notification message. This message can be set only for Trap messages. (Other settings
cause setting errors.) In addition to this setting, also the "set snmp authen-trap" command
can enables/disables the sending. No Trap messages are sent if either this function or this
command disables the sending.
*2. In addition to this function, the "set port link-trap" command can enable/disable the sending.
Either this function or this command disables the sending, no Trap messages are sent.

Useful Functions
4-100
Note When a message belongs two or more members/elements, the message is sent only if
enabled is set for all of the members.
Memo For Trap messages corresponding to each group, see "the group correspondence table
for each specific trap and group correspondence table for each standard trap" in
Appendix.

Enabling/disabling Trap transmission selection
Enables or disables Trap transmission selection for each message type, each group, and each
member/element. Sending of all messages can be enabled or disabled by omitting message
types and groups when the command is entered.

Command
set message transmit Setting of trap transmission selection

Useful Functions
4-101
Displaying setting status of Trap transmission
selection
Shows the setting status of Trap transmission selection.

Command
show message transmit config Display of trap transmission selection setting status

Input example (1/2)
Display the setting status of Trap transmission selection


*Switch# show message transmit config
Message Transmit Configuration(Member)
======================================
Group Member Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
fault : critical enabled enabled enabled enabled
major enabled enabled enabled enabled
minor enabled enabled enabled enabled
warning enabled enabled enabled enabled
sfp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
ntp : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
Useful Functions
4-102
Input example (2/2)

Memo Whether to enable or disable message transmission cannot be set for monitor and trap of
the command group and monitor, remote-log, and local-log of the trap-id group element
12, so "---" is displayed.

telnet : connect enabled enabled enabled enabled
fail enabled enabled enabled enabled
maintenance-network : out-band enabled enabled enabled enabled
in-band enabled enabled enabled enabled
spantree : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
fdb : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
aggregation : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
atm-oam : detect-f1f3 enabled enabled enabled enabled
detect-f4f5 enabled enabled enabled enabled
detect-minor enabled enabled enabled enabled
ether-oam : unexpect-level enabled enabled enabled enabled
mismerge enabled enabled enabled enabled
unexpect-mep enabled enabled enabled enabled
unexpect-period enabled enabled enabled enabled
loc enabled enabled enabled enabled
rdi enabled enabled enabled enabled
t1e1 : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
tdmop : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
ima : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
loopback : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
ether-ring : --- enabled enabled enabled enabled
command : --- --- --- enabled enabled
snmp : --- --- --- enabled enabled

Message Transmit Configuration(Element)
=======================================
Group Element Monitor Trap Remote-log Local-log
-----------------------------------------------------------------
trap-id : 9 disabled disabled disabled disabled
12 --- disabled --- ---

*Switch#

Troubleshooting
4-103
4.4 Troubleshooting
When the local console cannot be used
Confirm the following points:
1) Is a straight cable used as the console cable?
2) Is local console communication set correctly?
3) Are the CX2200 power cables connected?

When communication is disabled

When communication to a specific network is disabled
Confirm continuity by using the "ping" command to the routers of the network with which
communication is disabled.
Check the continuity with the routers one by one, starting from the nearest to the using terminal to
the network with which continuity is disabled.
Thus, which router disables the communication can be determined. Confirm the routing table,
address, and cable of the determined router.

When communication is disabled intermittently
Confirm the traffic and load of the line. Also confirm that the cables are connected correctly and
that the used cables conform to the standard.

When communication is disabled completely
Confirm that all routers in the route are turned on and operate normally, or the communication
cables are not loose.

Troubleshooting
4-104
When the unit does not start
When the unit does not start, confirm the following items and take appropriate action:

When the ALM lamp on the front of the unit is turned on
When this lamp is turned on, confirm the installation environment of the unit (temperature,
humidity, etc.). If this lamp is turned on even though the installation environment is correct,
contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When the PWR1/2 lamp on the front of the unit is turned off
When this lamp is turned off, confirm that both of the two power cords are connected correctly.
If the PWR1/2 lamp is turned off even though the cords are connected correctly, the CPUSW card
may be faulty.
Contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When none of the lamps on the front of the unit is turned on
Confirm that power cords are connected correctly. If none of the lamps is turned on even though
the power cords are connected correctly, contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

Troubleshooting
4-105
When the unit restarts automatically
When the unit restarts automatically due to a failure of this unit, the following information items as
well as the status when the failure occurred are required.
Before contact the dealer or the service center in charge, collect the information.

1) Status when the failure occurred
Were installation works, such as network installation and terminal addition, being performed?
2) Statuses of the lamps on the front of this unit
Are the lamps on the front of this unit, such as the ALM, PWR and INS lamps, turned on?
3) Network configuration
In which network configuration and in which location, is the CX2200 used?
4) Setting information and failure information
Failure information collected immediately before the restart is automatically saved in RAM.
Collect the information by the following "failure information collection method".

If such an automatic restart occurs, your setting information and failure information are required.
The information is surely required for software failure analysis. If the information is not provided,
the failure cannot be analyzed.

5) Event information
If event information collection is set, collect the event information at occurrence of the failure.

Failure information collection method
Display the failure information by the "show fault" command to confirm the information.

Troubleshooting
4-106
To delete configuration data

To return running configuration data settings to startup
configuration data settings
To delete running configuration data settings and to return to startup configuration data settings,
restart the unit by the "reset system" command. In this case, the data settings are not saved in
the built-in flash memory.

Note Note that temporary data (including statistical information and automatically-collected
routing tables) is also deleted.

To return running configuration data settings to factory-set
settings
To delete running configuration data settings and return to factory-set settings, delete the data in
the built-in flash memory by the "clear startup-config all" command and restart the unit by the "reset
system" command.

Troubleshooting
4-107
When self diagnosis does not terminate normally
When the INS lamp indicating that the self diagnosis is in progress is kept turned on in yellow,
confirm the installation environment (temperature and humidity).
When the environment is normal, contact the dealer or the service center in charge.

When there is no command response
In addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the system log
information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local" command)
and contact the dealer or a sales personnel.

When software failure information occurs
When any information excluding "No entry in the table" is displayed for Exception Information, by
entering the "show fault past" command, a software failure has occurred. Automatic restore has
already been executed; however, service will be deteriorated if the same phenomenon occurs in
the future. So in addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the
system log information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local"
command) and contact the dealer or a sales personnel.

(blank page)

Appendix
1

Appendix

1 Outline.................................................................................. 3
2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism................................................ 3
3 Fault List ............................................................................ 18
4 Trap List ............................................................................. 24
5 Counter Monitoring Condition List .................................. 75
6 Command Error List.......................................................... 87
7 Restart Cause List ........................................................... 113
8 IMA State List................................................................... 114
Appendix
2
9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed
Connection List .................................................................. 116
10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List ................. 119
11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell
Reception............................................................................ 121

Appendix
3
1 Outline
This appendix lists faults, counter monitoring conditions, command errors, restart causes, and restrictions.

2 Alarm Transfer Mechanism
CX2200 monitors the line status of ports on the 32T1E1H/32T1E1T/1ATM155A line card. If an error occurs, CX2200 sends an alarm to the
maintenance interface and sends a notification to the remote device.

* For F4/F5 alarms, two types of alarms, segment-segment and end-segment, exist respectively.

Appendix
4
Alarm transfer mechanism of 32T1E1H/32T1E1T line card
1. Alarm transfer operation with TDM mode setting

* : Alarm output point, : Alarm detection point
*1) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, AIS is output only if LOS/AIS/LOF are detected at all the associated paths.

LOS
AIS
LOF
RAI
RAI
AIS
LOS/AIS/LOF detection at the

associated path side (Note1)
ACT-FLT
Appendix
5
2. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (SAToP) setting

* : Alarm output point,
: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side.
*1) When the frame format is unframed, LOF/RAI are not monitored since F-bit/F-byte are also treated as user data.
*2) When CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected in SAToP mode, frames with all '1' pattern are inserted from CESoP devices, and AIS is notified
to the remote device.

LOS
AIS
ACT-FLT
L bit
AIS
L bit
CESoP Buffer Underrun
AIS
RAI
LOF
R bit
AIS

Detected when the frame format is
other than unframed (Note1)
R bit
ALL1 data output (Note2)

Appendix
6
3. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (CESoPSN) setting

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side.
*1) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, the line alarm transfer operation is performed for all the paths.
*2) When multiple TDM paths exists in the same line, L bit is output for all the paths; otherwise, AIS is output only if CESoP Buffer Underrun is
detected.

LOS

ACT-FLT
L bit (Note1)
AIS
L bit (Note2)
CESoP Buffer Underrun (Note2)
LOF
RAI
AIS
RAI
M bit (Note1)
AIS
R bit (Note1)
M bit
R bit
Appendix
7
4. Alarm transfer operation with ATMoP mode setting

: Alarm detection point

*1) For an IMA group, alarms are mapped to F4/F5 alarms only when the number of normal physical lines does not satisfy the number of
minimum required links.
*2) AIS is transmitted only when a line card device fault (CR) has occurred.

LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
LOF (F1)
Mapped to F4/F5 alarms (Note1)
RAI (F1)
AIS (F1)
Appendix
8
Alarm transfer mechanism of 1ATM155A line card

: Alarm detection point

LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-RDI (F2)
LOP (F3)
LCD (F3)
MS-REI (F2)
P-AIS (F3)
MS-REI (F2)
Mapped to F4/F5 alarms
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
Appendix
9
F4/F5 alarm transfer mechanism
1. Alarm transfer operation with VP connection setting
1.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4 end point setting


* F4/F5 level alarms include both Segment/End-to-End flows.
* The flow point setting for the F5 level alarm at the device side is always transparent due to the fixed connecting point.
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-AIS (F4)
ACT-FLT
Mapping by F1-F3 alarm detection

Appendix
10
1.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 connecting point setting


VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-AIS (F4) VP-AIS (F4)
ACT-FLT

Appendix
11
1.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting


VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-AIS (F4)
ACT-FLT

Appendix
12
2. Alarm transfer operation with VC connection setting
2.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4/F5 end point setting


* F4/F5 level alarms are Segment flow only.
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5) VC-AIS (F5)
ACT-FLT
VC-RDI (F5)
F4 to F5 option setting

Appendix
13
2.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 end point/F5 connecting point setting



VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
ACT-FLT
F4 to F5 optional setting

Appendix
14
2.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 end point/F5 flow point setting


VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
ACT-FLT

Appendix
15
2.4. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting/with F5 end point setting


VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
ACT-FLT
VC-RDI (F5)

Appendix
16
2.5. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting/with F5 connecting point setting



VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
ACT-FLT

Appendix
17
2.6. Alarm transfer operation without F4/F5 flow point setting


VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
ACT-FLT

Appendix
18
3 Fault List
The table below indicates the meanings of the importance levels used in the fault list.

Meanings of importance levels

Importance level CR (Critical) MJ (Major) MN (Minor) WR (Warning) CL (Cleared) IF (Information)
Meaning Critical fault Major fault Minor fault Warning Fault recovery Information
Fault level
High Low

Appendix
19
Details of device fault importance levels

Function name Function details
CR (Critical): Critical fault Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state has occurred and that immediate recovery processing
is required. This level is reported, for example, when the continuity of the management object is stopped and its
capability must be recovered.
The device notifies the maintenance personnel and takes immediate actions (stop of autonomous operation at
temperature failure in the high-temperature side).
ALM-LED is turned on. This level of fault is recovered only when the device is reset.
MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state is worsening and that urgent recovery processing is
required. This level is reported, for example, when the capability of the management object is materially degraded and
the capability must be recovered to the normal state.
The device notifies the maintenance personnel of a partial fault only and takes an action.
A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered. Other faults are recovered only when the device is reset.
MN (Minor): Minor fault Indicates that there is a fault not affecting the continuity and device state and that recovery processing is required to
protect against the occurrence of a more serious fault (e.g., a fault that affects the continuity or device state). This
level is reported, for example, when the state of a detected alarm has not affected the capability of the management
object yet.
ALM-LED is not turned on. The state already recovered is indicated.
WR (Warning): Warning Indicates a situation where a latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state is detected before a
serious influence emerges. If necessary, a detailed diagnosis should be made and a corrective action should be taken
to prevent the situation from further worsening to a serious fault that affects the continuity and device state.
A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered. Other faults are recovered only when the device is reset.
CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates a situation recovered from a fault that affects the continuity or device state or a situation recovered from a
latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state before a serious influence emerges.
IF (Information): Information Posts information about node autonomous/remote controlled results, state changes, and actions.

Appendix
20
Details of line fault importance levels

Line type Fault level Fault description
CR (Critical): Critical fault None
MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that the port link is down. (Protection time is specified by a command.)
MN (Minor): Minor fault None
Ethernet
CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that the port link is up. (Protection time is specified by a command.)
MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.
MN (Minor): Minor fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is detected, but it is recovered within one second.
ATM
CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that recovery of a transmission path alarm is continued for more than one second.
MJ (Major): Major fault Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.
MN (Minor): Minor fault None
T1/E1
CL (Cleared): Fault recovery Indicates that a transmission path alarm is continuously detected for more than one second.

Appendix
21
CPUSW card/line card state transitions for each importance level

For each importance level, the table below indicates CPUSW card/line card state transitions made when a fault has occurred.

CPUSW card fault Line card fault
CR (Critical): Critical fault The CPUSW card makes a transition to the fault state
(FAULT).
In this device, a CPUSW card fault (FAULT) is a device
fault.
The LINE card makes a transition to the fault state
(FAULT).
In this device, a LINE card fault (FAULT) is a device fault.
MJ (Major): Major fault No CPUSW card state transition occurs.
No LINE card state transition occurs.
No CPUSW card state transition occurs.
MN (Minor): Minor fault No CPUSW card state transition occurs.
WR (Warning): Warning No CPUSW card state transition occurs.
CL (Cleared): Recovery The CPUSW card, if faulty, is recovered. The LINE card, if faulty, is recovered.

Appendix
22
Fault list

No. Fault description Level
CPUSW
LED
LINE
LED
Suspect
component
Remarks
1 Fan fault MJ FAN
2 Fan fault recovery CL FAN
3 System CPU fault (CR) CR CPUSW This is autonomously reset 10 to 20 seconds later. (Note 1)
4 CPUSW card device fault (CR) CR CPUSW
5 CPUSW card device fault (MJ) MJ CPUSW
6 CPUSW card device fault (MN) MN CPUSW
7 CPUSW card device fault (WR) WR CPUSW
8 CPUSW card device fault recovery CL - CPUSW
9 Software fault (CR) CR CPUSW
10 Software fault (WR) WR CPUSW
11 Software fault recovery CL CPUSW
12 LINE card device fault (CR) CR LINE
13 LINE card device fault (MJ) MJ LINE
14 LINE card device fault (MN) MN LINE
15 LINE card device fault (WR) WR LINE
16 LINE card device fault recovery CL LINE
17 System temperature fault (CR) CR The power is shut down 10 seconds later.
18 System temperature fault (WR) WR
19 System temperature fault recovery CL
20 Power fault (MJ) MJ POWER
Appendix
23
No. Fault description Level
CPUSW
LED
LINE
LED
Suspect
component
Remarks
21 Power fault recovery CL POWER

*1) When the "set fault auto-reboot" function to be used for autonomous reset upon a fault is disabled, no reset occurs.
However, a reset occurs at the time of detection before restart completion, regardless of whether the function is disabled.
* CPUSW/LINE-LED column: : ALM turned on, : ALM blinking, : ALM blinking canceled

Appendix
24
4 Trap List

Specific trap number definition

Specific
trap
number
Trap name Level Description syslog group
1 cx22-mbhTrapSessionStatus IF User login state TRAP_SYSINF
2 cx22-mbhTrapNtpAccess IF NTP access result TRAP_SYSINF
3 cx22-mbhTrapMessageDiscarded IF TRAP message discard state TRAP_SYSINF
4 cx22-mbhTrapNetworkOverload WR Blocking due to network overload TRAP_SYSWAR
5 cx22-mbhTrapNetworkOverloadRcv CL Unblocking due to network overload recovery TRAP_SYSCLR
6 cx22-mbhTrapStpNewRootBridge IF New root switch detected TRAP_ROUTEINF
7 cx22-mbhTrapStpTopologyChange IF Network topology change detected TRAP_ROUTEINF
8 cx22-mbhTrapStpProtocolMigration IF STP frame received from remote side during
RSTP operation
TRAP_ROUTEINF
9 cx22-mbhTrapStpInvalidBpduReceived IF Invalid BPDU detected during STP operation TRAP_ROUTEINF
10 cx22-mbhTrapFdbTableClearStatus IF All FDB clearing request completed TRAP_ROUTEINF
11 cx22-mbhTrapLagPortStatusChange IF Operation verification in LACPDU
reception/non-reception
TRAP_ROUTEINF
12 cx22-mbhTrapLagLoopDetect IF Loopback detected TRAP_ROUTEINF
CR TRAP_SYSFLT 13 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemSoftware
WR
Software fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
14 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemSoftwareRecover CL Software fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
Appendix
25
Specific
trap
number
CR TRAP_SYSFLT 15 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemTemp
WR
Temperature fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
16 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemTempRecover CL Temperature fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
17 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemProcessor CR CPU fault occurred TRAP_SYSFLT
18 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemFan MJ FAN fault occurred TRAP_SYSMJR
19 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemFanRecover CL FAN fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
CR TRAP_SYSFLT
MJ TRAP_SYSMJR
MN TRAP_SYSMNR
20 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfCpuswDevice
WR
CPUSW card device fault
TRAP_SYSWAR
21 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfCpuswDeviceRecover CL CPUSW card device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
CR TRAP_SYSFLT
MJ TRAP_SYSMJR
MN TRAP_SYSMNR
22 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfLineDevice
WR
LINE card device fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
23 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfLineDeviceRecover CL LINE card device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
24 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemory WR External memory fault occurred TRAP_SYSWAR
25 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemoryRecover CL External memory fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
26 cx22-mbhTrapSystemCpuswStatus IF CPUSW operation state transition TRAP_SYSINF
27 cx22-mbhTrapSystemFanuStatus IF FAN unit operation state transition TRAP_SYSINF
28 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpStatus IF SFP operation state transition notification TRAP_PORTINF
Appendix
26
Specific
trap
number
29 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxError MJ Receive optical disconnection error detection
notification
TRAP_PORTMJR
30 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxErrorRecover CL Receive optical disconnection error recovery
notification
TRAP_PORTCLR
31 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxError MJ Transmit optical disconnection error detection
notification
TRAP_PORTMJR
32 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxErrorRecover CL Transmit optical disconnection error recovery
notification
TRAP_PORTCLR
33 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevel MJ Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level detection
notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
34 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevelRecov
er
CL Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level recovery
notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
35 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamMismerge MJ Ether OAM Mismerge detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR
36 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamMismergeRecover CL Ether OAM Mismerge recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR
37 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMep MJ Ether OAM Unexpected MEP detection
notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
38 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMepRecove
r
CL Ether OAM Unexpected MEP recovery
notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
39 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriod MJ Ether OAM Unexpected Period detection
notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
40 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriodReco
ver
CL Ether OAM Unexpected Period recovery
notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
41 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamLoc MJ Ether OAM LOC detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR
42 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamLocRecover CL Ether OAM LOC recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR
43 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamRdi MJ Ether OAM RDI detection notification TRAP_ROUTEMJR
44 cx22-mbhTrapEtherOamRdiRecover CL Ether OAM RDI recovery notification TRAP_ROUTECLR
Appendix
27
Specific
trap
number
45 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockReferenceChange IF Reference clock status change TRAP_SYSINF
46 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockFreerun IF Reference clock status change (free run status) TRAP_SYSINF
47 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisDetect MJ Segment VP-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
48 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisRecover CL Segment VP-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
49 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisImmediateR
ecover
MN Segment VP-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
50 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisDetect MJ End-to-End VP-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
51 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisRecover CL End-to-End VP-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
52 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisImmediateR
ecover
MN End-to-End VP-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
53 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiDetect MJ Segment VP-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
54 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiRecover CL Segment VP-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
55 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN Segment VP-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
56 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiDetect MJ End-to-End VP-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
57 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiRecover CL End-to-End VP-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
58 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN End-to-End VP-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
59 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisDetect MJ Segment VC-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
60 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisRecover CL Segment VC-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
61 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisImmediateR
ecover
MN Segment VC-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
62 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisDetect MJ End-to-End VC-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
63 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisRecover CL End-to-End VC-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
Appendix
28
Specific
trap
number
64 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisImmediateR
ecover
MN End-to-End VC-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
65 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiDetect MJ Segment VC-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
66 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiRecover CL Segment VC-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
67 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN Segment VC-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
68 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiDetect MJ End-to-End VC-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
69 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiRecover CL End-to-End VC-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
70 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN End-to-End VC-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
71 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosDetect MJ LOS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
72 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosRecover CL LOS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
73 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofDetect MJ LOF detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
74 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofRecover CL LOF recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
75 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisDetect MJ MS-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
76 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisRecover CL MS-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
77 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdDetect MJ MS-SD detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
78 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdRecover CL MS-SD recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
79 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiDetect MJ MS-RDI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
80 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiRecover CL MS-RDI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
81 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrDetect MJ MS-ERR detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
82 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrRecover CL MS-ERR recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
83 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiDetect MJ MS-REI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
Appendix
29
Specific
trap
number
84 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiRecover CL MS-REI recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
85 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopDetect MJ LOP detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
86 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopRecover CL LOP recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
87 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisDetect MJ P-AIS detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
88 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisRecover CL P-AIS recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
89 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdDetect MJ LCD detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR
90 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdRecover CL LCD recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR
91 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemPower MJ POWER fault TRAP_SYSMJR
92 cx22-mbhTrapFltInfSystemPowerRecover CL POWER fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
93 cx22-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortDetect MJ Line warning occurred (LOS/AIS/LOF/RAI) TRAP_ROUTEMJR
94 cx22-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortRecover CL Line warning recovered (NORMAL) TRAP_ROUTECLR
95 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpFault MJ SFP fault detection notification TRAP_PORTMJR
96 cx22-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpFaultRecover CL SFP fault recovery notification TRAP_PORTCLR
97 cx22-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunDetect MJ Lack of reception amount of Ether frames to be
loaded on TDMoP T1/E1 frames
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
98 cx22-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunRecover CL Lack of reception amount of Ether frames to be
loaded on TDMoP T1/E1 frames resolved
TRAP_ROUTECLR
99 cx22-mbhTrapTdmAdaptiveClockStatusChange IF Adaptive Clock status change TRAP_SYSINF
100 cx22-mbhTrapAtm155AdaptiveClockStatusChan
ge
IF Adaptive Clock status change TRAP_SYSINF
101 cx22-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDown MJ IMA group traffic status DOWN detection
notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
102 cx22-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDownRecover CL IMA group traffic status DOWN recovery
notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
Appendix
30
Specific
trap
number
103 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosImmediateR
ecover
MN LOS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
104 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofImmediateRe
cover
MN LOF immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
105 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisImmediate
Recover
MN MS-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
106 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdImmediate
Recover
MN MS-SD immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
107 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiImmediat
eRecover
MN MS-RDI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
108 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrImmediate
Recover
MN MS-ERR immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
109 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiImmediat
eRecover
MN MS-REI immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
110 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopImmediateR
ecover
MN LOP immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
111 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisImmediate
Recover
MN P-AIS immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
112 cx22-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdImmediateR
ecover
MN LCD immediate recovery TRAP_ROUTEMNR
113 cx22-mbhTrapAtmLoopOverload MN Loopback cell discard notification TRAP_SYSMNR
114 cx22-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF4StatusChange IF F4 loopback monitoring result transition
notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
115 cx22-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF5StatusChange IF F5 loopback monitoring result transition
notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
116 cx22-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultDetect WR CESoP device fault occurred TRAP_SYSWAR
Appendix
31
Specific
trap
number
117 cx22-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultRecover CL CESoP device fault recovered TRAP_SYSCLR
118 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingStatusChange IF EtherRing transmission path state transition
notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
119 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoop MJ EtherRing transmission path state LOOP
detection notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
120 cx22-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoopRecover CL EtherRing transmission path state LOOP
recovery notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
121 cx22-mbhTrapReferenceClockMultipleSourceCh
ange
IF Line-independent clock reference clock state
transition
TRAP_SYSINF
122 cx22-mbhTrapSystemResourceCPUStatusBusy IF CPU overload (one minute or more) TRAP_SYSINF
123 cx22-mbhTrapSystemResourceCPUStatusBusy
Recover
IF CPU overload is recovered TRAP_SYSINF

Appendix
32
Specific trap list

No. Trap ID
Output character string
(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
1 13 IF TELNET LOGIN (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP
address
telnet login
2 14 IF TELNET LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP
address
telnet logout
3 15 IF TELNET ACCESS DENIED (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP
address
telnet connection reject
4 16 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR
(TERMINAL:%s,EXECUTION TERMINAL:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Clear session
entry terminal
address
telnet session clear
5 17 IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT (TERMINAL:%s) Terminal IP
address
telnet timeout
6 18 IF TELNET LOGIN AUTHENTICATION FAILED
(TERMINAL:%s)
Terminal IP
address
telnet login failure five
times
7 19 IF TELNET LOGIN (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s) Terminal IP
address
telnet login (account
name login)
8 20 IF TELNET LOGOUT
(TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet logout (account
name login)
9 21 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR
(TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s,EXECUTION
TERMINAL:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet session clear
(account name login)
10 22 IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT
(TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
Clear session
entry terminal IP
address
telnet timeout (account
name login)
11 23 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN Serial login
12 24 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT Serial logout
Appendix
33
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
13 25 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT Serial timeout
14 26 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN AUTHENTICATION
FAILED
Serial login failure five
times
15 27 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN (USER:%s) Terminal login
account name
Serial login (account
name login)
16 28 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT (USER:%s) Terminal login
account name
Serial logout (account
name login)
17 29 IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT
(USER:%s)
Terminal login
account name
Serial timeout (account
name login)
Primary access
result
Secondary access
result
NO ENTRY NO ENTRY
NO MEMORY NO MEMORY
BAD ARGUMENT BAD ARGUMENT
DEVICE
ADDRESS
SETTING
ERROR
DEVICE
ADDRESS
SETTING
ERROR
NO SERVER NO SERVER
SOCKET ERROR SOCKET ERROR
ADDRESS
ALREADY IN
USE
ADDRESS
ALREADY IN
USE
BIND ERROR BIND ERROR
IOCTL ERROR IOCTL ERROR
18 30 IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED
(PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)
TIMER ERROR TIMER ERROR
NTP access result
Appendix
34
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
SIGNAL ERROR SIGNAL ERROR
SYNCHRONIZATI
ON FAILED
SYNCHRONIZATI
ON FAILED
OTHER ERROR OTHER ERROR
SUCCEEDED
19 31 IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED NTP access result
(success)
20 32 IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
(CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)
TRAP message discard
state
21 33 IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER TRAP message discard
state
22 34 WR NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT
DOWN
Blocking due to network
overload (out-band)
23 36 WR NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT
DOWN
Blocking due to network
overload (in-band)
24 35 CL NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT UP Unblocking due to
network overload
recovery (out-band)
25 37 CL NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT UP Unblocking due to
network overload
recovery (in-band)
Port number Port roll state

Additional
information 4
26 38 IF STP NEW ROOT BRIDGE DETECTED (/%d,
STATUS:%s, BRIDGE:%s, CAUSE:%s)
New root switch
detection cause
ROOT PORT
Bridge identifier
(Switch priority +
MAC address)
When a new root switch
is detected, the MAC
address of the root
switch is output as well
Appendix
35
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
BRIDGE
INITIALIZATION
PORT PRIORITY
CHANGE
BRIDGE
PRIORITY
CHANGE
PORT INFO
AGING
SUPERIOR
MESSAGE
RECEIVE
PORT
PATHCOST
CHANGE
PORT ADMIN
EDGE CHANGE
PORT DEFAULT
PATH COST
CHANGE
SPANTREE
DISABLE
27 39 IF STP TOPOLOGY CHANGED Outputs when a network
topology change is
detected
STP version
STP
28 40 IF STP PROTOCOL MIGRATION
(%d,VERSION:%s)
Port number
RSTP
Outputs when a port
receives an STP frame
from the remote side
during RSTP operation
Appendix
36
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Detailed cause of
invalid BPDU
information
PROTOCOL_ID
BPDU_TYPE
TCN_LENGTH
RST_LENGTH
CONFIG_LENGT
H
MAX_AGE
FWD_DELAY
29 41 IF STP INVALID BPDU RECEIVED
(%d,CAUSE:%s,DETAIL:%d)
Port number
HELLO_TIME
Detailed value of
invalid BPDU
information
Outputs the cause of
each invalid BPDU
detected on a port
during STP operation
30 42 IF ALL CLEAR FDB TABLE ENTRY FINISHED Posts that all FDB table
entries have been
cleared in response to a
request.
ACTIVE
STANDBY
DOWN
31 43 IF LAG PORT STATUS CHANGED
(%d,INDEX:%d,STATUS:%s)
Port number LAG index
BLOCK
Confirmation of recovery
in
reception/non-reception
of LAG:LACPDU
32 44 IF LAG LOOPBACK DETECTED
(%d,INDEX:%d)
Port number LAG index LAG: loopback detection
(supporting
dot3ad/passive mode)
33 45 CR SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT
(CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)
Fault category Detailed
information
Posts that system
software fault has
occurred
Appendix
37
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
34 46 WR SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT
information
Posts that system
software fault has
occurred
35 47 CL SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAULT
(CATEGORY:%x)
information
Posts that system
software fault has
recovered
36 48 CR SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT
information
Posts that system
temperature fault has
occurred
37 49 WR SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT
information
Posts that system
occurred
38 50 CL SYSTEM TEMPERATURE FAULT
(CATEGORY:%x)
information
Posts that system
recovered
39 51 CR SYSTEM PROCESSOR FAULT
information
Posts that system CPU
fault has occurred
40 52 MJ FAN DEVICE FAULT
(FAN#%d,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)
FAN number Fault category Detailed
information
Posts that fan fault has
occurred
41 53 CL FAN DEVICE FAULT
(FAN#%d,CATEGORY:%x)
FAN number Fault category Posts that fan fault has
recovered
42 54 CR CPUSW DEVICE FAULT
information
Posts that CPUSW card
device fault has
occurred
43 55 MJ CPUSW DEVICE FAULT
information
device fault has
occurred
Appendix
38
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
44 57 MN CPUSW DEVICE FAULT
information
device fault has
occurred
45 58 WR CPUSW DEVICE FAULT
information
device fault has
occurred
46 56 CL CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x) Fault category Posts that CPUSW card
device fault has
recovered
47 59 CL CPUSW DEVICE FAULT (CATEGORY:%x) Fault category Posts that CPUSW card
device fault has
recovered
48 60 CR LINE DEVICE FAULT
(%s,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)
LINE card number
LINE#1-2
information
Posts that LINE card
device fault has
occurred
49 61 MJ LINE DEVICE FAULT
LINE card number
LINE#1-2
information
device fault has
occurred
50 63 MN LINE DEVICE FAULT
LINE card number
LINE#1-2
information
device fault has
occurred
51 64 WR LINE DEVICE FAULT
LINE card number
LINE#1-2
information
device fault has
occurred
52 62 CL LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x) LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Fault category Posts that LINE card
device fault has
recovered
53 65 CL LINE DEVICE FAULT (%s,CATEGORY:%x) LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Fault category Posts that LINE card
device fault has
recovered
Appendix
39
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
54 66 WR EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT
information
Posts that external
memory fault has
occurred
55 67 CL EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT
information
Posts that external
memory fault has
recovered
56 68 IF CPUSW STATUS CHANGED
(STATUS:%s,CAUSE:%s)
ACT
ACT-FLT
COMMAND WAS
INPUTTED
RESTARTED
FAULT
OCCURRED
Posts that SW module
state has changed
57 69 IF FANU STATUS CHANGED (STATUS:%s,
SPEED:%s)
UNMOUNT
MOUNT
NONE
HIGH
LOW
Posts that FAN unit
state has changed
UNMOUNTED 58 70 IF SFP STATUS CHANGED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number
MOUNTED
Posts that SFP module
state has changed
59 71 MJ SFP RX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical input
fault
Posts that receive
optical disconnection
error has occurred
60 72 CL SFP RX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical input
fault recovery
Posts that receive
error has recovered
61 73 MJ SFP TX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical output
fault
Posts that transmit
error has occurred
62 74 CL SFP TX ERROR (%d) Port number SFP optical output
fault recovery
Posts that transmit
error has recovered
Appendix
40
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
63 75 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL
DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP
ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
MEG Level Trap to be transmitted
when MEP of EtherOAM
has transited to the
Unexpected MEG Level
state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
64 76 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP
ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
65 77 MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG
INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
Mismerge state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
66 78 CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
Mismerge state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
67 79 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
(MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG
MEG ID MEP ID
Unexpected MEP state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
68 80 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the

Appendix
41
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
69 81 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
Unexpected Period state
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
70 82 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
MEG Index MEP Index MEG Level
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
71 83 MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP
ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID PeerMEP ID
Trap to be transmitted
is transited to the LOC
state
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
72 84 CL ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG
ID:%d)
recovers from the LOC
state
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
73 85 MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG
ID:%d)
is transited to the RDI
state
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
74 86 CL ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG
ID:%d)
recovers from the RDI
state

Appendix
42
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Clock status
NORMAL
75 87 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK CHANGED
(PRIORITY:%d, STATUS:%s)
Priority
1-3
ACQUIRING
when the reference
clock has changed to an
other-priority source
clock
76 88 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK CHANGED (%s) STANDALONE Trap to be transmitted
when the reference
clock has changed to
free-run state
77 89 MJ SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
Port number VPI value Trap to be transmitted
when Segment VP-AIS
is detected
78 90 CL SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
upon recovery from the
Segment VP-AIS state
79 91 MN SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when Segment VP-AIS
immediate recovery is
detected
80 92 MJ END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when End-to-End
VP-AIS is detected
81 93 CL END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
End-to-End VP-AIS
state
82 94 MN END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when End-to-End
VP-AIS immediate
recovery is detected
Appendix
43
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
83 95 MJ SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when Segment VP- RDI
is detected
84 96 CL SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
Segment VP-RDIstate
85 97 MN SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when Segment VP-RDI
detected
86 98 MJ END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when End-to-End
VP-RDI is detected
87 99 CL END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
End-to-End VP-RDI
state
88 100 MN END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED
(%d,VPC:%d)
when End-to-End
VP-RDI immediate
89 101 MJ SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
Port number VPI value VCI value Trap to be transmitted
when Segment VC-AIS
is detected
90 102 CL SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
Segment VC-AIS state
91 103 MN SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when Segment VC-AIS
detected
Appendix
44
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
92 104 MJ END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when End-to-End
VC-AIS is detected
93 105 CL END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
End-to-End VC-AIS
state
94 106 MN END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when End-to-End
VC-AIS immediate
95 107 MJ SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when Segment VC-RDI
is detected
96 108 CL SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
Segment VC-RDI state
97 109 MN SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when Segment VC-RDI
detected
98 110 MJ END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when End-to-End
VC-RDI is detected
99 111 CL END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
End-to-End VC-RDI
state
Appendix
45
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
100 112 MN END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED
(%d,PVC:%d/%d)
when End-to-End
VC-RDI immediate
101 113 MJ LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOS is
detected
102 114 CL LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOS is
recovered
103 115 MJ LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOF is
detected
104 116 CL LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOF is
recovered
105 117 MJ MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-AIS is
detected
106 118 CL MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-AIS is
recovered
107 119 MJ MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-SD is
detected
108 120 CL MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-SD is
recovered
109 121 MJ MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-RDI is
detected
110 122 CL MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-RDI is
recovered
111 123 MJ MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS- ERR
is detected
112 124 CL MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-ERR
is recovered
Appendix
46
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
113 125 MJ MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-REI is
detected
114 126 CL MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when MS-REI is
recovered
115 127 MJ LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOP is
detected
116 128 CL LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LOP is
recovered
117 129 MJ P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when P-AIS is
detected
118 130 CL P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when P-AIS is
recovered
119 131 MJ LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LCD is
detected
120 132 CL LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Outputs when LCD is
recovered
121 133 MJ POWER DEVICE FAULT
(POWER#%d,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)
POWER number Fault category Detailed
information
Posts that POWER fault
has occurred
122 134 CL POWER DEVICE FAULT
(POWER#%d,CATEGORY:%x)
POWER number Fault category Posts that POWER fault
has recovered
123 135 MJ LINK ALARM DETECTED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number Line fault
occurrence status
(LOS/AIS/LOF/
RAI)
Outputs when line failure
occurrence of is
detected
124 136 CL LINK ALARM DETECTED (%d,STATUS:%s) Port number Line fault
occurrence status
(NORMAL)
Outputs when line failure
occurrence of is
recovered
Appendix
47
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
125 137 MJ SFP FAULT (%d,%x) Port number SFP fault Posts that SFP fault has
occurred
126 138 CL SFP FAULT (%d) Port number Posts that SFP fault has
recovered
127 139 MJ TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED
(%s,GROUP:%d)
Port number Group number Outputs when Buffer
Underrun has occurred
128 140 CL TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED
(%s,GROUP:%d)
Port number Group number Outputs when Buffer
Underrun is recovered
129 141 IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED
(%s,GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)
Port number Group number Adaptive Clock
status
(NOT-RUNNING/
FREERUN/
HOLDOVER/
ACQUIRING/
ACQUIRED)
Outputs when the
Adaptive Clock status
has changed
130 142 IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED
(%s,STATUS:%s)
LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Adaptive Clock
status
(NOT-RUNNING/
FREERUN/
HOLDOVER/
ACQUIRING/
ACQUIRED)
Outputs when the
Adaptive Clock status
has changed
131 143 MJ IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED
(INDEX:%d)
IMA group
number
Outputs when IMA
group traffic down has
occurred
132 144 CL IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED
(INDEX:%d)
IMA group
number
Outputs when IMA
group traffic down is
recovered
133 145 MN LOS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when LOS immediate
Appendix
48
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
134 146 MN LOF DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when LOF immediate
135 147 MN MS-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when MS-AIS immediate
136 148 MN MS-SD DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when MS-SD immediate
137 149 MN MS-RDI DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when MS-RDI
detected
138 150 MN MS-ERR DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when MS-ERR
detected
139 151 MN MS-REI DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when MS-REI
detected
140 152 MN LOP DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when LOP immediate
141 153 MN P-AIS DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when P-AIS immediate
142 154 MN LCD DETECTED (%d) Port number Trap to be transmitted
when LCD immediate
Appendix
49
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
143 155 MN ATM LOOPBACK CELL OVERLOAD (%s) LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Outputs when loopback
cell discard has
occurred
F4 loopback
monitoring result
SUCCESS
144 156 IF ATM KEEPALIVE TEST STATUS CHANGED
(%s,VPC:%d,%s)
Port number VPI value
FAIL
Outputs when F4
loopback monitoring
result has changed
Port number VPI value VCI value
Additional
information 4
F5 loopback
monitoring result
SUCCESS
145 157 IF ATM KEEPALIVE TEST STATUS CHANGED
(%s,PVC:%d/%d,%s)
FAIL

Outputs when F5
loopback monitoring
result has changed
146 158 WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s) LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Outputs when a CESoP
device fault has
occurred
147 159 CL CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s) LINE card number
LINE#1-2
Outputs when a CESoP
device fault is
recovered
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
148 160 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP
ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
state
(MEG ID: Hex. display is
supported)

Appendix
50
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
149 161 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP
ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
state
supported)
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
150 162 MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d)
MEG ID MEP ID
Mismerge state
supported)
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
151 163 CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
Mismerge state
supported)
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
152 164 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
supported)

Appendix
51
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
153 165 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
supported)
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
154 166 MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
supported)
MEG Index MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
155 167 CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED
MEG ID MEP ID
recovers from the
supported)
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
156 168 MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID: 0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER
MEP ID:%d)
has transited to the LOC
state
supported)
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
157 169 CL ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG
MEP ID:%d)
recovers from the LOC
state
supported)
Appendix
52
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
158 170 MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG
MEP ID:%d)
has transited to the RDI
state
supported)
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
159 171 CL ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG
MEP ID:%d)
recovers from the RDI
state
supported)
Port state
RPL-BLOCK
FORWARD
SIGNAL-FAIL
RECOVERY
Ring index
number
Port number
WAIT-TO-RESTO
RE
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Node state MEP ID
IDLE LOCAL-NR
PROTECTION LOCAL-SF
REMOTE-NR
160 172 IF ETHER RING STATUS CHANGED
(INDEX:%d,PORT#%d,PORT STATUS:%s,NODE
STATUS:%s,REQUEST:%s)

REMOTE-SF

Outputs when either the
port state or node state
of the port used by the
port has transited
Appendix
53
No. Trap ID
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
161 173 MJ ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED
(PORT#%d)
Port number Outputs when the loop
state of the control
frame has occurred in
the port used by the ring
162 174 CL ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED
(PORT#%d)
Port number Outputs when the loop
state of the control
frame is recovered in the
port used by the ring
163 175 IF REFERENCE-CLOCK MULTIPLE-SOURCE
STATUS CHANGED (GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)
Reference clock
group number
Clock state
FAIL
NORMAL
ACQUIRING
when the reference
clock state of a
line-independent clock
has transited
164 176 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SYSTEM STATUS
CHANGED) (TERMINAL:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Telnet session deletion
due to unit status
change
165 177 IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SYSTEM STATUS
CHANGED) (TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
Telnet session deletion
due to unit status
change (account name
login)
166 178 IF CPU RESOURCE BUSY (DETAIL:%x) Detailed
information
CPU overload (one
minute or more)
167 179 IF CPU RESOURCE BUSY RECOVER CPU overload is
recovered

Appendix
54
Standard trap list

Trap
ID
Standard
trap MIB
(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous
message)
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Restart cause
POWER-ON
RESET
COMMAND
RESET
1 coldStart IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP
(CAUSE:%s)
PROCESSOR
FAILURE
Completion of restart by
default config
(When default config is
used, SNMP is not set.
So, coldStart-Trap is not
issued with this device.)
Restart cause Target of recover
config
POWER-ON
RESET
STARTUP
CONFIG
COMMAND
RESET
EMERGENCY
CONFIG
2 warmStart IF RECOVER CONFIG BOOT UP
(CAUSE:%s,BOOT:%s)
PROCESSOR
FAILURE
PART OF
STARTUP
CONFIG
Completion of restart by
recover config
3 linkDown MJ LINK DOWN (%d) Port number Port Link Down
4 linkUp CL LINK UP 10M HALF DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up
5 linkUp CL LINK UP 10M FULL DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up
6 linkUp CL LINK UP 100M HALF DUPLEX (%d) Port number Port Link Up
9 linkUp CL LINK UP 155M (%d) Port number Port Link Up
Appendix
55
Trap
ID
Standard
trap MIB
(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous
message)
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
10 linkUp CL LINK UP T1 1.5M (%d) Port number Port Link Up
11 linkUp CL LINK UP E1 2.048M (%d) Port number Port Link Up
12 authenticatio
nFailure
- Access from an
unauthorized manager
(Only the SNMP trap is
issued.)

Appendix
56
Group correspondence table for each specific trap
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Trap-ID 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Specific trap number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
maintenance-network out-band
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
ether-oam unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.

Appendix
57

No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Trap-ID 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
58

No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Trap-ID 33 34 36 35 37 38 39 40 41 42
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
59

No. 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Trap-ID 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
60

No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Trap-ID 53 54 55 57 58 56 59 60 61 63
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
61

No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Trap-ID 64 62 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
62

No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
Trap-ID 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
63

No. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Trap-ID 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
64

No. 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
Trap-ID 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
65

No. 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Trap-ID 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
66

No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
Trap-ID 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
67

No. 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120
Trap-ID 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
68

No. 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130
Trap-ID 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
69

No. 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140
Trap-ID 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
70

No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
Trap-ID 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
71

No. 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160
Trap-ID 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
72

No. 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170
Trap-ID 173 174 175 176 177
Specific trap number 119 120 121 1 1
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
aggregation -
atm-oam detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -

Appendix
73
Group correspondence table for each standard trap

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Trap-ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.

Appendix
74

No. 11 12
Trap-ID 11 12
private-trap 1-999
trap-id 1-999
port 1-26
link 1-26
fault critical
major
minor
warning
sfp -
ntp -
telnet connect
fail
in-band
spantree -
fdb -
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
t1e1 -
tdmop -
ima -
loopback-atm -
ether-ring -
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.

Appendix
75
5 Counter Monitoring Condition List
Port counter collection details
The port counters collect the following counter information:
Type: Indicates the type of a counter.
Octs/Pkts/Events: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O), the number of frames (F), or the number of event
occurrences (Ev).
Bit width: Indicates the bit width of a counter.
Error: Indicates whether error octets/frames are included in a counter value. ("E" is indicated when error octets/frames are
included.)
Function details: Indicates the function details of a counter.

Collection port counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts /
Events
Bit width Error
Function details
RxOctets O 64bit E Number of receive octets
RxPkts F 32bit E Number of receive frames
RxDropEvents Ev 32bit Number of discard event occurrences (*)
RxErrors F 32bit E Number of receive error frames
RxUndersizePkts F 32bit Number of receive frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets
RxFragments F 32bit E Number of receive error frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets
Rx64octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 64 octets
Appendix
76
Type
Octs /
Pkts /
Events
Bit width Error
Function details
Rx65to127octs F 32bit E Number of receive frames with data consisting of 65 to 127 octets
RxCRCErrors F 32bit E Number of receive frames including an alignment/FCS error
RxOversizePkts F 32bit Number of receive frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more, number of error
frames
RxJabbers F 32bit E Number of receive error frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more
RxUcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive unicast frames
RxMcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive multicast frames
RxBcastPkts F 64bit Number of receive broadcast frames
RxUnsupp F 32bit Number of unsupported frames received and discarded
RxDiscards F 32bit Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a receive error
TxOctets O 64bit Number of transmit octets
TxPkts F 32bit E Number of transmit frames
TxErrors F 32bit E Number of transmit error frames
TxCollisions F 32bit Number of collision frames at transmission time (*)
TxUcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit unicast frames
TxMcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit multicast frames
TxBcastPkts F 64bit E Number of transmit broadcast frames
Appendix
77
Type
Octs /
Pkts /
Events
Bit width Error
Function details
TxUnsupp F 32bit Number of unsupported transmit frames discarded
TxDiscards F 32bit Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a transmit error

* Always displayed as "0" if the display is enabled.

Appendix
78
Discard counter collection details
The discard counters collect the following counter information:
Octs/Pkts: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O) or the number of frames (F).
included.)
Priority unit: Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported. ("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)

Collection discard counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
width
Error
Priority
unit
Function details
RxUnknownTPID F 32bit Number of unsupported TPID receive frames discarded or receive frames of Ethertype
0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*1)
RxUnknownVID F 32bit Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded (*1)
TxUnknownTPID F 32bit Number of unsupported TPID transmit frames discarded or transmit frames of Ethertype
0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*2)
RxDisInQoSPkts F 32bit Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input
ports (*3)
RxFilterPkts F 32bit Number of receive frames discarded by the input filtering function (*3)
TxDisOutQoSPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for
output ports
Appendix
79
Collection discard counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
width
Error
Priority
unit
Function details
RxDropPkts F 32bit Number of received frames discarded by the L2SW as invalid frames or number of
received frames discarded with the following cases (*3):
- The case that transfer destination ports (including mirroring output destination ports)
do not exist
- The case that RPL Owner receives R-APS control frames regularly with the EtherRing
function or the case that the switching of the EtherRing function occurs at an RL port
TxDropPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames discarded by L2SW before accumulated in transmit queue
(*4)
TxQueue0DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames with no class discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue1DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-D discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue2DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-C discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue3DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-B discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue4DisPkts F 32bit Number of transmit frames of Class-A discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue5DisPkts F 32bit Number of control frame transmit frames from the CPU that are discarded by L2SW (*4)

*1 Counter included in "RxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details
*2 Counter included in "TxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details
*3 Counter included in "RxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details
*4 Counter included in "TxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details

Appendix
80
VLAN counter collection details
The VLAN counters collect the following counter information:
Octs/Pkts: Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O) or the number of frames (F).
included.)
Priority unit: Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported. ("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)

Collection VLAN counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
width
Error
Priority
Unit
Function details
RxOcts O 64bit P Number of receive octets
RxUcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive unicast octets
RxMcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive multicast octets
RxBcastOcts O 64bit P Number of receive broadcast octets
RxDisInQoSOcts O 64bit P Number of receive octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input
ports (*)
RxPkts F 24bit P Number of receive frames
RxUcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive unicast frames
RxMcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive multicast frames
RxBcastPkts F 64bit P Number of receive broadcast frames
Appendix
81
Collection VLAN counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
width
Error
Priority
Unit
Function details
RxDisInQoSPkts F 64bit P Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit function for input
ports (*)
TxOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit octets
TxUcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit unicast octets
TxMcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit multicast octets
TxBcastOcts O 64bit P Number of transmit broadcast octets
TxPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit frames
TxUcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit unicast frames
TxMcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit multicast frames
TxBcastPkts F 64bit P Number of transmit broadcast frames

* Always displayed as "0" if the FE port display is enabled.

Appendix
82
Cell counter collection details
The cell counters collect the following counter information:
Interval: Indicates a counter collection interval. When no collection operation is performed, "-" is indicated.

Collection cell counter
Type Bit width Interval
Function details
RxCells 64bit 1sec Number of receive cells
RxErrors 64bit 1sec Number of cells discarded for reception error
RxQoSDiscards 64bit - Number of cells discarded for reception shaper
RxF4SegAIS 64bit 5sec Receive segment VP-AIS cell
RxF4SegRDI 64bit 5sec Receive segment VP-RDI cell
RxF4SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment loopback cell
RxF4SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment other cell
RxF4EndAIS 64bit 5sec Receive end VP-AIS cell
RxF4EndRDI 64bit 5sec Receive end VP- RDI cell
RxF4EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level end loopback cell
RxF4EndOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level end other cell
RxF5SegAIS 64bit 5sec Receive segment VC-AIS cell
RxF5SegRDI 64bit 5sec Receive segment VC-RDI cell
RxF5SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level segment loopback cell
Appendix
83
Function details
RxF5SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level segment other cell
RxF5EndAIS 64bit 5sec Receive end VC-AIS cell
RxF5EndRDI 64bit 5sec Receive end VC-RDI cell
RxF5EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level end loopback cell
RxF5EndOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F5 level end other cell
TxCells 64bit 1sec Number of transmit cells
TxErrors 64bit - Number of cells discarded for transmission error
TxQoSDiscards 64bit 1sec Number of cells discarded for transmission shaper
TxF4SegAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VP-AIS cell
TxF4SegRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VP-RDI cell
TxF4SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F4 level segment loopback cell
TxF4SegOthers 64bit 5sec Receive F4 level segment other cell
TxF4EndAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit end VP-AIS cell
TxF4EndRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit end VP-RDI cell
TxF4EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit VP-loopback cell-end
TxF4EndOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F4 level end other cell
TxF5SegAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VC-AIS cell
TxF5SegRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit segment VC-RDI cell
TxF5SegLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level segment loopback cell
TxF5SegOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level segment other cell
TxF5EndAIS 64bit 5sec Transmit end VC-AIS cell
TxF5EndRDI 64bit 5sec Transmit end VC-RDI cell
Appendix
84
Function details
TxF5EndLoopback 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level end loopback cell
TxF5EndOthers 64bit 5sec Transmit F5 level end other cell

* When an OAM counter is used, a PVC for the OAM counter must be registered.

Appendix
85
Line quality counter collection details
The line quality counters collect the following counter information:

Collection line quality counter
Type Bit width
Function details
Section BIP-8 16bit Number of BIP-8 detection for relay section errors in the section overhead (*1)
Line BIP-24 20bit Number of BIP-24 detection for section errors in the section overhead (*1)
Line FEBE 20bit Number of line level far end block errors detected (*1)
Path BIP-8 16bit Number of BIP-8 detection for path errors in the path overhead (*1)
Path FEBE 16bit Number of path level far end block errors detected (*1)
FER 7bit Number of framing bit errors detected (*2)
OOF/FEBE
10bit
OOF: Number of out of frame errors detected (T1 mode)
FEBE: Number of far end block errors detected (E1 mode) (*2)
Bit/CRC Error
10bit
Bit Error: Number of bit errors detected (T1 mode)
CRC Error: Number of cyclic redundancy check errors detected (E1 mode) (*2)
LCV Error 13bit Number of LineCode violation errors detected (*2)

*1 When a 1ATM155A line card is mounted
*2 When a 32T1E1H/32T1E1T card is mounted (If the frame format is "Unframed", only LCV Errors are counted.)
Appendix
86
Details of EtherOAM frame counter collection
The EtherOAM frame counter collects the information of the following counters.
Type: Displays the counter type.
Bit width: Displays the counter bit width.
Function details: Displays the function details of the counter.

Collected counter
Type Bit width
Function details
RxPkts 32bit Number of frames received
TxPkts 32bit Number of frames transmitted

Appendix
87
6 Command Error List
This section describes the indications and causes of command execution errors together with corrective actions required for those errors.

No. Indication Cause Corrective action
00002 Invalid parameter %s The specified parameter is invalid. Check the input command then reenter the
command.
00003 Invalid parameter %s : %s The specified parameter is invalid. (A reason
is provided.)
Check the input command then reenter the
command.
00004 Specified %s has already been registered. The setting has already been registered. Check the state of setting.
00005 %s is not registered. The setting is not registered yet. Check the state of setting.
00006 Invalid number of parameters There is an excess/shortage in the parameters
needed for processing.
Check the specified parameters then reenter
the command.
00007 Specified %s is being used by %s. The specified device is being used by another
interface, protocol, or the like.
Check the device state.
00008 Too many %s entries There are too many registered entries. Check the state of setting.
00009 %s does not exist. The indicated item is missing. Check the device state.
00010 Non-supported parameter %s. The parameter is not supported. Check the specified parameter then reenter the
command.
00011 Command forcibly stopped. The command was terminated forcibly. Reenter the command after a while.
00012 Command conflict occurred. A command conflict occurred. Reenter the command after a while.
00013 %s is already in service. Service is in progress. Check the device state.
00014 %s is already out of service. Service is stopped. Check the device state.
00015 %s start-up failed. Service activation failed. Reenter the command after a while.
00016 Already %s The indicated state is already set. Check the device state.
Appendix
88
00017 The line card required for the command
execution is not installed.
The line card required for the command
execution is not mounted.
Check the line card mounted to the device and
the command specification.
00018 Device failure A device fault occurred. Check the device state.
00019 Resource temporarily unavailable Resources for command execution are
insufficient.
Reenter the command after a while.
00020 Resource temporarily unavailable %s %s %s
%s %s
Resources for command execution are
insufficient (with additional information).
00021 %s failed. An attempt for the indicated operation failed. Reenter the command after a while.
00023 Non-supported command This command is not supported presently. This command is reserved for a future function.
This command cannot be used presently.
00024 The reading of %s went wrong. The reading of the operation data failed. Reenter the command after a while.
00025 The writing of %s went wrong. The setting of the operation data failed. Reenter the command after a while.
00026 Timeout occurred during command execution. A time-out occurred during command
execution.
Check the device state.
00027 Data communication error An internal communication error occurred. Reenter the command after a while.
00028 Because %s has already been registered, %s
cannot be enabled. %s
The indicated item has already been
registered, so that it cannot be enabled.
Check the state of setting.
cannot be disabled. %s
registered, so that it cannot be disabled.
cannot be changed. %s
registered, so that it cannot be changed.
00031 Because %s has not been registered, %s
cannot be changed. %s
The indicated item has not been registered, so
that it cannot be changed.
00032 %s cannot be changed. %s The indicated item cannot be changed. Check the state of setting.
00033 Specified %s is invalid %s. %s An invalid parameter was set. Check the state of setting.
00034 Command not found. An invalid command was entered. Enter the correct command.
00035 Parameter is invalid. An invalid parameter was entered. Enter the correct parameter.
Appendix
89
00036 Buffer temporarily busy Resources for command analysis are
insufficient.
00037 Specified command conflicted : %s A contention occurred. "%s" processing is
being executed.
Reexecute after a while.
00041 The complemented command line is over 600
characters.
A command entered in the complemented
command line is longer than 600 characters.
Divide the command into multiple commands
so that the command line is not exceeded.
00042 The total size of the specified VPI and VCI is
over 16 bits.
The total size of the specified VPI and VCI is
longer than 16 bits.
Check the specified VPI and VCI then register
the VPI and VCI again.
00054 The specified command cannot be executed in
the present port mode.
The specified command cannot be executed in
the current port mode.
Check the state of the port mode setting.
00055 VPI registered with VP connection cannot be
specified with F5 setting.
VPI registered with VP connection cannot be
Specify PVC connection with F4 setting.
00056 VPI registered with VC connection cannot be
VPI registered with VC connection cannot be
Specify PVC connection with F5 setting.
00057 Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that is
registered with VP connection.
Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that is
registered with VP connection.
Check the entered command line.
00058 PVC name registered for VP connection
PVC name for the VP connection cannot be
specified.
Specify with F5 setting.
00060 PVC name registered for VC connection
PVC name for the VC connection cannot be
specified.
Specify with F4 setting.
00063 Number of entries exceeds the limit. Please
limit the entries to a maximum of %s per
system.
The number of entries exceeds the limit that
can be set.
Check the number of entries that are set per
unit.
01000 Invalid password The entered password is incorrect. Reexecute the command and enter the correct
password.
01001 The password you entered does not match. Try
again.
A new password does not match. Reexecute the command and enter the correct
password.
01002 Password is too short - must be at least 4
characters.
The password is too short. Enter a password consisting of 4 characters or
more.
Appendix
90
01003 Password is too long - must be less than 16
characters.
The password is too long. Enter a password consisting of 16 characters
or less.
01004 Password contains some of unusable
characters.
The password includes unusable characters. For a password character string, two-octet
codes and control codes must not be used.
Reexecute the command and enter the correct
password.
01005 Because the number of accounts reaches the
maximum value, this setting cannot be made.
Accounts as many as the maximum allowable
number of accounts are registered, so that
execution is disabled.
Check the number of registered accounts.
01006 The account which has not been registered is
specified.
An account not registered is specified. Check the account registration status.
01007 This account cannot be deleted. The default account cannot be deleted. Specify another account.
01008 Because login is done with the account name,
mode shift cannot be carried out.
Login is performed using an account name, so
that mode shifting is disabled.
Check the authority of the account.
02204 The combination of specified parameters %s
and %s is not an effective setting.
The specified combination of parameters is not
a valid setting.
Check the entered command line.
02205 Specified network address cannot be used for
%s.
The specified network address cannot be used. Check the specified network address.
02206 Start date and end date are the same - must
be different dates.
When setting daylight saving time, the same
date, or the same week/day of week/month,
cannot be specified for start and end dates or
weeks.
Enter a different date, week, day of week or
month for start and end date/week of daylight
saving time.
02207 The Specified VLAN ID is configured as Inband
VLAN. Inband VLAN ID cannot be set for two
or more ports.
The specified VLAN ID is configured as Inband
VLAN. Inband VLAN ID cannot be set for two
or more ports.
Check the registered VLAN ID and port
number.
02300 Command with invalid parameter in
downloaded configuration : %s.
The downloaded configuration includes a
command with an invalid parameter.
Check the contents of the configuration to be
downloaded.
Appendix
91
02301 Because command execution error occurred in
downloaded configuration, the entire
configuration was discarded. : %s. First Error :
%s.
A command execution error occurred in the
downloaded configuration, so that the entire
configuration was discarded.
downloaded.
02302 FTP %s failed. ftp upload/download operation failed. Check the state of the ftp server.
02303 Failed in writing to FRAM An attempt to write to FRAM failed. Replace the device.
02304 No data in downloaded file. The downloaded file includes no data. Check the contents of the file to be
downloaded.
02305 Invalid characters in downloaded configuration The downloaded configuration includes invalid
characters.
downloaded.
02306 File size is over the maximum size. The downloaded file is larger than the
maximum allowable size.
Check the size of the file to be downloaded.
02307 The specified command cannot be executed
on the present status.
In the current status, the specified command
cannot be executed.
Check the state of the line card.
02309 The specified file to be downloaded is not
appropriate.
The downloaded file is not proper. Check whether the file to be downloaded
matches the command.
03019 Invalid parameter %s. Please specify the value
in multiples of 500msec.
The specified parameter is not a multiple of
500msec.
Specify the parameter in a multiple of
500msec.
03022 Because the related configuration setting
exists, this command cannot be executed.
Because the related configuration setting
Delete the related configuration setting and set
the default value.
04102 Since fault has occurred in the specified port,
port unblocking cannot be made.
The specified port is faulty, so that port
unblocking is disabled.
Check the fault information of the specified
port.
04311 Since another index has been registered on
the port, this registration cannot be made.
Since another index has been registered on
the port, this registration cannot be made.
Check the filtering setting.
Appendix
92
04406 The number of the registered VLAN counters
exceeds the maximum registration number for
the short cycle or long cycle for each system,
or exceeds the maximum registration number
for each port.
The number of registered VLAN counters
exceeds the maximum number of registered
short-cycle VLAN counters per device or
registered long-cycle VLAN counters per
device or the maximum number of registered
VLAN counters per port.
Check the maximum number of registered
short-cycle VLAN counters per device and the
number of registered long-cycle VLAN
counters per device and ensure that each of
the maximum numbers of registered VLAN
counters is not exceeded.
in multiples of 25Kbps.
A bandwidth limit value that is not a multiple of
25 kbps may not be entered.
Enter a bandwidth limit value that is a multiple
of 25 kbps.
05001 The rate value for the specified VLAN ID or
VLAN Name is not set.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name,
bandwidth limit is not set.
Set bandwidth limit for the specified VLAN ID
or VLAN name beforehand.
05006 The number of entries exceeds the limit value.
Please set the number of entries within %s for
a GbE port.
No more VLAN-by-VLAN bandwidth limit
entries than a certain limit may be registered
per GbE port.
Ensure that the number of bandwidth limit
entries set on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis does not
exceed a certain limit per GbE port.
05012 The rate value for the specified
Remaining-VLAN is not set.
Bandwidth limit is not set for the specified
Remaining-VLAN.
Set bandwidth limit for the Remaining-VLAN of
the specified port beforehand.
05013 The same priority value cannot be specified
twice in priority assignment.
In priority specification for each class, no
duplicate value may be specified.
Specify priority values again.
05014 Priority value must be specified for at least 1
class. "none" cannot be specified for all
classes.
Specification of None for all classes is not
allowed.
Specify a priority value for at least one class.
05016 Since VLAN is registered, Remaining-VLAN
cannot be deleted.
The VLAN is registered, so that the
Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.
Check information about the VLAN registered
with the specified port.
05017 Since the rate value has been specified with
%s mode, the specified command cannot be
executed in %s mode.
Execution is disabled in a mode other than the
one specified with bandwidth limit.
Check the bandwidth setting of the specified
VLAN.
05021 When the separate mode or separate-red
mode is not specified, %s cannot be specified
in priority mapping.
If the separate mode or separate-red mode is
not specified, specification based on priority
mapping is not allowed.
For specification based on priority mapping,
specify the separate mode or separate-red
mode.
Appendix
93
05022 When broadcast and multicast are specified for
multiple classes, both broadcast and multicast
must not be specified for the same class.
When broadcast/multicast is specified for
multiple classes, both broadcast and multicast
must not be specified for the same class.
Ensure that when broadcast/multicast is
specified for each class, both broadcast and
multicast are not specified for the same class.
05023 All priorities are not assigned to a class. All priorities are not assigned to a class. Specify all priorities for any of CLASS-A
through CLASS-D.
in multiples of 16. However, 16 cannot be
specified.
Queue length other than multiples of 16
(except 16) cannot be specified for the L2
switch buffer.
Specify the queue length for the L2 switch
buffer in multiple of 16 (except 16).
05038 The total queue length is not 1008packets. The total queue length is not 1008 packets. Specify with the total queue length being 1008
packets.
05041 The minimum burst value is equal to or greater
than the maximum burst value.
The specified minimum allowable burst value is
greater than the upper limit, or the specified
maximum allowable burst value is less than the
lower limit.
Check the minimum allowable burst value or
the maximum allowable burst value.
05057 The shaper rate is over the maximum shaper
rate.
The maximum bandwidth limit value per port
basis/class basis in the output port shaper
setting exceeds the physical bandwidth.
Set the maximum bandwidth limit value per
port basis/class basis in the output port shaper
setting below the physical bandwidth.
05058 The total of shaper rate in that multiples of
64Kbps is over the maximum shaper rate.
In separate specification of the maximum
bandwidth limit value for the output port
shaper, the total of shaper rate after the
maximum bandwidth limit values of each class
(class-a to class-d) are truncated to the
multiples of 64 Kbps exceeds the physical
bandwidth.
In separate specification of the maximum
bandwidth limit value for the output port
shaper, set the total of shaper rate after the
maximum bandwidth limit values of each class
(class-a to class-d) are truncated to the
multiples of 64 Kbps below the physical
bandwidth.
05059 FE port is not permitted to specify VLAN. FE port is not permitted to specify VLAN. Specify Remaining VLAN or specify a GbE port
then reenter the command.
05060 FE port is not permitted to configure separate
mode.
FE port is not permitted to specify separate
mode.
Unspecify separate mode then reenter the
command.
05061 The shaper rate is not the initial state. The output port shaper is not initialized. Set the default values for all the ports of the
output port shaper.
Appendix
94
05062 The WRR surplus band distribution ratio value
is not the initial state.
The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio value is not initialized.
Set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
distribution ratio value by specifying the default
value.
05063 This setting cannot be made with SP mode. This setting cannot be made if the output
scheduling operation mode is SP mode.
Set the output scheduling operation mode to
the Deficit WRR mode.
05064 The total WRR surplus band distribution ratio
value including all the classes exceeds the
maximum shaper rate.
The total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
distribution ratio value of each class (class-b to
class-d) exceeds the maximum bandwidth limit
value for the output port shaper. Or the
maximum bandwidth limit value for the output
port shaper is lower than the total Deficit WRR
surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of
Set the total Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
class-d) below the maximum bandwidth limit
value for the output port shaper. Or set the
maximum bandwidth limit value for the output
port shaper above the total Deficit WRR
surplus bandwidth distribution ratio value of
Output port shaper Deficit WRR
Maximum bandwidth limit value class-b
+
class-c
+
class-d
Appendix
95
05065 The WRR surplus band distribution ratio value
of the class exceeds the maximum shaper rate
for the class.
The Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d)
exceeds the maximum bandwidth limit value
for the output port shaper of each class
(class-b to class-d). Or the maximum
bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper
of each class (class-b to class-d) is lower than
the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).
Set the Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth
class-d) below the maximum bandwidth limit
value for the output port shaper of each class
(class-b to class-d). Or set the maximum
bandwidth limit value for the output port shaper
of each class (class-b to class-d) above the
Deficit WRR surplus bandwidth distribution
ratio value of each class (class-b to class-d).
Output port shaper Deficit WRR
class-b class-b
class-c class-c
class-d class-d
06201 Since Exterior VLAN ID and Interior VLAN ID
are the same, this setting cannot be made.
Registration is disabled because the swap
source VLAN ID and swap destination VLAN
ID are the same.
Specify a swap source VLAN ID and a swap
destination VLAN ID that are different from
each other.
06202 Tagbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. The tagbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. Specify a VLAN ID set for VLAN tag swapping.
06203 Tagbased VLAN ID with VLAN tag swapping
set cannot be deleted.
The tagbased VLAN ID for which a swap
destination VLAN ID is set cannot be deleted.
Specify a tagbased VLAN ID.
06204 Portbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. The portbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted. Specify a tagbased VLAN ID.
06205 Since the specified VLAN ID is the same as the
Exterior VLAN ID, the VLAN ID cannot be
registered.
The specified VLAN ID duplicates a swap
destination VLAN ID, so that the specified
VLAN ID cannot be registered.
Specify a tagbased VLAN ID that does not
duplicate a swap destination VLAN ID.
06206 Since the specified VLAN ID is the same as the
tagbased VLAN ID, the VLAN ID cannot be
registered.
The specified VLAN ID duplicates a tagbased
VLAN ID, so that the specified VLAN ID cannot
be registered.
Specify a tag swap destination VLAN ID that
does not duplicate a tagbased VLAN ID.
06207 The specified Exterior VLAN ID has already
been registered.
The specified swap destination VLAN ID is
already registered.
Specify another swap destination VLAN ID.
Appendix
96
06219 Since the EtherType value is not 0x8100, this
setting cannot be made.
For a port with an Ethertype other than 0x8100
set, portbased untag specification is not
allowed.
Before untag specification, set Ethertype
0x8100 with the "set vlan ethertype" command.
06220 Since portbased untag mode is configured on
this port, this setting cannot be made.
For a port with portbased VLAN untag
specified, specification of an Ethertype other
than 0x8100 is not allowed.
Before Ethertype specification, set admit-all for
Frametype with the "set vlan portbase"
command.
06222 Since both portbased and tagbased modes
cannot be specified at the same time, this
command cannot be executed.
When a duplicate port number is specified with
a portbased VLAN and tagbased VLAN, the
setting cannot be made with the command.
Check the ports for which the portbased VLAN
and tagbased VLAN are set.
06223 Since 100 VLAN IDs have already been
registered, tagbased VLAN cannot be changed
to portbased VLAN.
When more than 100 VLAN IDs are set,
switching from tag-base to port-base is
disabled.
For switching from tag-base to port-base when
more than 100 VLAN IDs are set, use the "set
vlan portbase" command, or make a setting
again after VLAN deletion.
06224 The number of registered VLAN IDs exceeds
the maximum registration number per system.
The number of registered VLAN IDs exceeds
the maximum registration number per system.
Check the number of registered VLAN IDs and
ensure that the maximum numbers of
registered VLAN IDs is not exceeded.
06225 Since portbased VLAN is configured on this
port, this setting is not allowed.
Setting the VLAN tag swapping is not allowed
for the port for which a portbased VLAN is
configured
Delete the registered portbased VLAN ID then
make a setting again.
06310 Because the deletion process of all MAC
address learning information is running, this
The specified command cannot be executed
during processing of deletion of all MAC
learning information.
06500 The same port cannot be both mirror-from port
and mirror-to port simultaneously.
No mirroring target port may duplicate a
mirroring output destination port.
Make a setting so that no mirroring target port
duplicates a mirroring output destination port.
06501 This port cannot be configured as a
mirror-to-port. Please delete the VLAN setting.
The mirroring output destination port cannot be
specified. Delete the VLAN from the port.
Delete the VLAN from the port beforehand.
06502 This port cannot be configured as a
mirror-to-port. Please delete link aggregation.
The mirroring output destination port cannot be
specified. Delete the link aggregation from
the port.
Delete the link aggregation from the port
beforehand.
Appendix
97
06503 This command is not allowed. The mirror-to
port has already been configured.
The command cannot be executed. A
mirroring output destination port is already set.
Before making the setting, delete the setting of
07000 The link aggregation cannot be configured.
Please specify two or more ports.
The link aggregation is not generated.
Specify multiple ports.
Specify multiple ports again to generate a LAG.
07001 The link aggregation is not configured. The
specified ports are set at different speeds in
the same group.
The link aggregation is not generated. The
specified ports set at different speeds in the
same group.
When generating a LAG, set the same speed
for all the ports then make a setting again.
specified ports have already been used in
other aggregation group.
port is already used with a different LAG.
When generating a LAG, check whether the
port is already used with another LAG.
maximum number of aggregation ports in a
group is 8.
maximum allowable number of ports is 8.
Check that the number of ports generated as
link aggregations is 8 or less then make a
setting again.
07005 The link aggregation cannot be deleted. The
specified group does not exist.
The link aggregation is not deleted. The
specified group is not found.
Check the specified link aggregation.
specified ports belong to different VLAN.
The link aggregation is not generated. A
different VLAN is set for a specified port.
Make a setting again by specifying the same
VLAN for the ports to be specified as a group.
specified name has already been used by
another aggregation group.
specified name is already used by another
group.
Make a setting again by specifying a name
different from those already used by any other
group.
07010 The standby-admit setting cannot be made.
The standby-admit is allowed only in the local
mode.
No standby-admit setting is made. The
setting of standby-admit is allowed in the local
mode only.
Check that the mode of the link aggregation to
be set is the local mode then make a setting
again.
07011 The Port-Isolate feature and link aggregation
are not allowed together on the same port.
The port isolation function and the link
aggregation function cannot be used
simultaneously.
Set the command again after checking that the
port isolation function and the link aggregation
function are not set for the same port.
07012 The aggregation protection time is not set.
Please specify the value in multiples of 100.
The link aggregation protection time is not set.
Set a value that is a multiple of 100.
Make a setting again after checking that a
value to be set is a multiple of 100.
Appendix
98
07013 The system priority cannot be configured.
Please specify the system priority before the
aggregation is configured.
The system priority cannot be set. Set a
system priority before link aggregation setting.
Make a setting again after checking that no link
aggregation is set for the device.
07014 The port priority cannot be configured. Please
specify the port priority for a link-up port in an
aggregation group.
The port priority cannot be set. Set the port
priority for a link-up port of the link aggregation
group.
Make a setting again after checking that the
specified port belonging to the link aggregation
group is not a link-down port.
07100 The STP mode cannot be changed. STP
needs to be disabled before the mode change.
The STP mode cannot be changed. Disable
STP before setting.
Before making a mode change, disable STP.
07101 The specified time value does not satisfy the
formulas of the IEEE standard.
The formulas defined by the IEEE need to be
satisfied.
Make a setting with the following formulas
satisfied:
2 x (Bridge Forward Delay - 1) >= Bridge
Max Age
Bridge Max Age >= 2 x (Bridge Hello Time
+ 1)
07102 The priority value cannot be updated. Please
specify the value in multiples of 4096.
The priority is not updated. Set a value that is
a multiple of 4096.
value to be set is a multiple of 4096 in the
RSTP mode.
07103 The port priority value cannot be updated.
Please specify the value in multiples of 16.
The priority is not updated. Set a value that is
a multiple of 16.
value to be set is a multiple of 16 in the RSTP
mode.
07104 This command is not supported in the STP
mode. The current mode is not the RSTP
mode.
This command is not supported in the STP
mode. The current mode is not the RSTP
mode.
This command is not supported in the STP
mode. This command can be used when the
RSTP mode is set.
09000 The specified MEG has already been
associated with MEP.
The specified MEG has already been
associated with MEP.
Make a setting again after checking MEP is not
registered to the MEG.
09001 The specified MEG ID has already been used
in this system.
The specified MEG ID has already been used
in this system.
Make a setting again after checking the MEG
ID already used is not specified.
09002 The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG
specified does not exist.
The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG
Make a setting again checking the MEG is set.
Appendix
99
09003 The MEP index cannot be changed. The MEP
has already been used.
The MEP index cannot be changed. The
MEP has already been used.
Make a setting again after checking the MEP
index is not used.
09004 The MEP cannot be added. The number of
registered MEPs for this port reaches the
maximum number.
The MEP cannot be added. The number of
MEPs registered for this port reaches the limit.
Make a setting again after checking the
number of MEPs registered for this port does
not exceed the limit.
09006 The same MEP ID which belongs to the same
MEG cannot be registered.
The same MEP ID cannot be registered within
a MEG.
Make a setting again after checking the same
MEP ID is not registered within the MEG.
09007 The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP
The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP
Make a setting after checking the MEP is set.
09008 Since the ETH-CC setting is enabled currently,
the MEP cannot be deleted.
The MEP cannot be deleted. The ETH-CC
frame transmission/reception setting is
enabled.
Delete the MEP after the ETH-CC frame for the
MEP is not enabled.
09009 The peer MEP cannot be added. The number
of registered peer MEPs exceeds the
maximum number allowed.
The peer MEP cannot be added. The number
of registered peer MEPs exceeds the
maximum number allowed.
number of peer MEPs registered for one port
does not exceed the maximum number
allowed.
09010 The peer MEP ID is the same as the MEP ID
registered.
The peer MEP ID is the same as the self MEP
ID.
Make a setting again after checking the peer
MEP ID is not the same as the self MEP ID.
09011 The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The
specified peer MEP does not exist.
The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The
specified peer MEP does not exist.
Delete the peer MEP after checking it is set.
09012 The MAC address cannot be configured. The
Unicast MAC address must be specified.
The MAC address cannot be configured. The
Unicast MAC address must be specified.
Make a setting again specifying the Unicast
MAC address as MAC address.
Multicast address must be specified.
Multicast MAC address must be specified.
Make a setting again specifying the Multicast
MAC address as MAC address.
most significant byte must be 0x01.
most significant byte must be 0x01.
Make a setting again after checking the most
significant byte of the MAC address is 0x01.
specified MAC address is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the MAC
address value is not invalid.
Appendix
100
09021 The specified MEG ID is invalid. The specified MEG ID is invalid. Make a setting again after checking the
specified MEG ID is correct.
09022 The transmission interval cannot be set. The
setting value is not based on the allowed
granularity.
The transmission interval cannot be set. The
granularity of the set value is invalid.
granularity of the set value is correct.
09023 The target MEP already exists in this system. The test target MEP cannot be specified. The
test target MEP is already set in the device.
test target MEP is not set in the device.
09024 The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP
specified is not the target MEP.
The MEP cannot be specified. The specified
MEP is not a test target MEP.
Execute the command again after checking
that the specified MEP is registered as a test
target MEP.
09027 The MEP has already been used on the same
port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG
level.
The MEP has already used on the same port,
the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.
Make a setting again after checking the MEP
has not been used on the same port, the same
VLAN, and the same MEG level.
specified MAC address is source MAC
address.
specified MAC address is source MAC
address.
address is not the source MAC address.
09034 The specified MEP is not the target MEP. The specified MEP is not a test target MEP. Execute the command again after checking
that the specified MEP is registered as a test
target MEP.
09035 The MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID
configured for MEP is different from that for
Ether-Ring on the specified port.
MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID of
EtherRing of the specified port is different from
the one to be set for the MEP.
Check that the VLAN ID is same as the one of
EtherRing and set it again.
09036 The Ether-OAM frame counter has already
been registered on the specified port.
The Ether-OAM frame counter has already
been registered on the specified port.
Check that the Ether-OAM frame counter is not
registered on the specified port and reenter the
command.
09037 The Ether-OAM frame counter is not registered
on the specified port.
The Ether-OAM frame counter is not registered
on the specified port.
Check that the Ether-OAM frame counter is
registered on the specified port and reenter the
command.
09401 The same port cannot be specified twice in
Ether-Ring.
The same port cannot be set for the port to be
used in EtherRing.
Set another port for the port to be used.
Appendix
101
09402 Ether-Ring and link aggregation are not
allowed together on the same port.
EtherRing and link aggregation cannot be
combined.
Check the EtherRing setting and link
aggregation setting, and enable either of them.
09403 Ether-Ring and RSTP/STP are not allowed
together on the same port.
EtherRing and RSTP/STP cannot be
combined.
Check the EtherRing setting and RSTP/STP
setting, and enable either of them.
09404 The specified Index has already been used in
this system.
The specified Index has already been used in
the unit.
Check that Index is not reduplicated.
09405 Two or more MEPs are set to the specified
port.
Two or more MEPs have been set for the
specified port.
Set only one MEP for the port where the
EtherRing function is used.
09406 Two or more peer MEPs are set to MEP of the
specified port.
Two or more associated MEPs have been set
to the MEP of the specified port.
Set only one associated MEP for the MEP of
the port where the EtherRing function is used.
09407 Only "1" can be entered as the Ring ID. The value other than "1" cannot be set as the
Ring ID.
Set "1" for the Ring ID.
09408 Because Ether-Ring mode is disabled, the
specified command cannot be executed.
The command cannot be executed because
the EtherRing mode is disabled.
Enable the EtherRing mode and reenter the
command.
09409 Because the Ether-Ring mode is already
enabled, the parameters cannot be changed.
The setting cannot be changed because the
EtherRing mode is enabled.
Disable the EtherRing mode and reenter the
command.
09410 The specified VLAN ID and the VLAN ID
configured as MEP are different.
The specified VLAN ID and the one that has
been set to the MEP are different.
Use the VLAN ID that has been set to the
MEP, or use untag MEP.
09411 Because the RPL port is already enabled, the
parameters cannot be changed.
The setting cannot be changed because the
RPL port is enabled.
Disable the RPL port and reenter the
command.
09412 The guard time is not configured. Please
specify the value in multiples of 10.
The status change protection time is not set.
Specify the value in multiples of 10.
Check that the value to be set is the multiple of
10 and perform the setting again.
09413 The RPL port is not set in this system. No RPL port has been set. Set an RPL port and reenter the command.
11001 Because loopback is being employed, PVC
cannot be deleted.
A loopback test is under way, so that the PVC
cannot be deleted.
End the loopback test.
11003 The specified destination MAC address is
invalid.
The specified destination MAC address is
invalid.
destination MAC address to be registered.
Appendix
102
11004 The specified PVC is not registered in the
ATMoP format.
The ATM-Ether conversion format is not
registered to the specified PVC.
Check the setting state of the ATM-Ether
conversion format with the "show atmop
format" command.
11005 The combination of parameters is invalid. The combination of specified parameters is
invalid.
Check the setting state of the ATMoP format
with the "show atmop format" command.
Check the setting state of the path connection
between ATMs with the "show pvc connection"
command.
11006 The ATMoP format has already been set. The ATM-Ether conversion format has already
been set.
Check the setting state of the ATM-Ether
conversion format with the "show atmop
format" command.
11007 The number of VLAN tags or the protocol
header is different from the designated mode.
The number of VLAN tags or the protocol
header to be added to Ether frame is different
from the designated mode.
Check the packet format with the "show atmop
format" command.
11008 The specified VLAN ID has already been set
for %s feature.
The specified VLAN ID has already been set
for another feature (ATMoP or TDMoP).
Check the specified VLAN ID is not used for
another feature.
11009 The specified PVC is not registered in the ATM
connection table.
The specified PVC is not registered for an ATM
connection.
Check the ATM connection setting status with
the "show pvc connection" command.
11010 The ATM connection has already been set. The ATM connection has already been
established.
Check the ATM connection path setting with
the "show pvc connection" command.
11011 The registered PVC connection type and the
specified PVC connection type do not match.
The specified PVC connection type differs from
the registered PVC connection type.
Check the registered PVC connection type.
11012 The specified IP address is invalid. The specified IP address is invalid. Enter the command specifying another IP
address.
11013 The combination of parameters is not allowed
in this case.
The combination of specified parameters is
invalid.
Specify the same PVC and VLAN ID or UDP
port number for the source and destination.
Otherwise, specify different PVC, VLAN ID, or
UDP port number for the source or destination.
Appendix
103
11014 Only ATMoP format or PVC connection can be
set for one PVC on a port, and another PVC
connection cannot be made for the same PVC.
The ATMoP format and the path connection
between ATMs cannot be set for one PVC on a
port, and two or more path connections
between ATMs cannot be set.
Enter the command changing the port number
or PVC. Check the setting state with the
"show atmop format" and "show pvc
connection" command.
11015 Timeout value is not set. Please specify the
value in multiples of 100.
Timeout value is not set. Please specify the
value in multiples of 100.
Check that the value to be set is multiples of
100 and reenter the command.
11017 Same PVC is not good in the group at the
multidata input.
Multiple setting of the same PVC cannot be
done within a group.
Modify the PVC and reenter the command.
11018 Specified PVC is a member of other groups. Specified PVC is a member of other groups. Modify the PVC and reenter the command.
11019 The ATM Cell concatenation group has already
been set.
The ATM Cell concatenation group has already
been set.
Check the setting state of the ATM Cell
concatenation group with the "show atmop
format concatenation" command.
11020 The specified parameter cannot be overwritten. The specified parameter cannot be overwritten. To change the setting, delete the setting for the
relevant function and reenter the command.
11300 The number of the registered PVC counters
exceeds the maximum registration number per
system.
The number of registered PVC counters
exceeds the maximum registrable number of
PVC counters per device.
Check the number of registered PVC counters
and make a setting so that the maximum
registrable number of PVC counters is not
exceeded.
11301 If %s for which PVC counter has not been
registered is specified, PVC counter
registration cannot be deleted.
When a PVC or PVC name for which no PVC
counter is registered is specified, PVC counter
registration deletion is impossible.
Check the state of PVC counter registration.
11302 Because the specified port is not IMA group
root port, this command cannot be executed.
This command cannot be executed because
the specified port is not IMA group root port.
When setting an IMA group, enter the
command specifying the root port as a port
belonging to the IMA group.
12013 Since the available bandwidth range for
1ATM155A line card is from 500 Kbps up to
149500 Kbps, the specified rate cannot be
configured.
When 1ATM155A is mounted as the line card
type, the bandwidth value must be from 500
Kbps to 149500 Kbps.
Reenter the command after resetting the
bandwidth value.
Appendix
104
12014 Since the available bandwidth range for T1 is
from 64 Kbps up to 1536 Kbps, the specified
rate cannot be configured.
When the frame type is T1, the bandwidth
value must be from 64 Kbps to 1536 Kbps.
bandwidth value.
12015 Since the available bandwidth range is from 64
Kbps up to 1920 Kbps when E1 with frame
format except "unframed", the specified rate
cannot be configured.
When the frame type is E1 and the frame
format is other than unframed, the bandwidth
value must be from 64 Kbps to 1920 Kbps.
bandwidth value.
12016 Since the available bandwidth range for E1
with frame format unframed is from 64 Kbps up
to 2048 Kbps, the specified rate cannot be
configured.
When the frame type is E1 and the frame
format is unframed, the bandwidth value must
be from 64 Kbps to 2048 Kbps.
bandwidth value.
12017 Since the specified rate violates bandwidth
range of the current status of IMA group
configuration, this setting cannot be configured.
the rate specified for the port where the IMA
group is configured is out of the bandwidth
range.
bandwidth value.
12018 Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples
of 500Kbps when 1ATM155A line card is
running.
Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples
of 500 (Kbps) when 1ATM155A line card is
mounted.
bandwidth value.
12019 Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples
of 64 Kbps when 32T1E1H line card is running.
Please specify the bandwidth value in multiples
of 64 (Kbps) when 32T1E1H line card is
mounted.
bandwidth value.
12020 ATM Shaper allows only the root port to be
specified where IMA group setting has been
configured.
Only the root port can be specified where IMA
group setting has been configured.
Reenter the command after specifying the root
port or specifying the port where IMA group
setting has not been configured.
12021 Since available c-tag range is from 0 up to 7,
this command cannot be executed.
available c-tag range is from 0 to 7.
Reenter the command after resetting the value
below 7.
12022 Since the port mode is not ATMoP mode, this
the port mode is not atmop.
Reenter the command after resetting the port
mode to the ATMoP mode.
12023 Since the same priority value cannot be
specified for two or more classes, this
the same priority value cannot be specified for
two or more classes.
Reenter the command after setting a different
priority value.
Appendix
105
12024 Since the ATM Shaper setting has not been
configured for the specified port, clear
The port where the ATM Shaper setting has
not been configured cannot be deleted.
Reenter the command after specifying the port
where the ATM Shaper setting has been
configured.
13100 The combination of specified parameters is
invalid.
The combination of the specified parameters is
invalid.
Check the command line entered.
13101 Because ATM-OAM loopback test for the
specified PVC or VP connection is being
performed, the specified command cannot be
executed.
because an ATM-OAM loopback test is being
performed for the PVC or VP connection.
Perform the setting again after the loopback
test is done.
13102 Because ATM-OAM loopback keepalive for the
specified PVC or VP connection is configured,
the specified command cannot be executed.
because the ATM-OAM loopback monitoring
has been set for the specified PVC or VP
connection.
Clear the loopback monitoring setting with the
"clear loopback atm keepalive" command and
perform the setting again.
13200 VPI specified with F5 setting cannot be
The VPI with F5 monitoring setting cannot be
specified in the F4 monitoring setting.
Check the loopback monitoring setting.
13201 VPI specified with F4 setting cannot be
The VPI with F4 monitoring setting cannot be
specified in the F5 monitoring setting.
13202 The specified keepalive configuration is not
registered.
The specified loopback monitoring setting has
not been registered.
13204 The ATM-OAM flow for the specified PVC or
VP connection is not configured.
No ATM-OAM flow has been set for the
specified PVC or VP connection.
Set an ATM-OAM flow with the "set atm-oam
flow" command, and reenter the command.
13205 Because the ATM-OAM flow for the specified
PVC or VP connection is set to end-point,
inside cannot be set.
"inside" (switch direction) cannot be specified
because the ATM-OAM flow for the specified
PVC or VP connection has been set to
end-point.
Set the ATM-OAM flow to the connecting point
with the "set atm-oam flow" command before
executing the command.
13206 Because the ATM connection for the specified
PVC is registered, inside cannot be set.
"inside" (switch direction) cannot be specified
because a path between ATMs has been set
for the specified PVC.
Clear the path between ATMs with the "clear
pvc connection" command, and reenter the
command.
13402 Because LPT is being configured, the specified
VLAN ID cannot be registered.
Because the link path through is configured,
the specified VLAN ID cannot be specified.
Check the link path through setting.
Appendix
106
13601 When "sonet" is specified, "idle" cannot be set. When sonet is selected, idle cannot be
specified.
When sonet is selected, select unassigned.
15001 IMA group cannot be created with the specified
ports.
IMA group cannot be created with the specified
ports.
Specify the ports 1 to 8 or ports 9 to 16 for
configuring the IMA group.
15002 Since the specified ports already belong to
other IMA groups, the IMA group cannot be
created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The
specified ports are already used for other IMA
groups.
Check whether the ports are used for other
IMA groups before creating an IMA group.
15003 Since the specified IMA ID has already been
registered in other IMA groups, the IMA group
cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The IMA
ID is already used for other IMA groups.
Check whether the IMA ID is used for other
IMA groups before creating an IMA group.
15004 Since the number of Minimum Required Links
exceeds the specified number of ports, the IMA
group cannot be created.
specified number of Minimum Required Links
exceeds the specified number of ports.
Specify the number of Minimum Required
Links within the specified number of ports.
15005 Since the specified delay value exceeds the
maximum size of E1 mode, the IMA group
cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The delay
value exceeds the maximum value of E1
mode.
Specify the delay value so as not to exceed the
maximum value of E1 mode.
15006 The index of a non-registered IMA group
cannot be deleted.
The index of a non-registered IMA group
cannot be deleted.
Check the content of the registered IMA
groups.
15008 Since the specified root port does not belong to
the IMA group, the IMA group cannot be
created.
specified port is not registered in the IMA
group.
Specify one of the ports registered in the IMA
group as the root port.
15009 Since the specified IMA group setting reaches
the maximum number, the IMA group cannot
be created.
specified IMA group setting exceeds the
maximum number for the setting.
Check if the number of IMA groups which are
registered for port 1 to 8 or port 9 to 16 is less
than four.
15010 Since ATM Shaper setting has already been
configured for the specified port or index, this
the ATM Shaper setting has already been
configured for the specified port number or
index.
Delete the ATM Shaper setting and set the
default value.
15011 IMA group cannot be specified when T1 with
frame format "unframed" is configured.
IMA group cannot be set when the frame type
is "T1" and the frame format is "unframed".
Change the frame type or frame format.
Appendix
107
20001 The specified command cannot be executed
due to the frame type disagreement.
because of the frame type mismatch.
Reenter the command after matching the
frame type.
20002 Since consecutive TS numbers are required,
this group setting cannot be performed.
Consecutive TS numbers must be specified. Reenter the command with range specification
of consecutive TS numbers.
20005 The specified path setting has already been
made on the same port.
The specified path setting has already been
made on the same port.
Specify another line for path setting.
20008 The specified group has already been used in
the group setting.
The specified group number has already been
used.
Use another group number or delete the group
setting.
20009 The specified TS has already been grouped. The specified time slot number has already
been grouped.
Use another time slot number or delete the
group setting.
20010 The specified group does not have the setting. The specified group does not have the setting. Reenter the command specifying a group
number that is grouped.
20012 The numbers of TSs of the specified groups
are different.
The numbers of time slots (TSs) of the
specified groups are different.
Select groups with the same number of time
slots (TSs).
20013 The path setting cannot be overwritten. Path setting cannot be overwritten. Reenter the command after deleting the path
setting or specifying a group number to which a
path is not set.
20014 The path setting already exists in the specified
group.
A path has already been set to the specified
group number.
Reenter the command after deleting the path
setting.
20016 The port mode setting is inappropriate for TDM
configuration.
The port mode setting for the specified port is
not TDM configuration.
Specify a port to which the TDM configuration
is set for its port mode, or set TDM
configuration for the port mode and reenter the
command.
20017 The specified Frame Type does NOT
correspond to the configured frame type of the
system.
The specified frame type does not correspond
with the frame type which is configured for the
system.
Change the frame type setting to set the same
type, or select the same frame type and
reenter the command.
20018 TS cannot be specified as 0 when unframed
mode.
"0" cannot be set for the time slot (TS) in other
than the unframed mode.
Select other than "0" for the time slot (TS) and
reenter the command.
Appendix
108
20019 The frame format which does not allow
executing the specified command has already
been configured.
the frame format that has already been
configured is not allowed.
Check the port frame setting.
Delete the related configuration setting and set
the default value.
21001 Since the frame type of the specified port is e1,
the frame type of the specified line is E1.
Enter the command when the frame type is T1.
21003 Since duplicate setting is identified on the
same port, this command cannot be executed.
Distribution setting cannot be overlapped for
the same port.
Reenter the command with no overlaps for the
distribution setting.
21004 CESoPSN is not allowed to specify "unframed"
for the frame format.
unframed cannot be specified in the CESoPN
mode.
Change the mode to the SAToP mode or
specify another frame format, and then reenter
the command.
21005 The frame type is not E1, this command cannot
be executed.
the frame type is not E1.
Reenter the command after checking the port
frame setting.
21006 Since the port mode of ATMoP mode setting
The command cannot be executed because
the ATMoP mode has been set for the port
mode.
Check the port mode setting and reenter the
command.
21007 ATMoP mode cannot be specified when T1
with frame format "unframed" is configured.
ATMoP mode cannot be specified when the
frame type is "T1" and the frame format is
"unframed".
Check the port frame setting and reenter the
command.
21008 The specified port mode setting cannot be
made.
The combination of the specified port number
and port mode is invalid.
Check the state of the port mode setting and
reenter a valid port mode setting.
21100 Since the port mode is not TDMoP mode, this
Since the line mode is not the TDMoP mode,
Enter the command after setting the line mode
to the TDMoP mode.
21102 Since the group setting has been configured,
Since the group setting has been configured,
setting.
21103 The specified group number has not been
configured.
The specified group number is not set. Check the group number.
Appendix
109
21106 The frame type specified by the command is
different from that configured on the specified
port.
The frame type of the specified port number
does not agree.
Use the same frame type.
21107 Since consecutive TS numbers are required,
this group setting cannot be performed.
Consecutive TS numbers must be specified. Reenter the command with range specification
of consecutive TS numbers.
21108 The specified TS has already been grouped. The specified group number has already been
used.
setting.
21110 The specified ECID has already been grouped. The specified ECID has already been grouped. Use another ECID or delete the group setting.
21112 The specified VLAN name has not been
registered.
The specified VLAN name has not been
registered.
Reenter the command specifying a registered
VLAN name.
address value is not invalid.
Reenter the command after deleting the related
configuration setting.
21124 Since ONLY "all" can be specified when
SAToP is selected in TDMoP mode setting,
Time slot cannot be specified when SAToP is
set for the TDMoP mode.
Specify "all" when SAToP is set for the TDMoP
mode, and reenter the command.
21125 IP Address cannot be specified when the
packet format is MEF8.
IP address cannot be specified when the
packet format is MEF8.
Reenter the command without specifying IP
address.
21126 ECID cannot be specified when the packet
format is UDP-IP.
ECID cannot be specified when the packet
format is UDP-IP.
Reenter the command not specifying ECID.
21128 The specified VLAN ID has already been set
for %s feature.
The specified VLAN ID has already been set
for the PVC-VLAN, ATMoP, and TDMoP
function.
Check that the specified VLAN ID is not set for
the other function.
21129 The specified IP address is invalid because it is
the same as the source IP address.
The setting is invalid because the specified IP
address is the same value as the source IP
address.
Reenter the command specifying different IP
address from the source IP address.
21131 Since Adaptive-clock setting has already been
configured, this command cannot be executed.
Since adaptive-clock setting has already been
Reenter the command after deleting the
adaptive-clock setting.
Appendix
110
21132 TS can be set as 0 ONLY when the frame
format is "unframed".
"0" cannot be specified for the time slot when
other than "unframed" is set for the frame
format.
Set "unframed" for the frame format or specify
another time slot number.
21133 The connection setting cannot be made to the
group to which the format setting has been set.
The connection setting cannot be made to the
group to which the format setting has been set.
Delete the format setting or specify another
group, and then reenter the command.
21135 The reverse path setting cannot be made
within the same port.
The reverse path setting cannot be made
within the same port.
Specify a group within another port.
21138 The specified IP address is invalid. The value of the specified IP address cannot
be specified.
Reenter the command specifying the valid
value for the IP address.
21139 ONLY %s groups can be configured per
system.
The group setting exceeds the maximum
number set by the system.
Existing groups are required to be deleted to
add a new group.
21140 The specified group cannot be set since the
connection setting has already been set.
Group to which the connection setting has
been already set cannot be specified.
Reenter the command specifying another
group or delete the connection setting before
the command execution.
21141 The adaptive-clock setting cannot be
configured from port number 9 to 16 in SAToP
mode.
The adaptive-clock setting cannot be
configured from port 9 to 16 in the SAToP
mode.
Specify a port 1 to 8 and reenter the command.
21144 Neither TDMoP connection nor TDMoP format
setting has been set.
Neither TDMoP connection nor TDMoP format
setting has been set.
Reenter the command specifying a group for
which TDMoP connection and TDMoP format
have been set.
21145 CESoPSN cannot be specified when the frame
format is "unframed".
The CESoPSN mode cannot be specified
when "unframed" is set for the frame format.
Change the frame format or specify the SAToP
mode.
21146 The numbers of TSs of the specified groups
are inappropriate.
The specified groups do not have the same
number of TSs.
Select the groups that have the same number
of TSs.
21147 Since the number of Adaptive-clock mode
settings exceeds the limit for the system, this
setting cannot be made.
The number of Adaptive-clock mode settings
that exceeds the limit for the system cannot be
set.
Reenter the command after deleting an
Adaptive-clock that has already been set.
21148 Since Adaptive-clock format setting has
already been configured, this command cannot
be executed.
Adaptive-clock format has already been
configured.
Check the Adaptive-clock format setting.
Appendix
111
21149 Since Adaptive-clock setting has not been
Adaptive-clock has not been configured.
Check the Adaptive-clock setting.
21150 The Adaptive-clock has already been
configured for the specified port.
The Adaptive-clock has already been
configured for the specified port.
Check the Adaptive-clock setting.
21151 The specified %s%s has already been set. The specified ECID or the combination of the
source UDP port number and the destination
UDP port number has already been set.
combination of the relevant UDP ports or ECID
is not set.
21152 The specified number of frames is invalid. The specified number of transmission frames is
an invalid value.
Check the setting of the number of
transmission frames.
21153 The specified jitter buffer value is invalid. Only
2 msec, 4 msec, or 8 msec can be configured
in dynamic mode.
The values between 16ms and 128ms cannot
be set for the jitter buffer value when the
dynamic mode is set.
Check the setting of the jitter buffer value.
21154 The combination of the specified jitter buffer
value and the configured number of frames is
invalid.
The combination of the specified jitter buffer
value and the number of frames is incorrect.
Check the combination of the setting of the
jitter buffer value and the number of frames.
21155 UDP port cannot be specified when the packet
format is MEF8 or MPLS.
UDP port number cannot be specified when
the packet format is MEF8 or MPLS.
Reenter the command without specifying any
UDP port number.
21156 The specified UDP port(s) have already been
configured in the same line module.
The specified UDP port number has already
been set in the same line card.
Reenter the command specifying another UDP
port number.
21157 Since the fault of CESoP device has occurred,
the specified command cannot be executed
until the CESoP device is reset.
until the CESoP device is reset because a
CESoP device fault occurred.
Reset the CESoP device and reenter the
command.
21160 The MAC address cannot be omitted when the
packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP.
When the packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP,
the MAC address cannot be omitted.
Specify the MAC address and reenter the
command.
21162 Destination MAC Address must be specified
when the packet format is MEF8.
When the packet format is MEF8, the
destination MAC address cannot be omitted.
Reenter the command with the destination
MAC address specified.
21163 UDP-IP cannot be specified when 32T1E1T
line card is running.
When a 32T1E1T line card is mounted, you
cannot set TDM over UDP/IP for the packet
format.
Reenter the command without specifying the
packet format TDM over UDP/IP.
Appendix
112
22000 The specified priority has already been set. The specified priority has already been set. Reenter the command specifying another
priority, or execute the command after deleting
the priority setting.
22001 Priority setting has already been made for the
specified clock source.
Priority setting has already been made for the
specified clock source.
Use another source clock, or delete the priority
setting before the command execution.
22002 Priority setting has already been made for the
specified port range.
Priority setting has already been made for the
specified port range.
Use another port, or delete the priority setting
before the command execution.
22003 The specified port is not registered in
Adaptive-clock mode.
The specified port has not been registered to
Adaptive-clock mode.
Execute the command after registering the port
to adaptive-clock mode.
22004 Since two of clock source settings have
already been configured in LINE1, this setting
cannot be made.
Since two of source clocks have already been
configured in the LINE1 card, this setting
cannot be made.
Delete the priority setting before the command
execution.
22005 Because reference-clock function has already
been set, reference-clock multiple-source
mode cannot be changed.
The port (line)-independent clock mode setting
cannot be changed because the reference
clock function has been set.
Clear the priority setting, reference clock
switchover mode setting, or reference clock
group setting and reenter the command.
22006 The specified command cannot be executed in
the present mode.
The specified command cannot be set in the
current mode.
Check the port (line)-independent clock mode
setting.
22007 The clock source cannot be specified as the
port of the clock supply destination.
The source clock cannot be specified as the
port of the clock supply destination.
Check the input parameter.
22008 The clock supply destination cannot be set for
Group 1.
The clock supply destination port cannot be set
for Group 1.
Check the input parameter.
22009 The specified port has already been set in
another group.
The specified port has already been set for
another group.
Use another port, or clear the reference clock
group setting to which the specified port is
included before executing the command.
22010 The clock source of the specified group has
already been set.
The source clock of the specified group has
already been registered.
Match the clock source port, or use another
group number.
22011 Because TDMoP operation mode is not SAToP
mode, this setting cannot be made.
The setting cannot be done because the
TDMoP operation mode is not SAToP mode.
Change the TDMoP operation mode to SAToP
mode and reenter the command.

Appendix
113
7 Restart Cause List
The table below lists the restart causes.

Type of fault pattern Meaning
Power On Reset Normal start by power-on operation
Command Reset (reset system) Restart by entering the "reset system" command
The status of WDT is abnormal Autonomous restart by hardware decision
The fatal error has occurred Autonomous restart by software decision

Appendix
114
8 IMA State List
The table below lists the IMA states.

No IMA transmission link state Description
01 Not In Group No link is set to the IMA group.
02 Unusable The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.
NoGivenReason : IMA group is not registered.
Fault : User-specific fault occurred.
Misconnected : Misconnect fault occurred.
Inhibited : Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason.
Failed : Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.
03 Usable The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Active report from the remote side.
(Not round-robin object)
04 Active The link is activated and cells can be transmitted from the ATM layer.
(Round-robin object)
No IMA reception link state Description
01 Not In Group No link is set to the IMA group.
02 Unusable The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.
NoGivenReason : IMA group is not registered.
Fault : User-specific fault occurred.
Misconnected : Misconnect fault occurred.
Inhibited : Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason.
Failed : Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.
Appendix
115
03 Usable The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Usable/Active report from the remote side.
(Not round-robin object)
04 Active The link is activated and cells can be transmitted to the ATM layer.
(Round-robin object)
No IMA group state Description
01 Not Configured No IMA group exists.
02 Start-up Waiting for start-up report from the remote IMA. When the IMA group makes valid communication with the
remote IMA, the group parameters are recorded and the IMA group moves to Start-up-Ack.
03 Start-up-Ack This is a temporary state. When the groups of both directions start up, they move to the Insufficient-Links after
this state.
04 Config-Aborted This is the state when the remote IMA tries to use an unacceptable configuration parameter.
05 Insufficient-Links The IMA group accepts the remote group parameter and the remote side accepts the IMA group parameter, but
there are no sufficient links to move to the Operational state.
06 Blocked The IMA group is blocked. When valid links of both directions are active, an IMA group can be blocked for
maintenance.
07 Operational There are valid links of both Tx and Rx directions. The IMA interface can perform reception form the ATM layer
cell and can perform transmission from the IMA sub-layer to the ATM layer.

Appendix
116
9 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed
Connection List
1) 10/100BASE-TX interface connection specifications
Setting of this device
Fixed Setting of remote device
10BASE-T/ Full-duplex 100BASE-TX/ Full-duplex
Auto-negotiation
10BASE-T: Half-duplex - - -
10BASE-T: Full-duplex 10BASE-T: Full-duplex - -
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex - - - F
i
x
e
d

100BASE-TX: Full-duplex - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex -
10BASE-T: Half-duplex only - - -
10BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - 10BASE-T: Full-duplex
10BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 10BASE-T: Full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only - - -
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
1000BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - -
1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - -
A
u
t
o
-
n
e
g
o
t
i
a
t
i
o
n

10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
(Legend) -: Not covered by continuity guarantee
(Caution) In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.
Appendix
117
2) 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T interface connection specifications
100BASE-TX Full-duplex 1000BASE-T Full-duplex
Auto-negotiation
10BASE-T: Full-duplex - - -
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex - - -
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex - -
F
i
x
e
d

1000BASE-T: Full-duplex - - -
10BASE-T: Full-duplex only - - -
10BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - -
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only - - -
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex - - 100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
1000BASE-T: Full-duplex only - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex
1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex
A
u
t
o
-
n
e
g
o
t
i
a
t
i
o
n

10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex - 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex 1000BASE-T: Full-duplex
(Caution) In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.
Appendix
118
3) 1000BASE-X interface connection specifications
1000BASE-T full-duplex
Auto-negotiation
1000BASE-X: Half-duplex - - Fixed
1000BASE-X: Full-duplex 1000BASE-X: Full-duplex -
1000BASE-X: Half-duplex only - - Auto-negotiation
1000BASE-X: Full-duplex only - 1000BASE-X: Full-duplex


Appendix
119
10 ATM Shaper Setting Bandwidth Value List
ATM Shaper bandwidth setting list when no IMA setting is configured
Bandwidth Setting Value (Kbps)
Line Card Type Frame Type Frame Format
min max
1ATM155A
(Granularity: 500 Kbps)
- - 500 149500
T1 - 64 1536
crc4
crc4nocas
non-crc4
64 1920
32T1E1H
(Granularity: 64 Kbps)
E1
unframed 64 2048

ATM Shaper bandwidth setting list when an IMA setting is configured
- When T1 is set
Number of Ports for IMA Group
IMA
Frame Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
32 2944 4416 5888 7424 8896 10368 11840
64 3008 4480 6016 7552 9024 10560 12032
128 3008 4544 6080 7616 9088 10624 12160
256 3008 4544 6080 7616 9152 10688 12224
* Unit: Kbps
* Granularity: 64 Kbps
Appendix
120
- When E1 is set
- Frame format: crc4/crc4nocas/non-crc4
IMA
Frame Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
32 3712 5568 7424 9280 11136 12992 14848
64 3776 5632 7552 9408 11328 13184 15104
128 3776 5696 7616 9472 11392 13312 15232
256 3776 5696 7616 9536 11456 13376 15232
* Unit: Kbps

- Frame format: unframed
IMA
Frame Size
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
32 3904 5888 7872 9856 11840 13824 15808
64 3968 6016 8000 10048 12032 14080 16064
128 4032 6080 8064 10112 12160 14208 16192
256 4032 6080 8128 10176 12224 14272 16256
* Unit: Kbps

Appendix
121
11 List of Operations on ATM Loopback Cell
Reception
Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the ATM line side
(Test status of the received connection: Untested)
Received Connection
Type
(VP/ VC)
Flow Type
(segment / end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none / end-point /
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/ Loopback)
Location ID
(Matched/ Unmatched)
Operation
none - - Transparent
Insert Matched Loopback
Insert Unmatched Discard
end-point
Loopback - Discard
Insert Unmatched Transparent
segment
con-point
Loopback - Transparent
VP Connection
end-to-end con-point - - Transparent
none - - Discard
segment
end-point
Loopback - Discard
VC Connection
end-to-end end-point
Loopback - Discard
Flow Type: Flow type of the received connection (It can be specified by the "set atm-oam flow" command.)
Flow Point: Flow point setting of the received connection (It can be specified by the "set atm-oam flow" command.)
LB Indication: Type of the received loopback cell
"Insert" and "Loopback" indicate the request cell and the response cell respectively.
Appendix
122

Received Connection
Type
(VP/ VC)
Flow Type
(segment /
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none / end-point /
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/ Loopback)
Location ID
Operation
end-point - - Transparent
segment
con-point - - Transparent
VP Connection
end-point
Loopback - Discard
segment
con-point
VC Connection

Appendix
123
Operations performed when a F4 loopback cell is received from the SW side

Received Connection
Type
(VP/ VC)
Flow Type
(segment /
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none / end-point /
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/ Loopback)
Location ID
Operation
end-point
Loopback - Discard
segment
con-point
VP Connection
none - - Discard segment
end-point - - Discard
VC Connection
end-to-end end-point - - Discard

Appendix
124

Received Connection
Type
(VP/ VC)
Flow Type
(segment /
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none / end-point /
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/ Loopback)
Location ID
Operation
end-point - - Transparent
segment
con-point - - Transparent
VP Connection
end-point
Loopback - Discard
segment
con-point
VC Connection

Appendix
125
(Test status of the received connection: Testing)
Received
Connection
Type
(VP/VC)
Flow Type
(segment/
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none/
end-point/
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/
Loopback)
LB Indication
Check
(Enabled/
Disabled)
Source ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Correlation
Tag
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Location ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Operation
Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback
Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Discard
Insert Disabled Matched Matched - Succeed
Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Discard
Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Discard
end-point
Loopback Enabled Matched Matched - Succeed
Insert Enabled - - Unmatched Transparent
Loopback Enabled Unmatched - - Transparent
Loopback Enabled Matched Unmatched - Transparent
segment
con-point
Insert Enabled - - - Transparent
VP Connection
end-to-end con-point
Insert Enabled - - Matched Loopback VC Connection segment end-point
Appendix
126
Received
Connection
Type
(VP/VC)
Flow Type
(segment/
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none/
end-point/
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/
Loopback)
LB Indication
Check
(Enabled/
Disabled)
Source ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Correlation
Tag
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Location ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Operation
end-to-end end-point

LB Indication Check: Indicates whether the LB indication check is enabled or disabled
It can be specified as a parameter of the "loopback atm" command. A request cell is handled as a response cell when the check is disabled.

Appendix
127

Received
Connection
Type
(VP/VC)
Flow Type
(segment/
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none/
end-point/
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/
Loopback)
LB Indication
Check
(Enabled/
Disabled)
Source ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Correlation
Tag
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Location ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Operation
end-point - - - - - Transparent segment
con-point - - - - - Transparent
VP Connection
end-to-end con-point - - - - - Transparent
end-point
segment
con-point
VC Connection

Appendix
128

Received
Connection
Type
(VP/VC)
Flow Type
(segment/
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none/
end-point/
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/
Loopback)
LB Indication
Check
(Enabled/
Disabled)
Source ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Correlation
Tag
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Location ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Operation
segment con-point
VP Connection

Appendix
129

Received
Connection
Type
(VP/VC)
Flow Type
(segment/
end-to-end)
Flow Point
(none/
end-point/
con-point)
LB Indication
(Insert/
Loopback)
LB Indication
Check
(Enabled/
Disabled)
Source ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Correlation
Tag
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Location ID
(Matched/
Unmatched)
Operation
segment con-point - - - - - Transparent VP Connection
end-to-end con-point - - - - - Transparent
segment con-point
VC Connection

(blank page)

End User License Agreement
Please read this license agreement carefully before using the CX2200.
This license agreement (hereinafter referred to as This Agreement) is a legally biding document made and entered by
and between Customer (regardless whether you are an individual customer or corporate customer) and NEC Corporation
(hereinafter referred to as NEC) concerning the use of the software defined below (hereinafter referred to as This
Software).
This software is installed on NEC's CX2200 (hereinafter referred to as Unit). By using this Unit that contains This
Software, you agree to be bound by This Agreement. If you do not agree all of the terms and conditions of This
Agreement, NEC will not grant to you a license to use This Software or make a copy of This Software. If you do not
agree This Agreement, immediately return this Unit in unused condition to the place of purchase. A return to a retail
shop of NEC or retail shop authorized by NEC within fifteen (15) days of the purchase date will receive a full refund.
Only the original purchaser is granted a right to return this Unit and get a refund.
Definition of This Software: A set of computer programs installed on this Unit, and printed materials (including documents
such as manuals) and electronic files related to these programs. This Software herein also includes upgrades, bug
fixes, and revisions (generically termed upgrades) that NEC or NEC's distributors may supply to Customer, and backup
copies of This Software. The terms and conditions hereof are applicable to all that are defined as This Software.
License Grant: Customer is granted the following rights under This Agreement:
Customer shall have the right to use This Software only on this Unit subject to personal use (or internal business use).
Customer shall have the right to make a copy of This Software, of which number is limited to one, on the desired device
or medium, subject to backup.
Prohibition of reverse engineering, reverse compilation, and reverse assembly: Customer shall have no right to reverse
engineer, reverse compile, or reverse assemble This Software.
Prohibition of disassembly: Customer is granted a license to use This Software as a single product. Customer shall
have no right to disassemble This Software into components and use them on the multiple Units.
Prohibition of rental: Customer shall have no right to rent, lease, or commercially share This Software.
Prohibition of sharing: Customer shall have no right to share This Software with any other users by remote access or any
other means.
Assignment, transfer, or disposal of This Software: Customer may assign This Agreement and all the rights hereunder to
a third party, only when Customer assigns, transfers, or otherwise disposes of This Software together with this Unit that
Customer purchased, to the third party on a permanent basis, on condition that the third party agrees all terms and
conditions of This Agreement. Upon such assignment, transfer, or disposal of This Agreement, Customer shall not
possess This Software or any part of it, including but not limited to backup copies of This Software.
Termination: NEC may terminate This Agreement if Customer should commit any breach of This Agreement without
prejudice to any other rights. Upon termination of This Agreement, in any case, Customer must cease using This
Software and destroy all copies and components of This Software.
Warranty: NEC does not warrant This Software in any way subject to This Agreement. NEC shall warrant this Unit
subject to the terms and conditions of the maintenance agreement that should be separately made and entered by and
between Customer and NEC.
In no event will NEC and its suppliers, regardless of the legal constitution, be liable for any loss of data, profits, or
estimated profits, or any other special, indirect, consequential, incidental, punitive, or any similar type damages arising
from This Software, or the use or inability to use of This Software, even if NEC has been advised of the possibility of
such loss or damages. In no event, liability for damages assumed by NEC and its suppliers to Customer, whether in
contract, tort (including negligence), or any other claims, exceed the price paid by Customer for the cost of this Unit.
Intellectual property right: NEC and its suppliers have all and any copyrights and other intellectual property rights on This
Software and its copies. NEC shall not assign any intellectual property rights on This Software to Customer by This
Agreement.
Export: Customer shall not export This Software or its copies out of Japan without permission granted by the government
of Japan and the government of the country that is involved.
This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan.

(Blank page)

PASOLINK NEO TE CX2200
Multi-service Transport Gateway
Instruction Manual
NWD-064951-005

2007 NEC Corporation
Version 2.5 Rev. B
January 2010
NEC Corporation
(All rights reserved)

NEC Corporation

Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200 - Instruction Manual Ver - 02.05

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Pasolink Neo Te Cx2200 - Instruction Manual Ver - 02.05

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PASOLINK NEO TE

LOS/AIS/LOF detection at the

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

CESoP Buffer Underrun

ALL1 data output (Note2)

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point

: Alarm detection point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

: Alarm detection point, : Alarm transparent point, : Alarm discard point

S-ar putea să vă placă și